Home

ACS310 User`s Manual - HSL Automation Home Page

1. L ZEE LOLLP OLOP LOP Z LOY UN O38 2 Ly pue Op dnoJ ei z pue Jas 1ejeurejed qd Uewe stees z0v JejeueJeg X ei 8 u O e Gees lei jeueg Qa Jo 84 alid e ool Jr t l now SIE E 10v WNWOO ino Ou eg rg S ZOLL ZOH J MOd S By INEA 9 anbioy 5 i 19 101 U09 19V Gld 7 quand 3 S did uonoejes IV 2 Jeun YOUMS ye id e 9011 g was zi dnou 1ndNI E EXIL 8 u IV ba gje1 UE E peeds TET bei uejsuo jer es E Z peeds 1suo ar 9 peeds abeuany Zt dno COLL LAdNI O384 o 2 jaued jo3u05 9 u IV 9 o dono i JU peods you joueg A LOLL juejsuoo Dags o jeJ 1 IN3H JeJ L 1X3 t KouenbeJ4 i o 00S 2 peeds 95008 e uev U9IIMS YU o AN3U 901 901 4814 jaued z DA Jeuur o Ups 90LL dol c je 2007 REES 22 i ep top HN WINOO ze F no tard EU ii wa el ee ER Zjal jeuegd e queuing t uonoejes IV ZS MS ye did FO Program features 113 B Settings Parameter Additional information 1101 Local control mode reference type selection 1102 EXT1 2 selection 1106 PID1 activation 1107 REF2 minimum limit 1501 PID2 output external controller connection to AO 9902 PID control macro selection Group 40
2. pue 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen 2 JAH External reference 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC 5 AIS PID feedback 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common 7 AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA 1 8 AGND Analog output circuit common 9 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC r 110 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 11 DCOM Digital input common for all 412 D1 Start Stop Activate to start drive I 413 DI2 Run permissive Deactivate to stop drive P 1601 I 4114 DIS Constant Preset speed 1 P 1202 I 3415 DI4 Safety interlock1 Deactivate to stop drive P 1608 Le DI5 Safety interlock2 Deactivate to stop drive P 1609 XTBrzTRO1C Relay output 1 P 1401 18 RO1A fN Default operation Started gt 17 connected to 19 19 RO1B 20 DOSRC Digital output max 100 mA P 1805 21 DOOUT Hp No fault Fault 1 gt 20 connected to 22 22 DOGND Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9902 applic macro 6 BOOSTERPUMP 2203 deceler time 1 5 0s 1401 relay output 1 7 STARTED 3207 superv 3 param 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 1601 run enable 2 DI2 4001 gain 1 0 1609 start enable 2 5 D15 4002 integration time 60 0s 2202 acceler time 1 5 0s
3. Modbus Internal Location ABB DRV LIM DCU PROFILE ABB DRV FULL Ref All Profiles 5305 0 5305 1 5305 2 00001 CONTROL WORD DO OFF1 STOP OFF1 00002 coNrROL WORD Bit 1 OFF2 START OFF2 00003 CONTROL WORD Bit2 OFF3 REVERSE OFF3 00004 CONTROL WORD Bit 3 START LOCAL START 00005 CONTROL WORD Bit 4 N A RESET RAMP OUT ZERO 00006 CONTROL WORD Bit5 RAMP HOLD EXT2 RAMP HOLD 00007 CONTROL WORD Bit6 RAMP IN ZERO RUN DISABLE RAMP IN ZERO 00008 CONTROL WORD Bit7 RESET STPMODE R RESET 00009 CONTROL WORD Bit8 N A STPMODE EM N A 00010 CONTROL WORD Bit9 N A STPMODE C N A 00011 CONTROL WORD Bit 10 N A RAMP 2 REMOTE CMD 00012 CONTROL WORD Bit 11 EXT2 DAMP OUT 0 EXT2 00013 CONTROL WORD Bit 12 N A RAMP HOLD N A 00014 CONTROL WORD Bit 13 N A RAMP IN 0 N A 00015 CONTROL WORD Bit 14 N A REQ LOCALLOCK N A 00016 CONTROL WORD Bit 15 N A TORQLIM2 N A 310 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Modbus Internal Location ABB DRV LIM DCU PROFILE ABB DRV FULL Ref All Profiles 5305 0 5305 1 5305 2 00017 CONTROL WORD Bit 16 Does not apply FBLOCAL CTL Does not apply 00018 CONTROL WORD Bit 17 FBLOCAL REF 00019 CONTROL WORD Bit 18 START DISABLE1 00020 CONTROL WORD Bit 19 START DISABLE2 00021 Reserved Rese
4. Select DH Dii bis EXT DIS G Start stop Fieldbus selection irection ee chapter Embedded fieldbus Fieldbus control with COMM embedded fieldbus 1001 on page 257 Control panel KEYPAD TIMED FUNC 1 4 Timed function B Block diagram Reference source for EXT1 The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for the speed reference of external control location EXT1 J Select Al Alt AIS DIS D14 DIS A EXT DI3 G Reference Hd REF1 DI4 Fieldbus selection Hz rpm DIS a See chapter comm Embedded fieldbus Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 1103 on page 257 FREQ INPUT Frequency input KEYPAD Control panel 96 Program features Reference types and processing The drive can accept a variety of references in addition to the conventional analog input and control panel signals The drive reference can be given with two digital inputs One digital input increases the speed the other decreases it The drive can form a reference out of two analog input signals by using mathematical functions Addition subtraction multiplication and division The drive can form a reference out of an analog input signal and a signal received through a serial communication interface by using mathematical functions Addition and multipli
5. Bit Name Value Command Req Comments 0 STOP 1 Stop Stops according to either the stop 0 no op mode parameter or the stop mode p requests bits 7 and 8 1 START 1 Start Simultaneous STOP and START 0 no op commands result in a stop command 2 REVERSE 1 Reverse direction This bit XOR d with the sign of the 0 Forward direction reference defines direction 3 LOCAL 1 Local mode When the fieldbus sets this bit it steals control and the drive moves to 0 External mode fieldbus local control mode 4 RESET gt 1 Reset Edge sensitive other no op 5 EXT2 1 Switch to EXT2 0 Switch to ExT1 6 RUN DISABLE 1 Run disable Inverted run enable 0 Run enable on 7 STPMODE_R 1 Normal ramp stop mode 0 no op 318 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus DCU Profile coNTROL WoRD See Parameter 0301 Bit Name Value Command Req Comments 8 STPMODE EM 1 Emergency ramp stop mode 0 no op 9 STPMODE C 1 Coast stop mode 0 no op 10 RAMP 2 1 Ramp pair 2 0 Ramp pair 1 11 RAMP OUT O0 1 Ramp output to 0 0 no op 12 RAMP HOLD 1 Ramp freeze 0 no op 13 RAMP IN O 1 Ramp input to 0 0 no op 14 RREQ LOCALLO 1 Local mode lock In lock drive will not switch to local C 0 no op mode 15 TORQLIM2 1 Torque limit pair 2 0 Torque limit pair 1 DCU Profile CONTROL worD See Param
6. Frame size R4 IP20 NEMA 1 3AUA0000051133 A 372 Index Numerics Oxxxx register EFB function codes sss 310 EFB mapping insin 309 1xxxx register EFB function codes ss 311 EFB mapping ascendi iesp 310 3xxxx register EFB function codes ss 312 EFB mapping eeeeeeeese 311 4xxxx register EFB function codes 314 EFB mapping eeeeeeese 312 A acceleration deceleration parameter group 173 at aux stop PFA parameter 254 ramp select parameter 173 ramp shape parameter 174 ramp time PFA parameter 254 ramp zero select parameter 175 time parameter sssssssssss 173 activate external PID parameter 220 actual input PID parameters 210 actual max PID parameters 211 actual min PID parameters 211 actual signals parameter group 134 actual values scaling EFB comm suss 271 scaling FLN fieldbus 286
7. Code Description Range Resolution Default S 0163 TO STATUS 121 Status of transistor output when transistor output is used as a digital output 0164 TO FREQUENCY 1 1 Hz Transistor output frequency when transistor output is used as a frequency output 0173 RO 2 4 STATUS Status of the relays in the Relay Output Extension Module MREL 0 See MREL 01 Relay Output Extension Module User s Manual 3AUA0000035974 English Example 100 RO 2 is on RO3 and RO 4 are off 0174 SAVED KWH 120 1 kWh Energy saved in kWh compared to the energy used when the pump is connected directly to the supply Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET resets all energy calculators at the same time See group 45 ENERGY SAVING 0175 SAVED MWH 1 1MWh Energy saved in MWh compared to the energy used when the pump is connected directly to the supply Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET resets all energy calculators at the same time See group 45 ENERGY SAVING 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 1 2 0 1 Currency Energy saved in local currency To find out the total saved energy in currency units add the value of parameter 0177 multiplied by 1000 to the value fo parameter 0176 Example 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 123 4 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 5 Total saved energy 5 1000 123 4 5123 4 currency units Local energy price is set with parameter 4502 ENERGY PRICE Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET resets all energy calculators at the sam
8. Protocol Reference Drive Parameter Value Setting Modbus dcu N2 FLN BACnet abb drv profile 1601 RUN 7 comm Run enable by 40001 40031 BO4 35 BV12 ENABLE fieldbus Not bit 3 bit 6 recommended inverted 1604 FAULT 8 COMM Fault reset by 40001 40031 DOG 94 BV14 RESET SEL fieldbus bit 7 bit 4 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 267 Protocol Reference Drive Parameter Value Setting Modbus dcu N2 FLN BACnet abb drv profile 1606 LOCAL 8 COMM Source for local Does not 40031 LOCK lock selection is the apply bit 14 fieldbus 1607 PARAM 1 SAVE Saves altered 41607 40032 BO18 N A SAVE parameters to bit 2 memory then value returns to 0 1608 START 7 COMM Source for start Does not 40032 BV20 ENABLE 1 enable 1 is the apply bit 2 fieldbus Command word Not recommended 1609 START 7 COMM Source for start 40032 BV21 ENABLE 2 enable 2 is the bit 3 fieldbus Command word Not recommended 2013 MIN 7 COMM Source for 40031 TORQUE minimum torque bit 15 SEL Selection is the fieldbus 2014 MAX 7 COMM Source for TORQUE maximum torque SEL Selection is the fieldbus 2201 AcC DEC 7 COMM Source for ramp 40031 1 2 sEL pair selection is the bit 10 fieldbus 1 ABB recommends hard wiring run permissive and safeties B Relay Output Control Using the fiel
9. Code Description Range Resolution Default S 5202 BAUDRATE 9 6 115 2 kbits s 9 6 kbits s Defines the communication speed of the drive in kbits per second kbits s 9 6 19 2 38 4 57 6 115 2 5203 PARITY 0 3 1 0 Sets the character format to be used with the panel communication 0 8N1 No parity one stop bit 1 8N2 No parity two stop bits 2 8E1 Even parity one stop bit 3 801 Odd parity one stop bit 5204 OK MESSAGES 0 65535 1 Contains a count of valid Modbus messages received by the drive During normal operation this counter is increasing constantly 5205 PARITY ERRORS 0 65535 1 Contains a count of the characters with a parity error that is received from the fieldbus For high counts check Parity settings of devices connected on the fieldbus they must not differ Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors 5206 FRAME ERRORS 0 65535 1 Contains a count of the characters with a framing error that the fieldbus receives For high counts check Communication speed settings of devices connected on the fieldbus they must not differ Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors 5207 BUFFER 0 65535 1 OVERRUNS Contains a count of the characters received that cannot be placed in the buffer Longest possible message length for the drive is 128 bytes Received messages exceeding
10. 173 Index 377 378 Index ramp shape parameter 174 ramp time PFA parameter 254 ramp zero select parameter 175 time parameter ssesssssssss 173 default macto ihe eret 76 derating altitude beet 350 switching frequency sseesss 350 lemperatute eset RUE 350 derivation time PID parameter 206 device overtemperature fault code 336 device type N2 eese 277 diagnostics EFB COMM 2232 npe 272 differences list downloads 69 digital cable requirements eeeeeeeeeeneneenes 37 digital input at fault history parameters 139 CONNECHONS ues teer tern de cd 46 digital output CONNECTIONS irre eR 46 Specifications eeren 356 dimensions ue It BEE 363 outside enclosure ssesseee 363 direction control parameter ssusssss 142 display format PID parameter 207 222 download CIC 69 handling inexact transfers 68 paramelter selts x inb eire 66 drive control terminal AA 46 device type N2 eene 277 EFB comm installation 51 260 fan replacement ccecce 345 id fa lt code Eed AE deed 338 id
11. seesssssusse 188 thermal fail fault code 338 timer functions parameter group eee eee eee 118 timers BOOSH zc ttn m ee en er beets 199 enable e telae ten 197 parameter group eee eee etree 196 SOUICE eon tis RED de ELIO 200 start stop time ssssesssssssss 197 201 233 234 240 loolS 5e sto E pest REP 28 torque at fault history parameter 139 boost current parameter 172 data parameter sense 130 trim mode PID parameter 220 trim scale PID parameter 220 type designation key eseese 25 U U f ratio parameter sesssesssssss 177 UL type 1 CODE E 26 desCriptlOT 2 itte o eer ce ee Pieds 356 UL type 12 Gode E 26 description eeeeeeeeeneeeeees 356 undervoltage automatic reset parameter 184 control enable parameter 170 units PID parameter A 207 user load curve frequency parameters 201 202 function parameter ssss 201 mode parameter sssusssss 201 time parameter ssssssssse 201 torque parameters ssss 201 202 user parameter set change control parameter
12. 82 Start Up PFC Control Macro This macro provides parameter settings for pump and fan control PFC applications To enable the macro set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 7 PFC CONTROL Note Parameter 9902 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting 0 OFF E Default I O connections X1A 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen E 2 All Ext ref 1 Hand Ext ref 2 PID PFC 0 10 V 1 10 koh 3 GND Analog input circuit common d 4 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC max 10 mA D gt en 5 AI2 Process actual value 4 20 mA 6 GND Analog input circuit common D a 7 AO Output frequency value 0 20 mA ve Z 8 GND Analog output circuit common 9 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC max 200 mA 10 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 11 DCOM Digital input common 12 DI1 Stop 0 Start 1 Hand 13 DI2 Hand 0 PID PFC 1 control selection 14 DI3 Interlock Deactivation always stops the drive 15 DI4 Interlock Deactivation stops constant speed motor 16 DI5 Stop 0 Start 1 PID PFC X1B 17 ROCOM Relay output 1 PF Bina ec 20 DOSRC Digital output max 100 mA e 21 DOOUT No fault Fault 1 22 DOGND Start Up 83 B Internal Timer This macro configures fo
13. 130 output wiring EH e 339 overcurrent automatic reset parameter fault code sss overspeed fault code suuussss panel display variables parameter group panel loss fault code sssss parameter analog input scale fault code analog output scale fault code change lock eseeesscceeeeseeeeseeeeteeeteseees external relay output fault code fieldbus fault code hz rpm fault code ssusssss PCU 1 power control unit fault code PCU 2 power control unit fault code PFC mode fault code PFC ref neg fault code restore Assistant panel save changes parameter parameter view parameter parameters editing tetuer view changes seee parity RS232 parameter parity errors count parameter PE earth earth fault parameter PE earth connection terminal size cesses Volt UE acceleration time parameter aux start order parameter aux motor start delay parameter aux motor stop delay para
14. 233 parity errors parameter 233 RS485 comm EEN 260 run enable source select parameter 158 run time data parameter 130 S Sally icit e cede ien titre ees 15 scaling actual values EFB comm 271 FLN actual values 286 reference EFB ABB drives profile 324 S curve ramp parameter 174 sensor type parameter 194 serial 1 error fault code 28 273 serial 1 error fault code s 338 serial communication see comm serial number sssssssssseses 25 setpoint maximum PID parameter 209 setpoint minimum PID parameter 209 setpoint select PID parameter 208 shock EU DEE 357 short circuit fault code ese 336 sleep selection PID parameter 212 slip compensation ratio parameter 177 soft keys control panel AN 55 specifications control connections esses 356 ese joo wai ei agra ages 345 input POWE eene 355 MAINS coir esed ere ep E E D ath 355 motor connections 355 speed at fault history parameter 139 data parameter sense 130 speed constant digital in
15. 65 control word comm EFB description 315 e elei e ENEE 345 fan maintenance triggers 179 COOLING TAN x oret tinens 345 correction source PID parameter 221 cover le VC 50 CRC errors count parameter 233 critical speeds avoiding high parameters AA 176 low parameters sesessss 175 parameter group eee eee etree 175 select parameter sssuuss 175 C Tick marking eeseeeeee 361 current at fault history parameter 139 data parameter sese 130 max limit parameter 169 measurement fault code 338 rating coden iann N ienaa 26 D DC brake time parameter 172 DC bus voltage data parameter 130 DC current ref parameter 172 DC magnetizing time parameter 171 DC overvoltage fault code 330 336 DC stabilator parameter 178 DC undervoltage fault code 330 336 DDL file N2 5 3 5 eue 280 deceleration at aux start PFA parameter 254 emergency time parameter 174 parameter group e eee eee eee 173 ramp select parameter
16. 339 information parameter group e eee eee errr 188 input power branch circuit protection 34 361 cable wire requirements 34 TS out AEn oes ae tee S 351 specifications eeeeeeee 355 input power connection eeens 44 terminal size a e r aa a ae arara 354 ele EE 354 installation compatibility 25 5 eec 34 environment ssssssssseeeenee 357 flow Chart 2 EEN 21 eet TEE 27 ele 28 insulation Che Ck aati aed ide ist ops 43 integration time PID parameter 206 220 interlocks Parameter oid octets 248 internal setpoint PID parameter 209 IR compensation frequency parameter 177 parameters une tee redes 176 voltage parameter ssssse 176 Index 381 382 Index K keypad reference select parameter 142 kWh counter data parameter 131 L label serial number ssssssssssss 25 type designation key 25 language parameter eese 128 liability limits esses 362 limits parameter group eene 169 load analyzer group eene 235 load frequency see user load curve load package version parameter 188 load torque see user load curve local mode lo
17. 296 N2 object listing esses 278 binary output BACnet object listing 297 N2 object listing esses 280 branch circuit protection sses 34 361 break point frequency fault parameter 182 buffer overruns count parameter 233 C cable requirements grounding iecore tts 36 46 50 Input DOWOF 3 inier nes 34 OO OE iare pet prex 35 capacitor maintenance interval 344 reforming EEN 346 CE marking eec urere es 359 CISPR11 class A radiation limits ssessesssssss 359 CISPR11 class B radiation limits pesis oien a s 360 elle 70 comm fault function parameter 183 fault time parameter 183 protocol select parameter 256 relay output word data parameter 131 values data parameter 132 comm EFB actual value scaling 271 actual values ssessssssssss 269 also see RS232 sees 232 analog output control activate 268 baud rate parameter 234 comm fault response ss 183 269 config file fault code sssse 338 CONTI
18. Number Object Mio a Units Range Al7 DRIVE TEMPERATURE 0110 10 ke 0 125 AI8 KILOWATT HOURS 0115 1 kWh 0 65535 AI9 MEGAWATT HOURS 0141 1 MWh 0 65535 Al10 RUN TIME 0114 1 H 0 65535 Alti DC BUS VOLTAGE 0107 1 V 0 999 Al12 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 0109 1 V 0 999 Al13 PRC PID FEEDBACK 0130 10 0 100 Al14 PRC PID DEVIATION 0132 10 0 100 Al15 EXT PID FEEDBACK 0131 10 0 100 Al16 EXT PID DEVIATION 0133 10 96 0 100 Al17 LAST FAULT 0401 1 fault code Al18 PREV FAULT 0402 1 fault code Al19 OLDEST FAULT 0403 1 fault code Al20 Al 1 ACTUAL 0120 10 96 0 100 Al21 Al 2 ACTUAL 0121 10 0 100 Al22 AO 1 ACTUAL 0124 10 mA 0 20 Al24 MOTOR TEMP 0145 1 e 0 200 Al25 REVOLUTION CNT 0142 1 MREV 0 32767 1 RATED SPEED is a percent of maximum frequency parameter 2008 if the drive is in scalar mode and is a percent of maximum speed parameter 2002 in speed mode B N2 Binary Input Objects The following table lists the N2 Binary Input objects defined for the ACS320 drive N2 Binary Inputs Number Object Drive Parameter Range BH STOP RUN Status Word 0 Stop 1 Drive Running Bl2 FORWARD REVERSE Status Word 0 Forward 1 Reverse BI3 FAULT STATUS Status Word 0 OK 1 Drive Fault Bl4 RELAY 1 STATUS 0122 bit mask 04 0 Off 1 2 On BI5 RELAY 2 STATUS 0122 bit mask 02 0 Off 1 On Bl6 RELAY 3 STATUS 0122 bitmask01 l0 Off 1 On BI7
19. Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 257 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus System overview The drive can be connected to an external control system via embedded fieldbus The embedded fieldbus supports Modbus RTU BACnet Metasys N2 and APOGEE FLN Protocols Embedded fieldbus connection is either RS 232 control panel connector X2 or RS 485 I O terminals 23 26 The maximum length of the communication cable with RS 232 is restricted to 3 meters RS 232 is designed for a point to point application a single master controlling one slave RS 485 is designed for a multipoint application a single master controlling one or more slaves 258 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Fieldbus controller Fieldbus devices Embedded fieldbus connection or RS 485 Data flow 8 Control Word CW a4 References Process UO cyclic Status Word SW Actual values J 9 Service messages acyclic Parameter R W The drive can be set to receive all of its control information through the fieldbus interface or the control can be distributed between the fieldbus interface and other available sources eg digital and analog inputs Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 259 B Control Interface In general the basic control interface between the fieldbus system and t
20. Sont Subpoint Name Data Type 10 LAI DRIVE KWH 11 LAI DRIVE MWH 12 LAI RUN TIME 13 LA DC BUS VOLT 14 LAl OUTPUT VOLT 17 LAl MOTOR TEMP 18 LAl MREV COUNTER 21 LDI FWD REV 23 LDI STOP RUN 25 LDI EXT1 2 ACT 27 LDI DRIVE READY 28 LDI AT SETPOINT 33 LDI HANDAUTO ACT 34 LDI ENA DIS ACT 36 LDI FLNLOC ACT Drive I O FLN Drive UO Report Soini Subpoint Name Data Type 40 LDO RO 1 COMMAND Each host FLN application e g CIS or Insight i LDO ROz COMMAND jeenrels both the Paricuar data reported foreach 42 LDO RO 3 COMMAND 43 ILDO RO 4 COMMAND 46 LAO AO 1 COMMAND 70 LDI DI1 ACTUAL 71 LDI DI2 ACTUAL 72 LDI DI3 ACTUAL 73 LDI DI4 ACTUAL 74 LDI DI 5 ACTUAL 76 UD RO 1 ACTUAL 77 LDI RO2ACTUAL 78 LDI ROS3ACTUAL 79 LDI RO4 ACTUAL Drive Config Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 285 FLN Drive Config Report FO Subpoint Name Data Type 30 LAO CURRENT LIM Each host FLN application e g CIS or Insight s LAO ACCEL TINE 1 degt 32 LAO DECEL TIME 1 48 LDO RST RUN TIME 49 LDO RESET KWH 59 LDO LOCK PANEL 66 LDO SPD OUT MIN 67 LDO SPD OUT MAX 95 LAO MBOX PARAM 96 LAO MBOX DATA 97 LDO MBOX READ 98 LDO MBOX WRITE Process PID FLN Process PID Report ZOIN Subpoint Name Data Type 15 LAI PRC PID FB
21. seen 205 integration time parameter 206 220 internal setpoint parameter 209 offset parameter ssssssss 220 output data parameter 131 parameter set select parameter 214 process sets parameter groups 113 203 scaling 0 100 parameters 207 setpoint maximum parameter 209 setpoint minimum parameter 209 setpoint select parameter 208 setpoint source EFB comm activate 269 setpoint data parameter 131 sleep delay parameter 212 213 sleep level parameter 212 sleep selection parameter 212 trim mode parameter 220 trim scale parameter 220 units actual signal parameter 207 wake up delay parameter 213 wake up deviation parameter 213 PID controller advanced set up eeeene 204 DasiC Set Up nn Asari rr eene 113 203 planning EFB comm iden UE 259 PNP 1 datus DU PRSE ERU 47 data parameter sese 130 first applied 5 ene 56 previous faults history parameters 139 process PID sets parameter groups 113 203 process variabl
22. BV21 START ENABLE 2 This object commands start enable1 Control requires param 1609 value COMM ENABLE DISABLE C Note For Present Value Access Types R Read only W Writeable C Commandable Commandable values support priority arrays amp relinquish defaults B Analog Input Object Instance Summary The following table summarizes the Analog Input Objects supported Instance Object Name Description Units joel Si AIO ANALOG INPUT This object indicates the value of Percent R 1 Analog Input 1 The corresponding drive parameter is 0120 Ali ANALOG INPUT This object indicates the value of Percent R 2 Analog Input 2 The corresponding drive parameter is 0121 Note For Present Value Access Types R Read only W Writeable C Commandable Commandable values support priority arrays amp relinquish defaults 300 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus B Analog Output Object Instance Summary The following table summarizes the Analog Output Objects supported Instance Present Value 0135 COMM VALUE 1 Control requires parameter 1501 value 135 Object Name Description Units Access Type AOO AO 1 This object controls Analog Output 1 Percent C COMMAND The corresponding drive parameter is Note For Present Value Access Types R Read only W Writeable C Commandable Commandable values support priori
23. PNP connection source NPN connection sink x1 x1 9 424V 1 9 24V r 10 GND 10 GND 111 DCOM 11 DCOM 12 DI1 lt 12 DI1 13 DI2 L 413 DI2 L H4 IDI3 LI 4114 DI3 I 2415 DI4 I 415 DI4 16 DI5 316 DI5 External power supply for digital inputs For using an external 24 V supply for the digital inputs see the figure below PNP connection source NPN connection sink x1 x1 9 24V 9 24V eves pco 3 P6 I im Icon 24V DC e Jemen 0 V DC e H2 Dh I 4113 DI2 I 413 DI2 L 4114 DI3 I 4114 DI3 lt 15 DI4 lt 15 Dl4 lt 16 DI5 lt 16 DI5 Frequency input If DI5 is used as a frequency input see section Frequency input on page 100 for how to set parameters accordingly 48 Electrical installation Connection example of a two wire sensor HVAC Default Supply Fan Return Fan Cooling Tower Fan Condenser Booster pumps PFC Control Internal Timer Dual Setpoint with PID E Clipse and Dual Setpoint with PID and Constant Speeds macros see section Application Macros on page 72 use analog input 2 Al2 The macro wiring diagrams for these macros show the connection when a separately powered sensor is used The figure below gives an example of a connect
24. Note In frame size R4 the EMC screw is located to the right of terminal W2 44 Electrical installation Connecting the power cables B Connection diagram Drive INPUT OUTPUT PE U1 V1 Wt U2 v2 w2 For alternatives see section PE Selecting the supply M disconnecting device i disconnecting means on CH m i pro page 33 ER L1 L2 L3 1 Ground the other end of the PE conductor at the distribution board 2 Usea separate grounding cable if the conductivity of the cable shield is insufficient smaller than the conductivity of the phase conductor and there is no symmetrically constructed grounding conductor in the cable See section Selecting the power cables on page 34 Note Do not use an asymmetrically constructed motor cable If there is a symmetrically constructed grounding conductor in the motor cable in addition to the conductive shield connect the grounding conductor to the grounding terminal at the drive and motor ends Route the motor cable input power cable and control cables separately For more information see section Routing the cables on page 37 Grounding of the motor cable shield at the motor end For minimum radio frequency interference ground the cable by twisting the shield as follows flattened width gt 1 5 length or ground the cable shield 360 degrees at the lead through of the motor
25. 160 download okee m beatae 68 V vibration stress testing 357 virtual object N2 ssssssssssss 275 VND RE 277 voltage at fault history parameter 139 rating Code 5 den ee eee tee 26 voltage frequency ratio parameter 177 Index 391 392 Index W wake up delay PID parameter 213 wake up deviation PID parameter 213 warning automatic start up eeeeeeeees 17 dangerous voltages ssess 16 high temperatures esee 40 liStI e WEE 15 qualified installer 16 VC Le EE 352 wiring fault parameter ssssssssss 183 installation ne bietet 37 e 33 requirements eene 33 Z zero speed load fault parameter 181 Further information Product and service inquiries Address any inquiries about the product to your local ABB representative quoting the type designation and serial number of the unit in question A listing of ABB sales support and service contacts can be found by navigating to www abb com drives and selecting Sales Support and Service Network Product training For information on ABB product training navigate to www abb com drives and select Training courses Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals Your comments on our manuals are welcome Go to www abb co
26. Code Description Range Resolution Default S Analog Input Reference Correction Parameter values 9 10 and 14 17 use the formula in the following table Value Al reference is calculated as following Setting C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B C value B value 5096 of reference value C B C value 50 of reference value B value C B C value 5096 of reference value B value Where e C Main Reference value COMM for values 17 9 10 and AI for values ee i 14 17 B Correcting reference Al1 for values 9 10 and AI2 for values 14 17 E N CH 1 T Example The figure shows the reference source curves for value settings 9 10 and 14 17 where e C 25 P 4012 SETPOINT MIN 0 P 4013 SETPOINT MAX 0 B varies along the horizontal axis REF1 SELECT 20 KEYPAD RNC Defines the control panel as the reference source A Stop source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 does not copy the reference 21 KEYPAD NC Defines the control panel as the reference source A Stop command does not reset the reference to zero The reference is stored reference Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 does not copy the command resets the reference to zero R stands for reset Changing the control 1104 REF1 MIN 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 0 rpm
27. Set up the drive Enter motor information Note Parameters checked under the heading S can be modified only when the drive is stopped Group 99 Start up Data Code Description Range Resolution Default S 9901 LANGUAGE 0 13 1 0 Selects the display language 0 ENGLISH 1 ENGLISH AM 2 DEUTSCH 3 ITALIANO 4 ESPANOL 5 PORTUGUES 6 NEDERLANDS 7 FRANCAIS 8 DANSK 9 SUOMI 10 SVENSKA 11 RUSSKI 12 POLSKI 13 T RKCE 14 CZECH 15 MAGYAR 9902 APPLIC MACRO 1 15 1 1 Y Selects an application macro Application macros automatically edit parameters to configure the ACS320 for a particular application See Application Macros for application macro descriptions 1 HVAC 2 SUPPLY FAN 3 RETURNFAN 4 COOLING DEFAULT TOWER FAN 5 CONDENSER 6 BOOSTER 7 PUMP 8 INTERNAL PUMP ALTERNATION TIMER 9 INTERNAL 10 FLOATING 11 DUAL 12 DUAL SETPOINT TIMER WITH POINT SETPOINT PID WITH CONSTANT PID CONSTANT SPEEDS SPEEDS 13 E BYPASS 14 HAND 15 E CLIPSE CONTROL 31 LOAD FD SET FrontDrop parameter values as defined by the FlashDrop file Parameter view is selected by parameter 1611 PARANETER VIEW FlashDrop is an optional device for fast copying of parameters to unpowered drives FlashDrop allows easy customization of the parameter list e g selected parametes can be hidden For more information see MFDT 01 FlashDrop User s Manual SAFE68591074 English 1 USER S1 SAVE 3 USER S2 SAVE With t
28. Use an external thermistor relay The relay insulation must be rated for the same voltage level as the drive s main circuit The figure below shows alternate thermistor connections At the motor end the cable shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor If this is not possible leave the shield unconnected Thermistor relay MMIO board N DIS C 24 VDC Thermistor 0 MMIO board E DB E 424 VDC For other faults or for anticipating motor overheating using a model see Group 30 Fault Functions 194 Actual signals and parameters Group 35 Motor Temp Meas Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3501 SENSOR TYPE 0 6 1 0 Identifies the type of motor temperature sensor used PT100 C or PTC ohms See parameters 1501 and 1507 0 NONE 1 1 x PT100 Sensor configuration uses one PT 100 sensor Analog output AO1 or AO2 feeds constant current through the sensor The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises as does the voltage over the sensor The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analog input All or AI2 and converts it to degrees centigrade 2 2 x PT100 Sensor configuration uses two PT 100 sensors Operation is the same as for above 1 x PT100 3 3 x PT100 Sensor configuration uses three PT 100
29. torque 0 600 Sets the minimum for external reference 2 The minimum analog input signal in volts or amps corresponds to REF2 MIN in e GE 1301 MINIMUM AUT or 1304 MINIMUM AI2 sets the minimum analog input signal This parameter sets the minimum frequency reference The value is a percentage of the maximum frequency or speed maximum process reference nominal torque 148 Actual signals and parameters Group 11 Reference Select Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1108 REF2 MAX 0 0 100 0 0 1 100 0 torque 0 600 Sets the maximum for external reference 2 The maximum analog input signal in volts or amps corresponds to REF2 MAX in e Parameter 1302 MAXIMUM AI1 or 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 sets the maximum analog input signal This parameter sets the maximum frequency reference The value is a percentage of the maximum frequency or speed maximum process reference nominal torque E Group 12 Constant Speeds This group defines a set of constant speeds In general You can program up to 7 constant speeds ranging from 0 500 Hz or 0 30000 rpm Values must be positive No negative speed values for constant speeds Constant speed selections are ignored if the torque control is active or the process PID reference is followed or the drive is in local control mode or PFA Pump and Fan Alternation is active Note Paramet
30. 412 DI1 Start Stop Activate to start drive 4113 DI2 Run permissive Deactivate to stop drive P 1601 I 414 DIS Constant Preset speed 1 P 1202 lt 115 DI4 Safety interlock1 Deactivate to stop drive P 1608 L 7 16 DI5 Safety interlock2 Deactivate to stop drive P 1609 X1BuzTRoic Relay output 1 P 1401 18 RO1A x Default operation Started gt 17 connected to 19 19 RO1B Ln 20 DOSRC Digital output max 100 mA P 1805 21 DOOUT Gin No fault Fault 1 gt 20 connected to 22 22 DOGND Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9902 applic macro 4 CLNGTWRFAN 3207 superv 3 param 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 1401 relay output 1 7 STARTED 4101 gain 1 0 1601 run enable 2 D12 4102 integration time 60 0s 1609 start enable 2 5 D15 80 Start Up E Condenser This macro configures for condenser and liquid cooler applications where fan speed is controlled according to signals received from a transducer When using direct speed reference in AUTO mode or process PID see General Considerations on page 73 T 1 ISCR Signal cable shield screen 2 AM External reference 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC 5 AI2 PID feedback 0 2 10 V or 0 4 2
31. ENABLE DISABLE BV13 EXT 1 2 CMD This object selects ext1 or ext2 as the active control source Control requires parameter 1102 value COMM EXT2 EXT1 BV14 FAULT RESET This object resets a faulted drive The command is rising edge triggered Control requires parameter 1604 value COMM RESET NO BV15 MBOX READ This object reads a parameter defined by AV25 MBOX PARAM and returns it in AV26 MBOX DATA READ RESET W BV16 MBOX WRITE This object writes the data value specified by AV26 MBOX DATA to a parameter defined by AV25 MBOX PARAM WRITE RESET Ww Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 299 Instance Object Name Description Active Inactive Text Present Value Access Type BV17 LOCK PANEL This object locks the panel and prevents parameter changes The corresponding drive parameter is 1602 LOCK UNLOCK Ww BV18 CTL OVERRIDE CMD This object commands the drive into BACnet Control Override In this mode BACnet takes drive control from the normal source However the control panel s HAND mode has priority over BACnet Control Override ON OFF BV19 CTL OVERRIDE ACT This object indicates whether the drive is in BACnet Control Override See BV18 ON OFF BV20 START ENABLE 1 This object commands start enable1 Control requires param 1608 value COMM ENABLE DISABLE C
32. OPERATING Actual value equals within tolerance limits the reference value Actual value is outside tolerance limits not equal to reference value REMOTE Drive control location REMOTE EXT1 or EXT2 Drive control location LOCAL 10 ABOVE_LIMIT Supervised parameter s value gt supervision high limit Bit remains 1 until supervised parameter s value lt supervision low limit See group 32 Supervision Supervised parameter s value lt supervision low limit Bit remains 0 until supervised parameter s value gt supervision high limit See group 32 Supervision 11 EXT CTRL LOC External control location 2 ExT2 selected External control location 1 ExT1 selected 12 EXT RUN ENABLE External Run Enable signal received oO Oz No External Run Enable signal received 13 15 Unused 320 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus DCU Profile The following tables describe the STATUS WORD content for the DCU profile DCU Profile STATUS WORD See Parameter 0303 Bit Name Value Status 0 READY 1 Drive is ready to receive start command 0 Drive is not ready 1 ENABLED 1 External run enable signal received 0 No external run enable signal received 2 STARTED 1 Drive has received start command 0 Drive has not received start
33. Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI4 and DI5 See above DI1 2 for code 12 DI1 2 3 Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using DI1 DI2 and DIS Uses three digital inputs as defined below 0 Di de activated 1 DI activated DI1 DI2 DIS Function 0 0 0 No constant speed 1 0 0 Constant speed 1 1202 0 1 D Constant speed 2 1203 1 1 0 Constant speed 3 1204 0 0 1 Constant speed 4 1205 1 0 1 Constant speed 5 1206 0 1 1 Constant speed 6 1207 1 1 1 Constant speed 7 1208 13 DI3 4 5 Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using D D14 and DI5 See above DI1 2 3 for code 150 Actual signals and parameters Group 12 Constant Speeds Code Description Range Resolution Default S 15 18 TIMER 1 4 Specifies the timer used to select a Constant Speed as the reference The reference selection depends on the state of the selected timer and the value of 1209 TIMED MODE SEL See table To enable and set timers see Group 36 Timer Functions 1201 15 16 17 18 Reference Timer 1 2 3 4 1209 1 1209 2 Timer 0 External reference Constant Speed 1 State 1 Constant Speed 1 Constant Speed 2 15 18 TIMER FUNCTION 1 4 Selects Constant speed 1 when Timer Function is active See Group 36 Timer Functions 19 TIMER 1 amp 2 Selects a con
34. motor cable checking insulation 43 Index 383 384 Index E de BEE 355 requirements eee 35 requirements EMC sessssss 35 motor connection terminal size neonnneeeeeeneeeeeeeee resene eee 354 TOrQlle 1 petens a eite 354 motor control IR compensation parameters 176 parameter group eeeene 176 motor temperature measure parameter group 118 overtemperature fault code 337 motor auxiliary actual signals and parameters 239 aux start order parameter 255 MWh counter data parameter 132 N N2 fieldbus also see comm EFB descriptio usi ia eer eoe der ts 274 node limit ie ecce 277 supported features ssussssss 275 NCU see network control unit NEMA 1 see UL type 1 NEMA 12 see UL type 12 network control unit description sacii e en 274 KGR UE 280 noise random sw freq parameter 177 NBN eegene EE EES eds 47 O object virtual description sssss 275 offset PID parameter AA 220 ok messages count parameter 233 operating data parameter group 130 options parameter group sses 256 output frequency data parameter 130 output voltage data parameter
35. Actual signals and parameters 187 Group 32 Supervision Code Description Range Resolution Default S LO gt HI GE relay Value of Supervised Parameter Active Limit outputs when LO gt HI The lowest limit HI Lo 3202 3203 is active initially and remains active until HI 3203 the supervised t parameter goes above gt the highest limit Lo 3202 making that limit Case A A the active limit That J limit remains active until Energized 1 t the supervised 0 geg parameter goes below the lowest limit HI 3203 making that limit C S B A active Energized 1 Case A Parameter t 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 0 or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 OVER or SUPRV2 OVER Initially the relay is de energized It is energized whenever the supervised parameter goes above the active limit Case B Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 UNDER or SUPRV2 UNDER Initially the relay is energized It is de energized whenever the supervised parameter goes below the active limit Note Case LO gt HI represents a special hysteresis with two separate supervision limits 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO Depends on 60 0 Hz selection Sets the low limit for the first supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI Depends on 60 0 Hz selection Sets the high limit for the first supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV
36. Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault DC UNDERVOLTAGE after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation Actual signals and parameters 185 Group 31 Automatic Reset Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3107 AR AI MIN 0 1 1 1 Sets the automatic reset for the analog input less than minimum value function on or off 0 DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault Al lt MIN after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation Warning When the analog input signal is restored the drive may restart even after a long stop Make sure that automatic long delayed starts will not cause physical injury and or damage equipment 3108 AR EXTERNAL FLT 0 1 1 1 Sets the automatic reset for external faults function on or off 0 DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault EXTERNAL FAULT 1 or EXTERNAL FAULT 2 after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation 186 Actual signals and parameters E Group 32 Supervision This group defines supervision for up to three signals from Group 01 Operating Data Supervision monitors a specified parameter and energizes a relay output if the parameter passes a def
37. Indicates the status of Relay Output 2 1 ON 0 OFF 0122 bit 1 78 ROS ACTUAL Indicates the status of Relay Output 3 1 ON 0 OFF 0122 bit 0 79 RO 4 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Relay Output 4 1 ON 0 OFF 0123 bit 2 82 Al 1 ACTUAL Indicates the input level of Analog Input 1 0120 83 Al 2 ACTUAL Indicates the input level of Analog Input 2 0121 84 AO 1 ACTUAL Indicates the output level of Analog Output 1 0124 86 OK ALARM Indicates the current alarm state of the drive 1 ALARM 0 OK 87 OK MAINT Indicates the current maintenance state of the drive 1 MAINT 0 OK Maintenance triggers are configured in drive parameter Group 29 88 ALARM WORD1 This point is a bit field indicating active alarms in the drive 0308 89 ALARM WORD This point is a bit field indicating active alarms in the drive 0309 90 LAST FAULT This point is first in the drive s fault log and indicates the 0401 most recent fault declared 91 PREV FAULT 1 This point is second in the drive s fault log and indicates 0412 the previous fault declared 92 PREV FAULT2 This point is last in the drive s fault log and indicates the 0413 oldest fault in the log 93 OK FAULT Indicates the current fault state of the drive 1 FAULT 0 OK 94 RESET FAULT Command by FLN to reset a faulted drive 1 RESET 0 NO Parameter 1604 must be set to COMM for FLN to control this state The control input is rising edge sensitive
38. Note In order to activate and use the PID controller Parameter 1106 must be set to value 19 204 Actual signals and parameters PID Controller Advanced ACS320 has 2 separate PID Controllers Process PID PID1 and External PID PID2 Process PID PID1 has 2 separate sets of parameters Process PID PID1 SET1 defined in Group 40 and Process PID PID1 SET2 defined in Group 41 You can select between the 2 different sets by using parameter 4027 Typically two different PID Controller sets are used when the load of the motor changes considerably from one situation to another You can use External PID PID2 defined in Group 42 in 2 different ways Instead of using additional PID controller hardware you can set outputs of the ACS320 to control a field instrument like a damper or a valve In this case set Parameter 4230 to value 0 0 is the default value You can use External PID PID2 as an additional PID controller to Process PID PID1 to trim or fine tune the speed of the ACS320 An example of the trimming is a return fan that follows the speed of the supply fan As the return fan needs to run faster or slower then the supply fan in order to create under or overpressure correction factors to the supply fan speed are needed Use External PID PID2 in the return fan drive to provide these corrections Actual signals and parameters 205 Group 40 Process PID Set 1 Code Description Ra
39. Selects using a deceleration ramp Deceleration ramp is defined by 2203 DECELER TIME 1 or 2206 DECELER TIME 2 whichever is active 2103 DC MAGN TIME 0 00 10 00 s 0 01 s 0 30 s Defines the pre magnetizing time for the DC Magnetizing start mode Use parameter 2101 to select the start mode After the start command the drive pre magnetizes the motor for the time defined here and then starts the motor Setthe pre magnetizing time just long enough to allow full motor magnetization Too long a time heats the motor excessively 172 Actual signals and parameters Group 21 Start Stop Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2106 DC CURR REF 0 100 1 30 Defines the DC current control reference as a percentage of parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 2107 DC BRAKE TIME 0 250 s Dis 0s Defines the DC brake time after modulation has stopped if parameter 2104 is 2 DC BRAKING 2108 START INHIBIT 0 1 1 0 Y Sets the Start inhibit function on or off The Start inhibit function ignores a pending start command in any of the following situations a new start command is required A fault is reset Run Enable parameter 1601 activates while start command is active Mode changes from local to remote Mode changes from remote to local Control switches from EXT1 to EXT2 e Control switches from EXT2 to EXT1 0 OFF Disables the Start inhibit function 1 2 ON Ena
40. Vo 3007 MOT LOAD CURVE 50 150 1 100 Sets the maximum allowable Output current relative operating load of the motor to 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR With the default value 100 motor overload protection is 150 functioning when the constant current exceeds 127 of the parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR value FSBO store cere ete The default overloadability is at l the same level as what motor l manufacturer s typically allowin P3008 50 the 86 F 30 C ambient temperature and 3300 ft 1000m Frequency altitude When the ambient l temperature exceeds 86 F 30 C or the installation altitude P 3009 is over 3300 ft 1000m decrease the parameter 3007 value according to the motor manufacturer s recommendation Example If the constant protection level needs to be 11596 of the motor nominal current set parameter 3007 value to 9196 115 127 100 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD 25 150 1 70 Sets the maximum allowable current at zero speed Value is relative to 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 182 Actual signals and parameters Group 30 Fault Functions Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3009 BREAK POINT 1 250 Hz 1 35 Hz FREQ Sets the break point frequency for the motor load curve Example Thermal protection trip times when parameters 3006 MOT THERM TIME 3007 MOT LOAD CURVE and 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD have default val
41. o V i 230 V AC he Bui Diode 7 EE o V Drive 24 V DC relay Ew output 42 Electrical installation Electrical installation What this chapter contains The chapter tells how to check the insulation of the assembly and the compatibility with IT ungrounded and corner grounded TN systems as well as connect power cables control cables and embedded fieldbus WARNING The work described in this chapter may only be carried out by a qualified electrician Follow the instructions in chapter Safety on page 15 Ignoring the safety instructions can cause injury or death Make sure that the drive is disconnected from the input power during installation If the drive is already connected to the input power wait for 5 minutes after disconnecting the input power Checking the insulation of the assembly B Drive Do not make any voltage tolerance or insulation resistance tests for example hi pot or megger on any part of the drive as testing can damage the drive Every drive has been tested for insulation between the main circuit and the chassis at the factory Also there are voltage limiting circuits inside the drive which cut down the testing voltage automatically B Input power cable Check the insulation of the input power cable according to local regulations before connecting to the drive Electrical installation 43 B Motor and motor cable Check th
42. replacement procedure 345 fault CODES sie bl isl dui 336 comm FBA A 183 comm failure EFB An 183 269 current at history parameter 139 digital input status at history parameter 139 frequency at history parameter 139 functions parameter group 180 WE IN EE 329 history parameter group 139 Index 379 380 Index last history parameter 139 Elle WEE 336 previous history parameter 139 EE 51 328 reset select parameter 159 speed at history parameter 139 status at history parameter 139 time of history parameters 139 torque at history parameter 139 voltage at history parameter 139 words data parameters 136 fault code 28 setial ler sd 273 fault history 2 ect 329 fault logging Assistant panel 64 features N2fieldb s een 275 feedback multiplier PID parameter 210 feedback select PID parameter 210 fieldbus see comm command words data parameters 134 status words data parameters 135 firmware test date parameter 188 firmware version
43. the drive is stopped and a fault indication is given Operation limits The drive has adjustable limits for output frequency current maximum and DC voltage B Settings Parameter Group 20 Limits Power limit Program features 109 Power limitation is used to protect the input bridge and the DC intermediate circuit If the maximum allowed power is exceeded the drive torque is automatically limited Maximum overload and continuous power limits depend on the drive hardware For specific values see chapter Technical data on page 348 Automatic resets The drive can automatically reset itself after overcurrent overvoltage undervoltage external and analog input below a minimum faults The Automatic Resets must be activated by the user B Settings Parameter Additional information Group 31 Automatic Reset Automatic reset settings B Diagnostics Alarm Additional information AUTORESET Automatic reset alarm Supervisions The drive monitors whether certain user selectable variables are within the user defined limits The user may set limits for speed current etc The supervision status can be indicated through relay or digital output The supervision function outputs can be used for triggering some drive functionality start stop sleep pump cleaning The supervision functions operate on a 2 ms time level B Settings Parameter group Group 32 Supervision
44. 10000 par 1108 2016 2018 torque2 10000 corresponds to 100 PID 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by Reference i 4012 4013 PID set1 or 10000 par 1108 10000 corresponds to 100 4112 4113 PID set2 Note The setting of parameter 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN has no effect on the scaling of references Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 325 When parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to COMM AI1 or comm al1 the reference is scaled as follows ABB Drives and DCU Profiles Value Reference Setting Al Reference Scaling REF1 COMM AI1 COMM 96 Al 96 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus Reference Correction Coefficient 100 0 5 Par 1105 1 100 Alt Input Signal gt 100 0 5 par 1105 0 50 100 REF1 COMM AI COMM 96 Al 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus Reference Correction Coefficient 200 i I l l I l 100 l I l Al1 Input Signal 100 0 5 par 1105 4 0 50 100 REF2 COMM AI1 COMM 96 Al 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus Reference Correction Coefficient 100 0 5 Par 1108 1 l I l l l 100 a l l I l I Al1 Input Signal 100 0 5 par 1108 0 50 100 326 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus ABB Drives and DCU Profiles
45. 343 No master device SEN EEN n Rh rr Re bee baa ENN ERS IN sew ER ee be 343 Same device address des spec Rebum wer ee e hae E e mes 343 Incorrect WIRING sse ac tatto e tchat ro usce Rcx eodeni E OR ERR aa ceo s Dual 343 13 Maintenance and hardware diagnostics What this chapter Contains 132 c gente Eorum o e e e dc ee oc ER og e e 344 Maintenance intervals 344 Cooling fants zero v debra Ge ES eR IR ehbURhe ueber eerrs RE Ri RES 345 Replacing the cooling fan frame stzesbi DAIN 345 Capacitors sedo ea Rn bns dk E DR es ee pee ete GU E pa bx bene Big ug 346 Reforming the capacitors 0 eee eee ene eee n 346 Power COMMECHONS is x ke he cee dese EGER tnt E lig boe OR TRE dum due ACEN d 346 Control panel usi AEN dd KEE Eu de Eh en E ek d dee 347 Cleaning the control pang 347 Changing the battery in the Assistant Control Panel 347 LES sip tina Says ended be iat be REU qund Tra eoe a enor Fapes ca ed eor do 347 14 Technical data What this chapter contains llllseelee III III 348 Table of contents 13 Ratings esce p rr eh bias EX a DE RR Ca ep SUR E RUP ERG ERG Lun e RE E 349 Depienne EREN eta da d pua e EO aon dos Re eod 349 Ee EE 350 BIC RECETTE 350 Power cable sizes and fuses 0 ccc cere nee hh hh hehe 351 Dimensions weights and free space requirements 0 0 0 0 0c ce esee 352 Dimensions and weights 352 Free space requirements 2 2 eee ue p RR E neue
46. 70 2 76 161 634 1 3 2 9 R2 169 6 65 202 7 95 239 9 41 105 4 13 165 6 50 1 5 3 3 R3 169 6 65 202 7 95 236 9 29 169 6 65 169 6 65 2 9 6 4 R4 181 7 13 202 7 95 244 9 61 260 10 24 169 6 65 4 4 9 7 00578903 xls D Dimensions and weights IP20 NEMA 1 RO 257 10 12 280 11 02 70 2 76 169 6 65 1 5 3 3 R1 257 10 12 280 11 02 70 2 76 169 6 65 1 7 3 7 R2 257 10 12 282 11 10 105 4 13 169 665 1 9 42 R3 260 10 24 299 11 77 169 6 65 177 6 97 3 5 7 7 R4 270 10 63 320 12 60 260 10 24 177 6 97 5 0 11 0 00578903 xls D Symbols IP20 cabinet UL open H1 height without fastenings and clamping plate H2 height with fastenings without clamping plate H3 height with fastenings and clamping plate IP20 NEMA 1 H4 height with fastenings and connection box H5 height with fastenings connection box and hood E Free space requirements Free space required Below On the sides in mm in RO R4 75 3 75 3 0 0 00578903 xls D Technical data 353 Losses cooling data and noise E Losses and cooling data Frame size RO has natural convection cooling Frame sizes R1 R4 are provided with an internal fan The air flow direction is from bottom to top The table below specifies the heat dissipati
47. 8115 AUX MOT START D 242 Actual signals and parameters Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution Default S 8112 LOW FREQ 1 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 25 0 e ve frequency limit used to stop the first auxiliary motor The first auxiliary motor stops if The first auxiliary motor is f HZ A running alone ACS320 output frequency fax eee Pis the limit Output frequency stays 2 B109 1 below the relaxed limit P 8112 8112 1 Hz for at least P 812 T T the time 8116 AUX MOT f STOP D MIN T After the first auxiliary motor Stops Output frequency increases by the value 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 C LOW FREQ 1 n effect the output of the 1 t speed regulated motor 0 increases to compensate for the loss of the auxiliary motor See figure where A 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 B Output frequency decrease during the stop delay C Diagram showing auxiliary motor s run status as frequency decreases 1 On Grey path Shows hysteresis if time is reversed the path backwards is not the same For details on the path for starting see the diagram at 8109 START FREQ 1 Note Low Frequency 1 value must be between 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 1 8109 START FREQ 1 8113 LOW FREQ 2 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 25 0 Sets the frequency limit used to stop the second auxiliary motor See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The second auxi
48. B Overview Macros change a group of parameters to new predefined values designed for specific applications Use macros to minimize the need for manual editing of parameters Selecting a macro sets all other parameters to their default values except Start Up 73 Group 99 Start up Data parameters The PARAMETER LOCK 1602 The PARAM SAVE 1607 The COMM FAULT FUNC 3018 and COMM FAULT TIME 3019 The COMM PROT SEL 9802 Groups 50 53 serial communication parameters Group 29 Maintenance triggers After selecting a macro additional parameter changes can be made manually using the control panel Application macros are enabled by setting the value for parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO By default HVAC default value 1 is the enabled macro B General Considerations The following considerations apply for all macros When using a direct speed reference in AUTO mode connect the speed reference to analog input 1 Al1 and provide the START command using digital input 1 DI1 In HAND OFF mode the control panel provides the speed reference and START command When using process PID connect the feedback signal to analog input 2 Al2 As a default the control panel sets the Setpoint but analog input 1 can be used as an alternate source You can set up process PID using parameters Group 40 or using the PID control assistant recommended The S1 Jumpers are set for Al1 External Reference and PID Feedback as either 20
49. DI4 Second PFA Relay DI4 DI5 Free DI5 DI5 Free 3 DI1 Free DI Free DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI2 First PFA Relay DI3 First PFA Relay DI3 Second PFA Relay DI4 Second PFA Relay DI4 Third PFA Relay DI5 Third PFA Relay DI5 DI5 Free 4 DI1 Free DI Free DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI2 First PFA Relay DI3 First PFA Relay DI3 Second PFA Relay DI4 Second PFA Relay DI4 Third PFA Relay DI5 Third PFA Relay DI5 Fourth PFA Relay Note MREL 01 required for PFA relays 2 3 and 4 Actual signals and parameters 251 Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3 DI3 Enables the Interlocks function and assigns a digital input starting with DI3 to the interlock signal for each PFA relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on The number of PFA relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFA The Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No PFA Autochange Disabled Autochange Enabled Relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 DI2 Free Not allowed DI3 Speed Reg Motor DI4 DI5 Free 1 DI1 DI2 Free DI1 DI2 Free DI3 Speed Reg Motor DI3 First PFA Relay DI4 First PFA Relay DI4 DI5 Free DI5 DI5 Free 2 DI1 DI2 Free DI1 DI2 Free DI3 Speed Reg Motor DI3 First PFA Relay
50. DI6 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets See DI1 above 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets The drive loads User Parameter Set 1 on the rising edge of the digital input The drive loads User Parameter Set 2 on the falling edge of the digital input The User Parameter Set changes only when the drive is stopped 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets See DI1 INV above Actual signals and parameters 161 Group 16 System Controls Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1606 LOCAL LOCK 6 8 1 0 Defines control for the use of the HAND mode The HAND mode allows drive control from the control panel When LOCAL LOCK is active the control panel cannot change to HAND mode 0 NOT SEL Disables the lock The control panel can select HAND and control the drive 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI as the control for setting the local lock Activating the digital input locks out local control De activating the digital input enable the HAND selection 2 6 DIZ DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for setting the local lock e See DH above 7 ON Sets the lock The control panel cannot select HAND and cannot control the drive 8 COMM Defines bit 14 of the Command Word 1 as the control for setting the l
51. If needed load the override parameter set P9902 Change the parameters as needed except group 17 Change the parameters in group 17 as needed Digital input for override mode P1701 Frequency or speed reference P1702 or P1703 Enter the pass code P1704 Enable the override mode P1705 The drive replaces the override parameter set with new values of all parameters 166 Actual signals and parameters Group 17 Override Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1701 OVERRIDE SEL 6 6 1 0 Selects the source of the override activation signal 0 NOT SEL Override activation signal not selected 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI as the override activation signal This digital input must be activated for override activation signal 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the override activation signal See DI above 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the override activation signal 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the override activation signal See DH INV above 1702 OVERRIDE FREQ 500 500 Hz 0 1 0 0 Defines a preset frequency for the override Note Set this value if motor control mode Par 9904 is SCALAR FREQ 3 1703 OVERRIDE SPEED 20 000 20 000 rpm 1 0 Defines a preset speed for the override Note Set this value if motor control mode Par 9904 is VECTOR SPEED 1 1704 OVERR PASS C
52. SLEEP BOOST 0 0 100 0 1 0 1 0 0 STEP When the drive is entering sleep mode the reference PID setpoint is increased by this percentage for the time defined by parameter 4030 SLEEP BOOST TIME 4032 PID REF ACC TIME 0 0 1800 0 s 120 1s 0 0 s Defines the time for the reference PID setpoint increase from 0 to 100 Note Parameters 4032 4036 are active even if the process PID set 2 Group 41 Process PID Set 2 is used Acceleration time 4033 PID REF DEC TIME 0 0 1800 0 s 1 0 1s 0 0s Defines the time for the reference PID setpoint decrease from 100 to 0 216 Actual signals and parameters Group 40 Process PID Set 1 Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4034 PID REF FREEZE NOT SEL Freezes the input reference PID setpoint of the process PID controller NOT SEL 0 Not selected DI 1 Reference is frozen on the rising edge of digital input DI1 DI2 2 See selection DI DI3 3 See selection DI DIA 4 See selection DI DI5 5 See selection DI DH INV 1 Reference is frozen on the falling edge of digital input DI1 DI2 INV 2 See selection DI1 INV DI3 INV 3 See selection DI1 INV DIA INV 4 See selection DI1 INV DI5 INV 5 See selection DI1 INV Actual signals and parameters 217 Group 40 Process PID Set 1 Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4035
53. Second PFA Relay DI3 DI5 Free DI4 DI5 Free 3 DI Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFA Relay DI2 First PFA Relay DI2 Second PFA Relay DI3 Second PFA Relay DI3 Third PFA Relay DI4 Third PFA Relay DI4 DI5 Free DI5 DI5 Free 4 DI Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFA Relay DI2 First PFA Relay DI2 Second PFA Relay DI3 Second PFA Relay DI3 Third PFA Relay DI4 Third PFA Relay DI4 Fourth PFA Relay DI5 Fourth PFA Relay DI5 DI5 Free Note MREL 01 required for PFA relays 2 3 and 4 250 Actual signals and parameters Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2 DI2 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with DI2 to the interlock signal for each PFA relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on The number of PFA relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFA The Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No PFA Autochange Disabled Autochange Enabled Relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 Free Not allowed DI2 Speed Reg Motor DIS DI5 Free 1 DI1 Free DI Free DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI2 First PFA Relay DI3 First PFA Relay DI3 DI5 Free DI4 DI5 Free 2 DI1 Free DI Free DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI2 First PFA Relay DI3 First PFA Relay DI3 Second PFA Relay
54. Sets the minimum for external reference 1 corresponds to REF1 MIN in Hz rpm signal offset adjustment for the reference The minimum analog input signal as a percent of the full signal in volts or amps Parameter 1301 MINIMUM AUT or 1304 MINIMUM AI2 sets the minimum analog input These parameters reference and analog min and max settings provide scale and Actual signals and parameters 147 Group 11 Reference Select Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1105 REF1 MAX 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 60 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm US 1800 rpm US Sets the maximum for external reference 1 The maximum analog input signal as a percent of full the signal in volts or amps corresponds to REF1 MAX in Hz rpm Parameter 1302 MAXIMUM AU or 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 sets the maximum analog input signal Ext ref BASE P1105 MIN MAX Analog P 1105 j MIN input signal MAX gt r gt P 1301 P 1302 P 1301 P1302 input signal or 1304 or 1305 or 1304 or 1305 1106 REF2 SELECT 0 19 1 2 Y Selects the signal source for external reference REF2 0 17 Same as for parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT 19 PiD10UT The reference is taken from the PID1 output See Groups 40 and 41 19 emt ner LIMIT EPEA isused SELECT LN max 1107 1108 p PFA i 1 17 h 1 MIN 1107 1108 l b 1107 REF2 MIN 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0
55. The value must be greater than or equal to 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO Units are rpm unless 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR SPEED then units are Hz 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 LO 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 2 See parameter 2502 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 2 See parameter 2503 2506 CRIT SPEED 3 LO 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 3 See parameter 2502 2507 CRIT SPEED 3 HI 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 3 See parameter 2503 B Group 26 Motor Control This group provides controls for fine tuning the motor control Group 26 Motor Control Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2603 IR COMP VOLT 0 100 V 1V size dependent Sets the IR compensation Motor voltage used for 0 Hz A Voltage Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 A SCALAR SPEED Keep IR compensation as low as possible to prevent overheating A IR Compensated B No compensation 4 Typical IR compensation P 2603 values are B f Hz i gt 380 480 V Units P 2604 Py kW 3 75 15 37 132 IR comp V 18 15 12 8 3 IR Compensation When enabled IR Compensation provides an extra voltage boost to the motor at low
56. To reset To reset the fault Ei Eas the fault press Switch off the drive RESET from the power otherwise a fault will be generated and control panel or switch off the then remove the drive power panel to be able to see the LEDs At the top left Panel has no Green Drive in a normal Green Drive in an alarm corner of the power or no state state Assistant Control drive Panel connection Red Drive in a fault Red state To reset the fault press RESET from the control panel or Switch off the drive power 348 Technical data Technical data What this chapter contains The chapter contains the technical specifications of the drive eg ratings sizes and technical requirements as well as provisions for fulfilling the requirements for CE and other marks Technical data 349 Ratings Type ACS320 x E U 03x 02A6 2 4 7 2 4 2 6 4 2 0 37 0 5 RO 03x 03A9 2 6 7 3 5 3 9 6 1 0 55 0 75 RO 03x 05A2 2 8 4 4 7 5 2 8 2 0 75 1 R1 03x 07A4 2 13 0 6 7 7 4 11 7 1 1 1 5 R1 03x 08A3 2 13 2 7 5 8 3 13 1 1 5 2 R1 03x 10A8 2 15 7 9 8 10 8 17 2 2 2 3 R2 03x 14A6 2 23 9 13 3 14 6 23 3 3 3 R2 03x 19A4 2 27 3 17 6 19 4 30 8 4 5 R2 03x 26A8 2 45 24 4 26 8 42 7 5 5 7 5 R3 03x 34A1 2 55 31 0 34 1 54 3 7 5 10 R4 03x 50A8 2 76 46 2 50 8 80 9 11 0 15 R4 EES 03x 01A3 4 2 4 1 2 1 3 2 1 0 37
57. Value Reference Setting Al Reference Scaling REF2 COMM AI1 COMM Al 96 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus Reference Correction Coefficient 200 l l l l 100 a l l l i Al1 Input Signal 0 gt 0 50 100 Reference Handling Use group 10 parameters to configure for control of rotation direction for each control location EXT1 and EXT2 The following diagrams illustrate how group 10 parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce REFERENCE values REF1 and REF2 Note fieldbus references are bipolar that is they can be positive or negative ABB Drives Profile Parameter Value Setting Al Reference Scaling 1003 DIRECTION 1 FORWARD Resultant Ref Max Ref T i l l l l I l Fieldbus l l Reference 4 63 1 00 Max Re 100 163 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 327 ABB Drives Profile Parameter Value Setting Al Reference Scaling 1003 DIRECTION 2 REVERSE Resultant Ref Max Ref 4 Fieldbus 163 100 100 163 Reference i i l l l l l Max Ref e P 1003 DIRECTION 3 request Resultant Ref Max Ref 4 Fieldbus 16396 100 Reference 100 163 Max Ref 328 Fault tracing Fault tracing What this chapter contains The chapter tells how to reset faults and vi
58. alt flOW iind net 345 alarm ee uet hr 333 enable display parameter 163 MISTING steer tH cR 333 altitude environment limit sessenseeeessereeesrerneesene 357 shipping limit seese 357 altitude derating 350 analog cable requirements eese 36 analog I O connections 46 specifications sorsien 46 analog input BACnet object listing 299 Index 373 data parameter esseere 131 fault limit parameters 183 filter parameters sssssssse 152 less than min auto reset parameter 185 less than min fault parameter 180 maximum parameters 152 minimum parameters 152 N2 object listing sseesssse 277 parameter group eee eee etree 152 ref correction formula 146 analog output BACnet object listing 300 content max parameters 157 content min parameters 157 current max parameters 157 current min parameters 157 data content parameters 156 data parameter sese 131 filter parameters ssssssss 157 N2 object listing eese 279 parameter group ee
59. function 3005 3009 3503 be too high due to excessive load insufficient motor power inadequate cooling or incorrect start up data Check fault function parameters Measured motor temperature has exceeded alarm limit Set by parameter 3503 ALARM LIMIT Check value of alarm limit Check that actual number of sensors corresponds to value set by parameter 2501 SENSOR TYPE Let motor cool down Ensure proper motor cooling Check cooling fan clean cooling surfaces etc 2012 MOTOR STALL Motor is operating in Check motor load and drive ratings 0308 bit 11 Eie Ua rd eg Check fault function parameters I programmable fault insufficient motor 3010 3012 power 2013 AUTORESET Automatic reset alarm Check parameter Group 31 Automatic 1 0308 bit 12 Reset settings 2014 AUTOCHANGE PFC Autochange See parameter Group 81 PFA 1 0308 bit 13 function is active section on page 89 2015 PFC I LOCK PFC interlocks are Drive cannot start 0308 bit 14 active any motor when Autochange is used the speed regulated motor when Autochange is not used See parameter group Group 81 PFA 2018 PID SLEEP Sleep function has See parameter Group 40 Process 1 3009 bit 1 entered sleeping PID Set 1 Group 41 Process PID mode Set 2 2021 START ENABLE 1 No Start Enable 1 Check parameter 7608 START MISSING signal received ENABLE settings 3009 bit 4 Check digital input connections Check fi
60. mode calculated For scalar mode it is the ratio of Output Frequency by the FLN parameter 0103 to Maximum Frequency parameter application 2008 For speed mode it is the ratio Speed parameter 0102 to Maximum Speed 2002 5 SPEED The calculated speed of the motor in RPM 0102 6 CURRENT The measured output current 0104 7 TORQUE The calculated output torque of the motor as a percentage 0105 of nominal torque 8 POWER The measured output power in KW The FLN point 0106 definition also supports horsepower by selecting English units DRIVE TEMP The measured heatsink temperature in C The FLN 0110 point definition also supports F by selecting English units 10 DRIVE KWH The drive s cumulative power consumption in kilowatt 0115 hours This value may be reset by commanding FLN point 49 RESET KWH 11 DRIVE MWH The drive s cumulative power consumption in megawatt 0141 hours This value cannot be reset 12 RUN TIME The drive s cumulative run time in hours This value may 0114 be reset by commanding FLN point 48 RESET RUN TIME 13 DC BUS VOLT The DC bus voltage level of the drive 0107 14 OUTPUT VOLT The AC output voltage applied to the motor 0109 15 PRC PID FBCK The Process PID feedback signal 0130 16 PRC PID DEV The deviation of the Process PID output signal from its 0132 setpoint 17 MOTOR TEMP The measured motor temperature as set up in Group 35 0145 18 ROTATION CNT The motor s cumulative rev
61. the time 8115 AUX MOT P8M21 START D After the first auxiliary motor starts Output frequency decreases by the value C A 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 Low FREQ 1 1 n effect the output of the 0 speed regulated motor drops to compensate for the input from the auxiliary motor See figure where A 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 B Output frequency increase during the start delay C Diagram showing auxiliary motor s run status as frequency increases 1 On Note 8109 START FREQ 1 value must be between 8112 LOW FREQ 1 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 1 fin 8110 START FREQ 2 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 60 0 Sets the frequency limit used to start the second auxiliary motor See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The second auxiliary motor starts if One auxiliary motor is running ACS320 output frequency exceeds the limit 8110 1 Output frequency stays above the relaxed limit 8110 1 Hz for at least the time 8115 AUX MOT START D 8111 START FREQ 3 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 60 0 Sets the frequency limit used to start the third auxiliary motor See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The third auxiliary motor starts if Two auxiliary motors are running e ACS320 output frequency exceeds the limit 8111 1 Hz Output frequency stays above the relaxed limit 8111 1 Hz for at least the time
62. then period 1 weekly is active from Monday midnight 00 00 00 3605 STOP DAY 1 1 7 1 1 Defines weekly stop day 1 Monday 7 Sunday If parameter value is 5 then timer 1 weekly will be deactivated on Friday midnight 23 59 58 3606 START TIME 2 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 12 00 00 Defines timer2 daily start time See parameter 3602 3607 STOP TIME 2 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 12 00 00 Defines timer2 daily stop time See parameter 3603 3608 START DAY 2 1 7 1 1 Defines timer 2 weekly start day See parameter 3604 3609 STOP DAY 2 1 7 1 1 Defines timer 2 weekly stop day See parameter 3605 3610 START TIME 3 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 12 00 00 Defines timer 3 daily start time See parameter 3602 3611 STOP TIME 3 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 12 00 00 Defines timer 3 daily stop time See parameter 3603 3612 START DAY 3 1 7 1 1 Defines timer 3 weekly start day See parameter 3604 3613 STOP DAY 3 1 7 1 1 Defines timer 3 weekly stop day See parameter 3605 3614 START TIME 4 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 12 00 00 Defines timer 4 daily start time See parameter 3602 3615 STOP TIME 4 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 12 00 00 Defines timer 4 daily stop time See parameter 3603 Actual signals and parameters 199 Group 36 Timer Functions Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3616 START DAY 4 1 7 1
63. 0 5 RO 03x 02A1 4 4 0 1 9 2 1 3 3 0 55 0 75 RO 03x 02A6 4 4 5 2 4 2 6 4 2 0 75 1 R1 03x 03A6 4 6 6 3 3 3 6 5 8 1 1 1 5 R1 03x 04A5 4 7 6 4 1 4 5 7 2 1 5 2 R1 03x 06A2 4 10 6 5 6 6 2 9 8 2 2 3 R1 03x 08A0 4 12 8 7 3 8 0 12 8 3 3 R1 03x 09A7 4 15 0 8 8 9 7 15 4 4 5 R1 03x 13A8 4 20 7 12 5 13 8 21 9 5 5 7 5 R3 03x 17A2 4 24 3 15 6 17 2 27 3 7 5 10 R3 03x 25A4 4 34 0 23 1 25 4 40 4 11 15 R3 03x 34A1 4 57 31 34 1 54 3 15 20 R4 03x 41A8 4 67 38 41 8 66 5 18 5 25 R4 03x 48A4 4 74 44 48 4 77 0 22 0 30 R4 1 E EMC filter connected metal EMC filter screw installed 00578903 xls D U EMC filter disconnected plastic EMC filter screw installed US parametrization E Definitions hy continuous rms input current for dimensioning cables and fuses at ambient temperature of 40 C lip continuous output current at max ambient temperature of 50 C 1096 overloadability for one minute every ten minutes lon maximum continuous output current at ambient temperature of 40 C No overloadability derating 1 for every additional 1 C up to 50 C lomax maximum instantaneous output current Available for two seconds every ten minutes at start up or as long as allowed by the drive temperature 350 Technical data Pu typical motor power The kilowatt ratings apply to most IEC 4 pole motors The horsepower ratings apply to most NEMA 4 pole motors RO R4 ACS320 is manufactured in frame sizes RO R4 Some instructions and other information
64. 01 0 006 100 0 Example You are controlling water temperature from a cooling tower using the ACS320 to control a fan The temperature sensor has a range of 30 to 250 degrees Fahrenheit To unbundle the set point INPUT REF 2 for commanding in degrees Fahrenheit where 0 60 Hz is equal to 30 250 F New Intercept 30 the temperature that corresponds to 0 Desired Range x Slope of Existing Point New Slope Range of Existing Point 250 F 30 F x 0 1 0 22 100 0 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 287 To unbundle the feedback PRC PID FBCK for monitoring in degrees Fahrenheit New Intercept 30 Desired Range x Slope of Existing Point New Slope v Range of Existing Point 250 F 30 F x 0 01 0 022 100 0 E Loop Gains PRC PID GAIN Point 50 and PRC PID ITIM Point 51 are PID parameters similar to the P and gains in the APOGEE TECs Because the ABB PI loop and the Siemens loop are structured differently there is no a one to one correspondence between the gains The following formulas allow translation from ABB gains to Siemens gains and vice versa To convert from ABB PI gains to Siemens P and gains P GAlNsiemens PI GAlNABB x 0 0015 PI GAINagp PI GAINagp I GAINSiemens x 0 0015 To convert from Siemens P and gains to ABB PI gains P GAlNAgg PI GAlNgiemens X 667 PI GAlNsiemens PI GAINgiemens GAINage
65. 1 Copies USER 1 parameters user sets are saved using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO from the Control Panel to the drive Download User Set 2 Copies USER S2 parameters from the Control Panel to the drive Handling Inexact Downloads In some situations an exact copy of the download is not appropriate for the target drive Some examples Adownload to an old drive specifies parameters values that are not available on the old drive Adownload from an old drive to a new drive does not have definitions for the new parameters parameters that did not originally exist As a default the control panel handles these situations by Discarding parameters values not available on the target drive Using parameter default values when the download provides no values or invalid values Providing a Differences List A listing the type and number of items that the target cannot accept exactly as specified You can either accept the default edits by of LOC G DIFFERENCES VALUES OVER MAX 2 INVALID VALUES 1 EXTRA PARS 5 MISSING VALUES 7 READY SEL pressing READY or view and edit each item as follows Start Up 69 1 Highlight an item type in the Differences List left screen below and press SEL to see the details for the selected type right screen below LOC G DIFFERENCES VALUES UNDER MIN VALUES OVER MAX INVALID VALUES kal 0 EXTRA PARS 5
66. 1 PARAM above 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM 101 199 1 104 Selects the second supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above 3205 SUPERV 2 LIM LO Depends on 4 5 A selection Sets the low limit for the second supervised parameter See 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM above 3206 SUPERV 2 LIM HI Depends on 4 5 A selection Sets the high limit for the second supervised parameter See 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM above 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 101 199 1 105 Selects the third supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above 188 Actual signals and parameters Group 32 Supervision Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3208 SUPERV 3 LIM LO Depends on 100 0 selection a the low limit for the third supervised parameter See 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM above 3209 SUPERV 3 LIM HI Depends on 100 0 selection Sets the high limit for the third supervised parameter See 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM above B Group 33 Information This group provides access to information about the drive s current programs versions and test date Group 33 Information Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3301 FW VERSION 10000 FFFF hex 1 Firmware ver Contains the version of the drive s firmware 3302 LP VERSION 0000 FFFF hex 1 0 Contains the version of the loading package 3303 TEST DATE yy ww 1 0 Contains the test date yy ww 3204 DRIVE RATING Indicates the drive s current and v
67. 2 is defined by a parameter In most cases when there is only one transducer signal wired to the drive only parameter set 1 is needed Two different parameter sets 1 and 2 are used eg when the load of the motor changes considerably in time B External Trim controller PID2 PID2 Group 42 External PID can be used in two different ways External controller Instead of using additional PID controller hardware the user can connect PID2 output via drive analog output or fieldbus controller to control a field instrument like a damper or a valve Trim controller PID2 can be used to trim or fine tune the reference of the drive See section Heference trimming on page 97 W Block diagrams Program features 111 The figure below shows an application example The controller adjusts the speed of a pressure boost pump according to the measured pressure and the set pressure reference Example PID control block diagram Pressure boost pump ref PID Drive Actual values 4014 4021 AH Al2 IMOT 4001 4002 4003 4004 4005 PIDmax PIDmin ref k ti td i Ee dFiltT Frequency reference errVInv ohi ol ref 4010 112 Program features
68. 382 The drive must be installed in clean air according to enclosure classification Cooling air must be clean free from corrosive materials and electrically conductive dust According to IEC 60721 3 1 chemical gases Class 1C2 solid particles Class 182 According to IEC 60721 3 2 chemical gases Class 2C2 solid particles Class 282 Sinusoidal vibration IEC 60721 3 3 Tested according to IEC 60721 3 3 mechanical conditions Class 3M4 2 9 Hz 3 0 mm 0 12 in 9 200 Hz 10 m s 33 ft s Shock According to ISTA 1A According to ISTA 1A IEC 60068 2 27 Max 100 m s Max 100 m s ISTA 1A 330 ft s 11 ms 330 ft s 11 ms Free fall Not allowed 76 cm 30 in 76 cm 30 in 358 Technical data Materials Drive enclosure Package Disposal PC ABS 2 mm PC 10 GF 2 5 3 mm and PA66 25 GF 1 5 mm all in color NCS 1502 Y RAL 9002 PMS 420 C hot dip zinc coated steel sheet 1 5 mm thickness of coating 20 micrometers extruded aluminium AISi Corrugated cardboard The drive contains raw materials that should be recycled to preserve energy and natural resources The package materials are environmentally compatible and recyclable All metal parts can be recycled The plastic parts can either be recycled or burned under controlled circumstances according to local regulations Most recyclable parts are marked with recycling marks If recycli
69. 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the run enable signal See D above 7 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the run enable signal Bit 6 of the Command Word 1 parameter 0301 activates the run disable signal See fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI as the run enable signal This digital input must be de activated for run enable If this digital input activates the drive will coast to stop and not start until the run enable signal resumes 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the run enable signal See DH INV above 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 0 2 1 1 Determines if the control panel can change parameter values This lock does not limit parameter changes made by macros This lock does not limit parameter changes written by fieldbus inputs This parameter value can be changed only if the correct pass code is entered See parameter 1603 PASS CODE 0 LOCKED You cannot use the control panel to change parameter values The lock can be opened by entering the valid pass code to parameter 1603 1 OPEN You can use the control panel to change parameter values 2 NOT SAVED You can use the control panel to change parameter values but they are not stored in permanent memory Set parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE to 1 SAVE to store changed parameter v
70. A negative difference a setpoint lower than the feedback is always smaller than a positive difference This keeps feedback values at or below the setpoint Controller does not react to the situation of feedback below setpoint if another zone s feedback is closer to its setpoint 14 2 ZONE AVE The drive calculates the difference between setpoint 1 and feedback 1 as well as setpoint 2 and feedback 2 In addition it calculates the average of the deviations and uses it to control zone 1 Therefore one feedback is kept above its setpoint and another is kept as much below its setpoint 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input D11 as the control for PID Set selection Activating the digital input selects PID Set 1 De activating the digital input selects PID Set 2 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for PID Set selection See DH INV above 4028 PID OUT MIN 500 0 500 0 1 0 1 100 0 Defines the minimum value of PID output 4029 PID OUT MAX 500 0 500 0 1 0 1 100 0 Defines the maximum value of PID output Actual signals and parameters 215 Group 40 Process PID Set 1 Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4030 SLEEP BOOST TIME 0 0 3600 0 s 120 1s 0 0s ee the boost time for the sleep boost step See parameter 4031 SLEEP BOOST Reference 4030 SLEEP 4031 SLEEP BOOST TIME BOOST STEP 1 4031
71. ABB Drives Profile The following table and the state diagram later in this sub section describe the CONTROL WORD content for the ABB Drives Profile ABB Drives Profile EFB CONTROL WORD Bit Name Value Commanded State Comments 0 OFF1 CONTROL 1 READY TO OPERATE Enter READY TO OPERATE 0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive ramps to stop according to currently active deceleration ramp 2203 or 2205 Normal command sequence Enter OFF1 ACTIVE Proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks OFF2 OFF3 are active 1 OFF2 CONTROL OPERATING Continue operation OFF2 inactive EMERGENCY OFF Drive coasts to stop Normal command sequence Enter OFF2 ACTIVE Proceed to SWITCHON INHIBITED 2 OFF3 CONTROL OPERATING Continue operation OFF3 inactive EMERGENCY STOP Drive stops within in time specified by parameter 2208 Normal command sequence Enter OFF3 active Proceed to switch on inhibited WARNING Be sure motor and driven equipment can be stopped using this mode 3 INHIBIT OPERATION OPERATION ENABLED Enter OPERATION ENABLED Note the Run enable signal must be active See 1601 If 1601 is set to COMM this bit also actives the Run Enable signal 0 OPERATION INHIBITED Inhibit operation Enter OPERATION INHIBITED 4 Unused ABB DRV LIM RAMP_OUT_ ZERO ABB DRV FULL 1 NORMAL OPERATION Enter RAMP FUNCTION GE
72. ACCELER TIME 1 0 0 1800 0 s 0 1s 30 0 s Sets the acceleration time for zero to maximum frequency for ramp pair 1 See A in figure Actual acceleration time also depends on 2204 RAMP SHAPE See 2008 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY 2203 DECELER TIME 1 0 0 1800 0 s 0 1s 30 0 s Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for ramp pair 1 Actual deceleration time also depends on 2204 RAMP SHAPE See 2008 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY 174 Actual signals and parameters Group 22 Accel Decel Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 0 1000 0 s Dis 0 0 Selects the shape of the acceleration deceleration A ramp for ramp pair 1 See B in figure MAX Linear Shape is defined as a ramp unless additional FREQ 4 time is specified here to reach the maximum frequency A longer time provides a softer transition at each end of the slope The shape becomes an s curve cag ac Rule of thumb 1 5 is a suitable relation between B 0 the ramp shape time and the acceleration ramp time T 0 0 LINEAR Specifies linear acceleration deceleration ramps for ramp pair 1 0 1 1000 0 S CURVE Specifies s curve acceleration deceleration ramps for ramp pair 1 A gt A 2202 ACCELERATION TIME B 2204 RAMP SHAPE 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 0 0 1800 0 s 0 1s 60 0 s Sets the acceleration time s for zero to maximum frequency for ramp pair 2 See 2002 ACCEL
73. ACS320 serial communication Intermittent problems might also be caused by Marginally loose connections Wear on wires caused by equipment vibrations Insufficient grounding and shielding on both the devices and on the communication cables N2 Protocol Technical Data B Overview The N2 Fieldbus connection to the ACS320 drives is based on an industry standard RS 485 physical interface The N2 Fieldbus protocol is a master slave type serial communication protocol used by the Johnson Controls Metasys system In the Metasys architecture the N2 Fieldbus connects object interfaces and remote controllers to Network Control Units NCUS The N2 Fieldbus can also be used to connect ACS320 drives to the Metasys Companion product line This section describes the use of the N2 Fieldbus with the ACS320 drives connection and does not describe the protocol in detail Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 275 Supported Features In the N2 Fieldbus protocol the ACS320 drive appears as a virtual object pe ees i cT Analog Inputs 8 Binary Inputs q Virtual Object Analog Outputs ACS320 C J Binary Outputs Note Metasys inputs are drive outputs and drive inputs are Metasys outputs Internal values Float Integer Byte 3 A virtual object is made up of e Analog Inputs Binary Inputs Analog Outputs Binary Outputs Internal values for Floating po
74. ACT EXT1 1 0 EXT2 EXT1 26 ILDO EXT1 2 CMD EXT1 1 0 EXT2 EXT1 27 LDI DRIVE READY NOTRDY 1 0 READY NOTRDY 28 LD AT SETPOINT NO 1 0 YES NO 29 LDO DAY NIGHT DAY 1 0 NIGHT DAY 30 LAO CURRENT LIM 0 A 0 1 0 31 LAO ACCEL TIME 1 300 sec 0 1 0 gt 32 LAO DECELTIME1 300 sec 0 1 0 S 33 LDI SE AUTO 1 0 HAND AUTO 34 LDI ENA DISACT DISABL 1 0 ENABLE DISABL 35 LDO ENA DIS CMD DISABL 1 0 ENABLE DISABL 36 LDI FLNLOC ACT AUTO E 1 0 FLN AUTO 37 LDI CTL SRC NO 1 0 YES NO 38 ILDI FLN REF1 SRC NO 1 0 YES NO 39 LDI FLN REF2 SRC NO 1 0 YES NO 40 ILDO RO 1 OFF d 1 0 ON OFF COMMAND 41 LDO RO2 OFF 1 0 ON OFF COMMAND Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 289 FLN Point Database Point Subpoint Name Default Units Slope intercept On Text Off Text Type SI Units 42 ILDO RO3 OFF 3 1 0 ON OFF COMMAND 43 ILDO RO 4 OFF 1 0 ON OFF COMMAND 46 LAO AO 1 PCT PCT 0 1 0 COMMAND 48 LDO RSTRUN TIME NO 1 0 RESET NO 49 LDO RESET KWH NO 1 0 RESET NO 50 LAO PRCPID GAIN 10 PCT 0 1 0 51 LAO PRCPIDITIM 600 SEC 0 1 0 S 52 LAO PRC PID DTIM 0 SEC 0 1 0 53 LAO PRC PID DFIL 10 SEC 0 1 0 54 LDO PRC PID SEL SET1 1 0 SET2 SET1 55 LAO EXTPID GAIN 10 PCT 0 1 0 z 56 LAO EXT PID
75. C AV17 INPUT REF 2 This object sets either Input Reference 2 Control requires parameter 1106 value COMM Process PID setpoint Control requires parameter 1106 value PID1 OUT and parameter 4010 value COMM Percent C AV18 LAST FLT This object indicates the most recent fault entered in the drive s fault log The corresponding drive parameter is 0401 None AV19 PREV FLT 1 This object indicates the second most recent fault entered in the drive s fault log The corresponding drive parameter is 0412 None AV20 PREV FLT 2 This object indicates the third most recent fault entered in the drive s fault log The corresponding drive parameter is 0413 None AV21 AO 1 ACT This object indicates Analog Output 1 s level The corresponding drive parameter is 0124 Milliamps R AV23 ACCEL1 TIME This object sets the Ramp1 acceleration time The corresponding drive parameter is 2202 Seconds W AV24 DECEL1 TIME This object sets the Ramp1 deceleration time The corresponding drive parameter is 2203 Seconds W 302 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Instance Present Value Object Name Description Units Access Type AV25 MBOX PARAM This object defines the parameter to be None W read or written to by the mailbox function See BV15 and BV16 AV26 MBOX DATA This object holds the mailbox function
76. Comm so module MREL 01 Port osda WM L SEET EMC EMC filter grounding screw 6 FlashDrop ema VAR Varistor grounding screw E d Lin U1 joe D 3 phase power M supply L23 V1 V2 3 AC motor 200 480 V AC ME W1 W2 Operation principle and hardware description 25 Type designation label The type designation label is attached to the left side of the drive An example label and explanation of the label contents are shown below ABB ACS320 03U 09A7 4 1 IP20 UL Open type 2 III IN LLL S N MYYWWRXXXX 4 kW 5 HP UI IL HI HU U1_3 380 480 V 3AUA0000039632 11 15 0 A f1 48 63 Hz SE U2 3 0 U1V 2 97A cec Qs RoHS f2 0 500 Hz 1 Type designation see section Type designation key on page 26 2 Degree of protection by enclosure IP and UL NEMA 3 Nominal ratings see section Ratings on page 349 4 Serial number of format MYYWWRXXXX where M Manufacturer YY 08 09 10 for 2008 2009 2010 WW 01 02 03 for week 1 week 2 week 3 R A B C for product revision number XXXX Integer starting every week from 0001 5 ABB MRP code of the drive 6 CE marking and C Tick C UL US and RoHS marks the label of your drive shows the valid markings 26 Operation principle and hardware description Type designation key The type designation contains information on the specifications and configuration of the drive You find the type d
77. Drive Protect the drive and input board cable with fuses or a circuit breaker See 1 ad O footnotes 1 and 2 1 Size the fuses according to instructions given in chapter Technical data on page 348 The fuses will protect the input cable in short circuit situations restrict drive damage and prevent damage to adjoining equipment in case of a short circuit inside the drive 2 Circuit breakers which have been tested by ABB with the ACS350 can be used Fuses must be used with other circuit breakers Contact your local ABB representative for the approved breaker types and supply network characteristics WARNING Due to the inherent operating principle and construction of circuit breakers independent of the manufacturer hot ionized gases may escape from the breaker enclosure in case of a short circuit To ensure safe use special attention must be paid to the installation and placement of the breakers Follow the manufacturer s instructions B Protecting the motor and motor cable in short circuit situations The drive protects the motor and motor cable in a short circuit situation when the motor cable is dimensioned according to the nominal current of the drive No additional protection devices are needed 40 Planning the electrical installation W Protecting the drive motor cable and input power cable against thermal overload The drive protects itself and the input and motor cables
78. EXT PID GAIN Sets the proportional gain of the External PID controller 4201 56 EXT PID ITIM Sets the integration time of the External PID controller 4202 57 EST PID DTIM Sets the derivation time of the External PID controller 4203 58 EST PID DFIL Sets the time constant for the error derivative of the 4204 External PID controller 59 LOCK PANEL Command by FLN to lock the panel and prevent 1602 parameter changes 1 LOCK 0 UNLOCK 60 INPUT REF 1 Sets Input Reference 1 Parameter 1102 must be set to COMM for FLN to control this value 61 INPUT REF 2 Sets Input Reference 2 Parameter 1106 must be set to COMM for FLN to control this value 62 EXT PID STPT The setpoint for the External PID controller 4211 The function of this point requires parameter 4210 PID Setpoint Select to be set to 19 Internal 63 EXT PID FBCK The External PID feedback signal 0131 64 EXT PID DEV The deviation of the External PID output signal from its 0133 setpoint 65 N A 66 SPD OUT MIN Sets the minimum output speed of the drive as a 2007 percentage of the motor nominal rating SCALAR 2001 SPEED 67 SPD OUT MAX Sets the maximum output speed of the drive as a 2008 percentage of the motor nominal rating SCALAR 2002 SPEED 68 FLN LOC CTL Commanded by FLN to temporarily steal start stop control of the drive from its normal source and place it under FLN control This functionality is analogous to placing the drive in HAND mode at
79. FBK value defined by parameter 4014 Used mainly in applications where the flow is calculated from the pressure difference 0 NOT SELECTED 32 768 32 767 Multiplier applied to the signal defined by parameter 4014 FBK SEL Example FBK Multiplierx JA1 A2 4016 ACT1 INPUT 1 5 1 2 Y Defines the source for actual value 1 ACT1 1 Al 1 Uses analog input 1 for ACT 2 AI 2 Uses analog input 2 for ACT1 3 Current Uses current for ACT1 scaled so Min ACT1 0 current Max ACT1 2 x nominal current 4 Torque Uses torque for ACT1 scaled so Min AcT1 2 x nominal torque Max ACT1 2 x nominal torque 5 Power Uses power for ACT scaled so Min ACT1 2 x nominal power Max ACT1 2 x nominal power 6 COMM ACT 1 Uses value of signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 for ACT1 7 COMM ACT 2 Uses value of signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 for ACT1 Actual signals and parameters 211 Group 40 Process PID Set 1 Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4017 ACT2 INPUT 1 5 1 2 Y Defines the source for actual value 2 ACT2 12A 1 Uses analog input 1 for ACT2 2 Al 2 Uses analog input 2 for ACT2 3 Current Uses current for ACT2 scaled so e Min ACT2 O current Max ACT2 2 x nominal current 4 Torque Uses torque for ACT2 scaled so Min ACT2 2 x nominal torque MaxACT2 2 x nominal torque 5 Power Uses power fo
80. FREQ as follows Switching Drive voltage rating ues peu Uy 200 240 V Uy 380 480 V 4 kHz No derating No derating 8 kHz Derate low to 90 Derate low to 75 for RO or to 80 for R1 R4 12 kHz Derate Gu to 80 Derate low to 50 for RO or to 65 for R1 R4 and derate maximum ambient temperature to 30 C 86 F 16 kHz Derate ly to 75 Derate loy to 50 and derate maximum ambient temperature to 30 C 86 F Technical data 351 Power cable sizes and fuses Cable dimensioning for rated currents wl is shown in the table below together with the corresponding fuse types for short circuit protection of the input power cable The rated fuse currents given in the table are the maxima for the mentioned fuse types If smaller fuse ratings are used check that the fuse rms current rating is larger than the rated Av current given in section Ratings on page 349 If 150 output power is needed multiply current hy by 1 5 See also section Selecting the power cables on page 34 Check that the operating time of the fuse is below 0 5 seconds The operating time depends on the fuse type the supply network impedance as well as the cross sectional area material and length of the supply cable In case the 0 5 seconds operating time is exceeded with the gG or T fuses ultra rapid aR fuses will in most cases reduce the operating time to an acceptable level Note Larger fuses must not be used Type Fuses Size o
81. LOCKED CSBO BO4 Y Y RUN ENAB DISABLE ENABLE CSRO BO5 Y Y Rl 2 SELU UEXT I EXT 2 CSBO BOG Y Y ELT RSET U RESET CBBO BOT v Y CMD BEL 1 OFF ON CSBO BOS Y Y CMD BD 2 Opp ON CSBO BO9 Y Y CMD_RO_3 OFF ON CSBO BO10 Y Y CMD RO 4 OFF ON CSBO B013 Y Y RST_RTIM OFF RESET CSBO BO14 Y Y RST_KWH OFF RESET CSRO BOIS v v DIE SEL SETI EE CSBO BO16 Y Y N2 LOC C AUTO N2 CSBO BOl17 Y Y N2 LOC R EUTO N2 CSBO BO18 Y Y SAV PRMS OFF SAVE CSBO BO19 Y Y READ MB NO READ CSBO BO20 Y Y WRITE MB NO WRITE FLN Protocol Technical Data B Overview The FLN fieldbus connection to the ACS320 drives is based on an industry standard RS 485 physical interface The FLN Floor Level Network Fieldbus protocol is a serial communication protocol used by the Siemens APOGEEQ system The ACS320 interface is specified in Siemens application xxxx Supported Features The ACS320 supports all required FLN features E Reports The ACS320 provides seven pre defined reports Using a report request generated from the FLN fieldbus controller select one of the following sets of points By Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 283 providing views of selected points these reports are often
82. MISSING VALUES 7 READY SEL In the above right details screen LOC G INVALID VAL 9902 APLIC MACRO 2606 SWITCHING FREQ 12 kHz 8 kHz 3401 DISP 1 SEL EXIT EDIT The first item that requires editing is automatically highlighted and includes details In general the first item listed in the details is the value defined by the backup file The second item listed is the default edit Fortracking purposes an asterisk initially appears by each item As edits are made the asterisks disappear 2 Inthe illustrated example the backup specifies a switching frequency of 12 kHz but the target drive is limited to 8 kHz 3 Press EDIT to edit the parameter The display is the target drive s standard edit screen for the selected parameter 4 Highlight the desired value for the target drive 5 Press SAVE to save setting 6 Press EXIT to step back to the differences view and continue for each remaining exception 7 When your editing is complete press READY in the Differences List and then select Yes save parameters Download Failures In some situations the drive may be unable to accept a download In those cases the control panel display is Parameter download failed plus one of the following causes Set not found You are attempting to download a data set that was not defined in the backup The remedy is to manually define the set or upload the set from a d
83. MS TP MAC ID as the device object instance value set drive parameter 5311 and 5317 0 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 303 5 Define a unique MS TP MAC ID Set drive parameter 5302 EFB STATION ID appropriate value Once this parameter is set to a non zero value current BACnet settings are latched and used for communication until the channel is reset norder to participate in MS TP token passing the MAC ID used must be within the limits defined by other masters Max Master property 6 Confirm proper BACnet communication When BACnet communication is operating properly drive parameter 5316 EFB PAR 16 the MS TP token counter should be continually increasing Drive parameter 5306 UART ERRORS should be stable Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement PICS PICS Summary BACnet Standard Device Profile This version of ACS320 BACnet fully conforms to the Application Specific Controller standard device profile B ASC Services Supported The following services are supported by the ACS320 Am Response to Who Is also broadcast on power up amp other reset Have Response to Who Has ReadProperty WriteProperty DeviceCommunicationControl ReinitializeDevice Data Link Layer The ACS320 implements MS TP Master Data Link Layer All standard MS TP baud rates are supported 9600 19200 38400 amp 76800 MAC ID Device Object Instance The ACS320 supports sepa
84. NEMA 1 3AUA0000051086 A 366 Dimension drawings Frame size R2 IP20 cabinet installation UL open DIN rail 35 mm 9g NE SEI el 8 E QNI de P Frame size R2 IP20 cabinet installation UL open 3AUA0000051090 A Dimension drawings 367 Frame size R2 NEMA 1 Frame size R2 IP20 NEMA 1 mmm Ill 3AUA0000051097 A 368 Dimension drawings Frame size R3 IP20 cabinet installation UL open Frame size R3 IP20 cabinet install
85. NEMA 1 option in wall installations see chapter Technical data on page 348 e The drive can be installed in three different ways depending on the frame size a back mounting all frame sizes b side mounting frame sizes RO R2 C DIN rail mounting all frame sizes The drive must be installed in an upright position Check the installation site according to the requirements below Refer to chapter Dimension drawings on page 363 for frame details B Requirements for the installation site Operation conditions See chapter Technical data on page 348 for the allowed operation conditions of the drive Wall The wall should be as close to vertical and even as possible of non flammable material and strong enough to carry the weight of the drive 28 Mechanical installation Floor The floor material below the installation should be non flammable Free space around the drive The required free space for cooling above and below the drive is 75 mm 3 in No free space is required on the sides of the drive so drives can be installed side by side Required tools To install the drive you need the following tools screwdrivers as appropriate for the mounting hardware used wire stripper tape measure drill if the drive will be installed with screws bolts mounting hardware screws or bolts if the drive will be installed with screws bolts For the number of screws bolts see With screws on page 30 Mecha
86. PFA Code Description Range Resolution Default S 8117 NR OF AUX MOT 0 4 5 with TO 121 1 Y Sets the number of auxiliary motors Each auxiliary motor requires a relay output which the drive uses to send start stop signals The Autochange function if used requires an additional relay output for the speed regulated motor The following describes the set up of the required relay outputs Relay outputs As noted above each auxiliary motor requires a relay output which the drive uses to send start stop signals The following describes how the drive keeps track of motors and relays The drive provides one relay output RO1 An external relay output module can be added to provide relay outputs RO2 RO4 Note If five auxiliary motors are used Autochange disabled use transistor output TO in addition to relay outputs RO1 RO4 Note that max voltage at TO is 30 V DC Parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 define respectively how relays RO1 RO4 are used the parameter value 31 PFC defines the relay as used for PFC The drive assigns auxiliary motors to relays in ascending order If the Autochange function is disabled the first auxiliary motor is the one connected to the first relay with a parameter setting 31 PFC and so on If the Autochange function is used the assignments rotate Initially the speed regulated motor is the one connected to the first relay with a parameter setting 31 PFC the first aux
87. PID internal setpoint selection source 4228 DI as external PID2 function activation signal source 4406 4414 DI as connection signal source for pump inlet outlet pressure switch 4421 DI as pipe fill enable source 4601 DI as pump clean trigger source 6403 DI as load analyzer logger reset source 8120 DI as PFC interlock source 100 Program features B Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0160 DI status 0414 DI status at the time the latest fault occurred Programmable relay output The drive has one programmable relay output It is possible to add three additional relay outputs with the optional Relay Output Extension Module MREL O For more information see MREL 01 Relay Output Extension Module User s Manual 8AUA0000035974 English With a parameter setting it is possible to choose what information to indicate through the relay output Ready running fault alarm etc The update time for the relay output is 2 ms A value can be written to a relay output through a serial communication link B Settings Parameter Additional information Group 14 Relay Outputs RO value selections and operation times B Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0134 RO Control Word through fieldbus control 0162 RO 1 status 0173 RO 2 4 status With option MREL 01 only Frequency input Digital input DI5 can be programmed as a frequency input F
88. RR eee abe ea Red 103 Ia T 103 Maintenance trigger isses n Rr Rr rReRR eR hh EX bee EEN EEN EN ENER d 103 Settings guts be owe ee q PUR NUR ONERE REP A a eae 103 Acceleration and deceleration ramps 103 Seltiligs iisrss sie erhtei9peesevenrdberberbereniexeb eedPxa que quer dois 103 Critical Speeds C HR 104 Sellings 9 9 cu d EREe Y epu H eyed yeh EEN eee A ober Rd eee 104 Constant Speeds ot pense ue ehe pe eer pueda Reucpdcaus ed edo Ter ea See 104 SONOS erara E 104 Custom Ut ratio 224 34 o rbobne tp eaae o heed a aa dr es 105 SOS ULM ea eaea a arate aa Dx 105 Diagriostl68 icem NIE RR ph RA EG ER RR XU RERO GU d SERE E ES 105 IR compensation sse r he E REEE E a e eR IRURE Rn UR REC E TA 106 Seltings tose eae eh eb dex red ea nua ERU eA enEX ex cq A dd ue dd 106 Programmable protection functions 106 PAESI SOMMER MC cuc Tuc 106 Panel LOSS ce rox rd EROR e bbc ede x bM aep rua edd vu qe ke 106 External Faute rmm emm en ER Ea ERNER nha 106 Stall Protection escis pr iR dE dE fee arx b REF i eee eee eee 106 Motor Thermal Protection 0 en 107 Table of contents 9 Earth Fault Protection i sse RR RR tre a xr mr er baa en 107 Incorrect wiring err RR mr piunt ENN NNN E NEEN EIERE NA ES E e 107 Preprograrimed faults antem gare xt pem x e eh Drew obe ea Yo ee o de os 108 OVOICUELTODE soci eese cnet truyen Fue acts Weer eege Pec Leo guard 108 DG overvollage issei
89. Resolution Default S 3017 EARTH FAULT 0 1 1 1 Defines the drive response if the drive detects a ground fault in the motor or motor cables The drive monitors for ground faults while the drive is running and while the drive is not running Also see parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT 0 DISABLE No drive response to ground faults 1 ENABLE Ground faults display fault 16 EARTH FAULT and if running the drive coasts to stop 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC 0 3 1 0 Defines the drive response if the fieldbus communication is lost 0 NOT SEL No response 1 FAULT Displays a fault 28 SERIAL 1 ERR and the drive coasts to stop 2 CONST SP7 Displays a warning 2005 IO COMM and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7 This alarm speed remains active until the fieldbus writes a new reference value 3 LAST SPEED Displays a warning 2005 IO COMM and sets speed using the last operating level This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds This alarm speed remains active until the fieldbus writes a new reference value Caution If you select CONST SP7 or LAST SPEED make sure that continued operation is safe when fieldbus communication is lost 3019 COMM FAULT TIME 0 0 60 0 s Dis 10 0 s Sets the communication fault time used with 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC Brief interruptions in the fieldbus communication are not treated as faults if they are less than the COMM FAULT TIME value 3021 Al1 FAU
90. and parameters 163 Group 16 System Controls Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1609 START ENABLE 2 6 7 1 0 Selects the source of the start enable 2 signal Note Start enable functionality differs from the run enable functionality 0 NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external start enable signal 1 Di Defines digital input DI1 as the start enable 2 signal This digital input must be activated for start enable 2 signal If the voltage drops and de activates this digital input the drive will coast to stop and show alarm 2022 on panel display The drive will not start until start enable 2 signal resumes 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 2 signal See DI1 above 7 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start enable 2 signal Bit 3 of the Command word 2 parameter 0302 activates the start disable 2 signal See fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the start enable 2 signal 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 2 signal See DH INV above 1610 DISPLAY ALARMS 0 1 1 1 Controls the visibility of the following alarms 2001 Overcurrent alarm 2002 Overvoltage alarm 2003 Undervoltage alarm 2009 Device overtemperature alarm For more information see secti
91. been out of the allowed area for longer than the user defined time limit An alarm is generated if the torque has been out of the allowed area for longer than the half of the user defined time limit Motor torque 9 A Overload area Torque Torque Torque Torque Torque SE E high 1 high 2 high 3 Allowed ti Torque owed operating area ead low 5 Torque low 3 Torque low 1 Torque i low 2 Underload area Output frequency Hz H H Freq 1 Freq 2 Freq 3 Freq 4 Freq 5 E Settings Parameter Additional information Group 37 User Load Curve User load curve settings B Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0105 Motor torque Alarm USER LOAD CURVE Out of allowed area for longer than half of the defined time limit Fault USER LOAD CURVE Out of allowed area for longer than the defined time limit PAR USER LOAD C Incorrect user load curve parameter setting 3704 gt 3707 or 3707 gt 3710 or 3710 gt 3713 or 3713 gt 3716 or 3705 gt 3706 or 3708 gt 3709 or 3711 gt 3712 or 3714 gt 3715 or 3717 gt 3718 Program features 121 Energy optimizer Energy optimizer optimizes the flux so that the total energy consumption and motor noise level are reduced when the drive operates below the nominal load The total efficiency motor and drive can be improved by 1 1096 depending on load torque and speed Energy saving tools calculate
92. by 3401 parameters 3409 3412 scale the parameter specified by 3408 etc Abar meter rather than one of the parameter values Enable bar graph displays using parameters 3404 3411 and 3418 Bottom The bottom of the LCD display shows Lower corners show the functions currently assigned to the two soft keys Lower middle displays the current time if configured to show the time Operating the Drive AUTO HAND The very first time the drive is powered up it is in the auto control AUTO mode and is controlled from the Control terminal block X1 To switch to hand control HAND and control the drive using the control panel press and hold the d or p button Pressing the HAND button switches the drive to hand control while keeping the drive running Pressing the OFF button switches to hand control and stops the drive To switch back to auto control AUTO press and hold the button Hand Auto Off To start the drive press the HAND or AUTO buttons to stop the drive press the OFF button Reference To modify the reference only possible if the display in the upper right ES corner is in reverse video press the UP or DOWN buttons the reference changes immediately The reference can be modified in the local control mode and can be parameterized using Group 11 reference select to also allow modification in the remote control mode Note The Start Stop Shaft direction and Referen
93. case of direct or indirect contact such as separation from the environment by double or reinforced insulation or isolation from the supply system by a transformer can also be applied Implementing a bypass connection WARNING Never connect the supply power to the drive output terminals U2 V2 and W2 Power line voltage applied to the output can result in permanent damage to the drive If frequent bypassing is required employ mechanically connected switches or contactors to ensure that the motor terminals are not connected to the AC power line and drive output terminals simultaneously Planning the electrical installation 41 Protecting the contacts of relay outputs Inductive loads relays contactors motors cause voltage transients when switched off Equip inductive loads with noise attenuating circuits varistors RC filters AC or diodes DC in order to minimize the EMC emission at switch off If not suppressed the disturbances may connect capacitively or inductively to other conductors in the control cable and form a risk of malfunction in other parts of the system Install the protective component as close to the inductive load as possible Do not install protective components at the I O terminal block Varistor z B o Drive P HEN ot RC filter D Bes oe M M Shoe
94. chapter contains The chapter briefly describes the operation principle layout type designation label and type designation information It also shows a general diagram of power connections and control interfaces Operation principle The ACS320 is a wall or cabinet mountable drive for controlling AC motors The figure below shows the simplified main circuit diagram of the drive The rectifier converts three phase AC voltage to DC voltage The capacitor bank of the intermediate circuit stabilizes the DC voltage The inverter converts the DC voltage back to AC voltage for the AC motor Rectifier Intermediate Inverter circuit SES AC motor MNI AC supply Operation principle and hardware description 23 Product overview E Layout The layout of the drive is presented below The figure shows a frame size R2 drive The construction of the different frame sizes RO R4 varies to some extent Covers on R2 Covers off R2 1 Cooling outlet through top cover 9 EMC filter grounding screw EMC 2 Mounting holes Note The screw is on the front in frame 3 Panel cover a Basic Control Panel b ard Assistant Control Panel c 10 Varistor grounding screw VAR 4 Terminal cover 11 RS 485 connection 5 Panel connection 12 Jumper J701 for connecting RS 485 6 Option connection termination resistor 7 FlashDrop connectio
95. command 3 RUNNING 1 Drive is modulating 0 Drive is not modulating 4 ZERO_SPEED 1 Drive is at zero speed 0 Drive has not reached zero speed 5 ACCELERATE 1 Drive is accelerating 0 Drive is not accelerating 6 DECELERATE 1 Drive is decelerating 0 Drive is not decelerating 7 AT_SETPOINT 1 Drive is at setpoint 0 Drive has not reached setpoint 8 LIMIT 1 Operation is limited by Group 20 settings 0 Operation is within Group 20 settings 9 SUPERVISION 1 A supervised parameter Group 32 is outside its limits 0 All supervised parameters are within limits 10 REV_REF 1 Drive reference is in reverse direction 0 Drive reference is in forward direction 11 REV_ACT 1 Drive is running in reverse direction 0 Drive is running in forward direction 12 PANEL_LOCAL 1 Control is in control panel or PC tool local mode 0 Control is not in control panel local mode 13 FIELDBUS_LOCA 1 Control is in fieldbus local mode steals control panel L local 0 Control is not in fieldbus local mode 14 EXT2_ACT 1 Control is in EXT2 mode 0 Control is in EXT1 mode 15 FAULT 1 Drive is in a fault state 0 Drive is not in a fault state Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 321 DCU Profile STATUS WORD See Parameter 0304 Bit Name Value Status 16 ALARM 1 An alarm is on 0 No alarms are on 17 REQ_MAINT 1 A maintenance request is pending 0 No maintenance
96. conflicting values Swapped Wires If the communication wires are swapped terminal A on one drive is connected to terminal B on another The value of 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES does not advance The values of 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS and 5308 EFB UART ERRORS are advancing To correct Check that the EIA 485 lines are not swapped Fault 28 Serial 1 Err If the drive s control panel shows fault code 28 SERIAL 1 ERR check for either of the following The master system is down To correct resolve problem with master system 274 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus The communication connection is bad To correct check communication connection at the drive The time out selection for the drive is too short for the given installation The master is not polling the drive within the specified time out delay To correct increase the time set by parameter 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Fault 31 EFB1 For BACnet If the drive s control panel shows fault code 31 EFB1 the drive has an invalid Device Object Instance ID To correct use parameters 5311 and 5317 and establish a unique drive ID that is in the range 1 to 4 194 303 Faults 31 33 EFB1 EFB3 Except as noted above these three EFB fault codes listed for the drive in Diagnostics in the ACH550 User s Manual fault codes 31 33 are not used Intermittent Off line Occurrences The problems described above are the most common problems encountered with
97. control of the drive requires Drive parameter values set as defined below Fieldbus controller supplied command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Protocol Reference Modbus Drive Parameter Value Description P deu N2 FLN BACnet abb drv profile 1001 ExT1 10 coMM Start Stop by 40001 40031 BO1 24 BV10 COMMANDS fieldbus with Ext1 bits O 3 bits 0 1 selected 1002 ExT2 10 Comm Start Stop by 40001 40031 BO1 24 BV10 COMMANDS fieldbus with Ext2 bits 0 3 bits 0 1 selected 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST Direction by 4002 40031 BO2 22 BV11 fieldbus 4003 bit 3 1 For Modbus the protocol reference can depend on the profile used hence two columns in these tables One column refers to the ABB Drives profile selected when parameter 5305 0 ABB DRV LIM or 5305 2 ABB DRV FULL The other column refers to the DCU profile selected when parameter 5305 1 DCU PROFILE See ABB Control Profiles Technical Data Section 2 The reference provides direction control a negative reference provides reverse rotation B Input Reference Select Using the fieldbus to provide input references to the drive requires Drive parameter values set as defined below 266 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Fieldbus controller supplied reference word s in the appropriate location Th
98. corrective factor to the drive reference 0 NOT SEL Disables the trim function 1 PROPORTIONAL Adds a trim factor that is proportional to the rom Hz reference 2 DIRECT Adds a trim factor based on the control loop s maximum limit 4231 TRIM SCALE 100 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 Defines the multiplier as a percent plus or minus used in the trim mode Actual signals and parameters 221 Group 42 External PID Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4232 CORRECTION SRC 1 2 1 1 Defines the trimming reference for the correction source 1 PID2 REF Uses appropriate REF MAX SWITCH A OR B e 1105 REF 1 MAX when REF1 is active A 1108 REF 2 MAX when REF2 is active B 2 PID2 OUTPUT Uses the absolute maximum speed or frequency Switch C 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED if 9904 MOTOR CONTROL MODE 1 SPEED or 2 TORQUE 2008 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY IF 9904 MOTOR CONTROL MODE 3 SCALAR Ramped Ref gt Add Switch Select Trim Ext ref 1 par 4230 Scale Mul YT GE max A gt off X LR A Ext ref 2 P prop or x gt max B p direct Abs Max gt gt Speed Freq C Select par 4232 m Trimming PID2 ref PID2 ref PID2 _ Trimming PID2 out 222 Actual signals and parameters E Group 44 Pump Protection This group defines the paramet
99. digital input DI1 as the start enable 1 signal This digital input must be activated for start enable 1 signal If the voltage drops and de activates this digital input the drive will coast to stop and show alarm 2021 on panel display The drive will not start until start enable 1 signal resumes 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 1 signal See DI above 7 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start enable 1 signal Bit 2 of the Command word 2 parameter 0302 activates the start disable 1 signal See fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the start enable 1 signal 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 1 signal See DH INV above Drive Started START STOP COMMAND Par Group 10 START ENABLE SIGNAL l Params 1608 amp 1609 Relay Energized Relay STARTED De energized RELAY STATUS l Par Group 14 Damper Open Damper Damper SE Closed DAMPER 4 Damper Tempe STATUS Opening Closing Time Time RUN ENABLE SIGNAL from the damper end switch when the damper is fully opened Parameter1601 pe i MOTOR STATUS lt gt Lag Acceleration Deceleration Time Time Par 2202 Par 2203 Actual signals
100. easier to work with than views of the full point database ABB ACS320 FLN ABB ACH550 Report Point Subpoint Name Data Type 01 LAO CTLR ADDRESS Each host FLN application e g CIS or Insight controls both the particular data reported for each 02 ERO AREDICATION point and the report format 20 LAO OVRD TIME 29 LDO DAY NIGHT Startup FLN Startup Report Point Subpoint Name Data Type 21 LDI FWD REV Each host FLN application e g CIS or Insight controls both the particular data reported for each 2e EDO GMDEWEBIHEV point and the report format 23 LDI STOPRUN 24 LDO CMD STP STRT 25 LDI EXT1 2 ACT 26 LDO EXT1 2 CMD 34 LDI ENA DIS ACT 35 LDO ENA DIS CMD 36 LDI FLNLOC ACT 60 LAO INPUT REF1 61 LAO INPUT REF2 68 LDO FLN LOC CTL 69 LDO FLN LOC REF 94 LDO RESET FAULT Overview FLN Overview Report Point Subpoint Name Data Type 03 LAI FREQ OUTPUT Each host FLN application e g CIS or Insight controls both the particular data reported for each 04 LAL PCT OUTPUT point and the report format 05 LA SPEED 06 LA CURRENT 07 LA TORQUE 08 LA POWER 09 LAI DRIVE TEMP 284 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus FLN Overview Report
101. follows Switches on the contactor of the speed regulated motor connecting the motor to the ACH550 power output Delays motor start for the time 8122 PFA START DELAY Starts the speed regulated motor Starts auxiliary motors See parameter 8115 for delay Warning Motors equipped with star delta starters require a PFA Start Delay After the ACH550 relay output switches a motor On the star delta starter must Switch to the star connection and then back to the delta connection before the drive applies power So the PFA Start Delay must be longer than the time setting of the star delta starter 254 Actual signals and parameters Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution Default S 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP 0 0 1800 0 s Dis 0 0 Sets the PFA acceleration time for a zero to maximum frequency ramp This PFA acceleration ramp Applies to the speed regulated motor when an auxiliary motor is switched off Replaces the acceleration ramp defined in Group 22 Accel Decel Applies only until the output of the regulated motor increases by an amount equal to the output of the switched off auxiliary motor Then the acceleration ramp defined in Group 22 Accel Decel applies 0 NOT SEL 0 1 1800 Activates this function using the value entered as the acceleration time four A Aux Motor 1 zb c rs d 0 A speed regulated motor accelerating using Group 22 parameters 2202
102. ft category C3 minimum First ronem 30 m 100 ft category C2 1 1 See the new terms in section Definitions on page 359 356 Technical data Control connection data Analog inputs X1A 2 and 5 Analog output X1A 7 Auxiliary voltage X1A 9 Digital inputs X1A 12 16 frequency input X1A 16 Relay output X1B 17 19 Digital output X1B 20 21 RS 485 interface X1C 23 26 Efficiency Voltage signal unipolar bipolar Current signal unipolar bipolar Potentiometer reference value X1A 4 Resolution Accuracy Voltage Type Frequency input Input impedance Type Max switching voltage Max switching current Max continuous current Type Max switching voltage Max switching current Frequency Resolution Accuracy Cable Termination Isolation Transfer rate Communication type Protocol 0 2 10 V Ri gt 312 kohm 10 10 V Rn gt 312 kohm 0 4 20 mA Ri 100 ohm 20 20 mA Ri 100 ohm 10 V 1 max 10 mA R lt 10 kohm 0 1 1 0 4 20 mA load lt 500 ohm 24 V DC 10 max 200 mA 12 24 V DC with internal or external supply PNP and NPN Pulse train 0 16 kHz X1A 16 only 2 4 kohm NO NC 250 V AC 30 V DC 0 5 A 30 V DC 5 A 230 V AC 2Arms Transistor output PNP 30 V DC 100 mA 30 V DC short circuit protected 10 Hz 16 kHz 1Hz 0 296 Shielded twisted pair impedance 100 150 ohm Daisy chained b
103. has no functionality in the drive application None BACnet Protocol Technical Data E Binary Input Object Instance Summary The following table summarizes the Binary Input Objects supported Instance Object inti Active Inactiv Present Value Name Description e Text Access Type BIO RO 1 ACT This object indicates the status of ON OFF R Relay Output 1 BH RO 2 ACT This object indicates the status of ON OFF R Relay Output 2 requires MREL 01 option Bl2 RO 3 ACT This object indicates the status of ON OFF R Relay Output 3 requires MREL 01 option BI3 RO 4 ACT This object indicates the status of ON OFF R Relay Output 4 requires MREL 01 option BI6 DI1 ACT This object indicates the status of ON OFF R Digital Input 1 BI7 DI2ACT This object indicates the status of ON OFF R Digital Input 2 BI8 DI3 ACT This object indicates the status of ON OFF R Digital Input 3 BI9 DI4 ACT This object indicates the status of ON OFF R Digital Input 4 BH0 DI5 ACT This object indicates the status of ON OFF R Digital Input 5 Note For Present Value Access Types R Read only W Writeable C Commandable Commandable values support priority arrays amp relinquish defaults E Binary Output Object Instance Summary The following table summarizes the Binary Output Objects supported Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 297 Instance O
104. ma or 10 V Top position 0 4 20 mA default for Al2 or 20 20 mA Bottom position U 0 2 10 V default for Al1 or 10 10 V 74 Start Up W Application Macro Listing This section describes the following macros K A Macro vane Macro 1 HVAC default 8 Internal timer 2 Supply fan 9 Internal timer with constant speeds 3 Return fan 10 Floating point 4 Cooling tower fan 11 Dual setpoint PID 5 Condenser 12 Dual setpoint PID with constant speeds 6 Booster pump 13 E Clipse 7 Pump alternation 14 Hand Control Start Up 75 B Selecting an Application Macro To select a macro follow these steps Select MENU to enter the main menu T Select ASSISTANTS with the Up Down buttons and select A ENTER 2 NOE Scroll to APPLICATION and select ENTER A 3 NE al b Select a macro with the Up Down buttons and select SAVE 4 NE W Restoring Defaults To restore the factory default settings select the application macro HVAC Default B Control Wiring Each macro has specific requirements for control wiring Specific wiring requirements are included with each macro description gt 76 Start Up B HVAC Default This macro provides the factory default parameter settings for the ACS320 Factory defaults can be restored at any time by setting parameter 9902 to 1 The diagram below show
105. or 2205 B speed regulated motor decelerating using Group 22 parameters 2203 or 2206 At aux motor start speed regulated motor decelerates using 8125 DEC IN AUX START At aux motor stop speed regulated motor accelerates using 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP 8125 DEC IN AUX START 0 0 1800 0 s Dis 0 0 Sets the PFA deceleration time for a maximum to zero frequency ramp This PFA deceleration ramp Applies to the speed regulated motor when an auxiliary motor is switched on Replaces the deceleration ramp defined in Group 22 ACCEL DECEL Applies only until the output of the regulated motor decreases by an amount equal to the output of the auxiliary motor Then the deceleration ramp defined in Group 22 ACCEL DECEL applies 0 NOT SEL 0 1 1800 Activates this function using the value entered as the acceleration time 8126 TIMED 0 4 1 0 AUTOCHANGE Sets the autochange with timer When enables autochange is controlled with the timer functions 0 NOT SEL 1 Timer 1 Enables autochange when Timer 1 is active 2 4 Timer 2 4 Enables autochange when Timer 2 4 is active Actual signals and parameters 255 Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution Default S 8127 MOTORS 0 7 1 0 Y Sets the actual number of PFA controlled motors maximum 6 motors 1 speed regulated 3 connected direct on line and 3 spare motors This value includes
106. parameter 188 first environment definition 359 FlashDrop parameter view parameter 163 FLN fieldbus also see comm EFB description a i decet e eere 282 loop gaitis swan n RIMe6R elu 287 point database AA 287 point descriptions eeen 291 KEE A cep pM 282 supported features necer 282 force trip fault code ssessss 338 frame errors count parameter 233 234 frame size eee Intent 353 free fall stress testing 357 free space el ge ln EE 345 freq in amp tran out sssssssscssseereernreernnrrinerrnnernnas 167 frequency at fault history parameter 139 max limit parameter 170 min limit parameter 170 motor resolution esses 355 motor specification ssssss 355 switching parameter 177 f SeS uu eto n ede et ec 351 200 240 volt drives 351 380 480 volt drives 351 G gain PID parameter AN 205 generic profile actual value scaling 271 reference scaling esessse 324 ground cable wire requirements 36 46 50 H heat EE 345 l incomp swtype fault code
107. parameter See parameter 3406 192 Actual signals and parameters Group 34 Panel Display Process Variables Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3421 OUTPUT 3 MAX Depends on 1 selection aes maximum value displayed for the third display parameter See parameter E Group 35 Motor Temp Meas This group defines the detection and reporting for a particular potential fault motor overheating as detected by a temperature sensor Typical connections are defined below One Sensor IW Wi L All Motor E WW T Laun KS 1 AO1 Moa E AGND 10nF Three Sensors Actual signals and parameters 193 A Warning IEC 60664 requires double or reinforced insulation between live parts and the surface of accessible parts of electrical equipment which are either non conductive or conductive but not connected to the protective earth To fulfill the insulation requirement connect a thermistor and other similar components to the drive s control terminals using any of these alternatives Separate the thermistor from live parts of the motor with double reinforced insulation Protect all circuits connected to the drive s digital and analog inputs Protect against contact and insulate from other low voltage circuits with basic insulation rated for the same voltage level as the drive s main circuit
108. registers 311 EFB mapping details 309 EFB mapping summary 308 EFB supported features 307 motor aux start delay PFA parameter 243 aux stop delay PFA parameter 243 checking insulation 43 compatibility 34 connection specifications 355 load curve break point frequency 182 load curve max fault parameter 181 load curve zero speed load 181 maintenance triggers sessse 179 nominal current parameter 129 nominal frequency parameter 129 nominal power parameter 129 nominal speed parameter 129 nominal voltage parameter 129 number of aux parameter 243 244 phase fault code sssuss 339 stall fault code ssssseeeeess 337 temperature alarm limit parameter 195 temperature fault limit parameter 195 temperature measure parameter group 192 temperature sensor selection parameter 195 temperature sensor type parameter 194 temperature data parameter 132 thermal protection fault parameter 181 thermal time fault parameter 181
109. requirement of the motor cable shield of the drive is shown below It consists of a 36 Planning the electrical installation concentric layer of copper wires The better and tighter the shield the lower the emission level and bearing currents Insulation jacket Copper wire screen Cable core E Additional North American requirements Type MC continuous corrugated aluminium armor cable with symmetrical grounds or shielded power cable is recommended for the motor cables if metallic conduit is not used The power cables must be rated for 75 C 167 F Conduit Where conduits must be coupled together bridge the joint with a ground conductor bonded to the conduit on each side of the joint Bond the conduits also to the drive enclosure Use separate conduits for input power motor and control wiring Do not run motor wiring from more than one drive in the same conduit Armored cable shielded power cable Six conductor three phases and three ground type MC continuous corrugated aluminium armor cable with symmetrical grounds is available from the following suppliers trade names in parentheses Anixter Wire amp Cable Philsheath BICC General Corp Philsheath Rockbestos Co Gardex Oaknite CLX Shielded power cable is available from the following suppliers Belden LAPPKABEL OLFLEX Pirelli Selecting the control cables B General rules All analog control cables and the cable
110. s Manual 3AUA0000035974 English 1007 PAR FBUSMISS Fieldbus control has Check fieldbus parameter settings 6320 not been activated 0307 bit 15 1009 PAR PCU 1 Incorrect motor Check parameter settings Following 6320 nominal must apply 0307 bit 15 speed frequency 1 60 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ setting 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED 16 0 8 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED 120 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ Motor poles 0 992 342 Fault tracing CODE FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO 1012 PAR PFC IO 1 UO configuration for Check parameter settings Following 6320 PFC not complete must apply 0307 bit 15 There are enough relays parameterized for PFC No conflict exists between parameter Group 14 Relay Outputs parameter 8117 NR OF AUX MOT and parameter 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 1013 PAR PFC IO 2 UO configuration for Check parameter settings Following 6320 PFC not complete must apply 0307 bit 15 The actual number of PFC motors parameter 8127 MOTORS matches the PFC motors in parameter Group 14 Relay Outputs and parameter 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 1014 PAR PFC IO 3 UO configuration for See parameters 8120 INTERLOCKS 6320 PFC not complete and 8127 MOTORS 0307 bit 15 The drive is unable to allocate a digital input interlock for each PFC motor 1015 PAR CUSTOM U F Incorrect voltage to Check parameter 2610 USER 6320 frequency DEFINED U1 2677 USER DEFINED U f ratio
111. sensors Operation is the same as for above 1 x PT100 4 PTC Sensor configuration uses one Ohm PTC The analog output feeds a constant 4000 current through the sensor The resistance of the sensor increases 1330 sharply as the motor temperature rises over the PTC reference temperature Tret as does the voltage over the resistor The temperature 550 measurement function reads the voltage through analog input Al1 and converts it into ohms 100 The figure shows typical PTC sensor resistance values as a function of the motor operating temperature D Temperature Resistance Normal 0 1 5 kohm Excessive gt 4kohm 5 THERMISTOR 0 Sensor configuration uses a thermistor Motor thermal protection is activated through a digital input Connect either a PTC sensor or a normally closed thermistor relay to a digital input The drive reads the digital input states as shown in the above table When the digital input is 0 the motor is overheated See the figures in the introduction to this Group 6 THERMISTOR 1 Sensor configuration uses a thermistor Motor thermal protection is activated through a digital input Connect a normally open thermistor relay to a digital input The drive reads the digital input states as shown in the above table When the digital input is 1 the motor is overheated See the figures in the introduction to this Group A
112. set to accept start stop direction commands or references via control panel Check Group 10 AcStart Stop Dir and Group 11 Reference Select settings 0012 MOTOR STALL Motor is operating in Check motor load and drive ratings 7121 stall region due to eg Check fault function parameters 0305 bit 11 excessive load or insufficient motor programmable fault power function 3010 3012 0014 EXT FAULT 1 External fault 1 Check external devices for faults 9000 Check parameter 3003 EXTERNAL 0305 bit 13 FAULT 1 setting programmable fault function 3003 0015 EXT FAULT 2 External fault 2 Check external devices for faults 9001 Check parameter 3004 EXTERNAL 0305 bit 14 FAULT 2 setting programmable fault function 3004 0016 EARTH FAULT Drive has detected Check motor 2330 0305 bit 15 programmable fault function 301 7 earth ground fault in motor or motor cable Check fault function parameters Check motor cable Motor cable length must not exceed maximum specifications See section Motor connection data on page 355 338 Fault tracing CODE FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO 0018 THERM FAIL Drive internal fault Contact your local ABB 5210 Thermistor used for representative 0306 bit 1 drive internal temperature measurement is open or short circuited 0021 CURR MEAS Drive internal fault Contact your local ABB 2211 Current measurement representative 0306 bit 4 is ou
113. so once the command is issued this point automatically returns to its inactive state This momentary operation avoids any need for an explicit command to clear the point before a subsequent reset can be issued 95 MBOX PARAM Sets the parameter to be used by the mailbox function 96 MBOX DATA Sets or indicates the data value of the mailbox function 97 MBOX READ Command by FLN to read the parameter value specified by Point 95 MBOX PARAM The parameter value is returned in Point 96 MBOX DATA The control input is rising edge sensitive so once the command is issued this point automatically returns to its inactive state This momentary operation avoids any need for an explicit command to clear the point before a subsequent reset can be issued 296 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus FLN Detailed Point Descriptions Point Description Drive Parameter 98 MBOX WRITE Command by FLN to write the data value specified by Point 96 MBOX DATA to the parameter value specified by Point 95 MBOX PARAM The control input is rising edge sensitive so once the command is issued this point automatically returns to its inactive state This momentary operation avoids any need for an explicit command to clear the point before a subsequent reset can be issued 99 ERROR STATUS 1 of the 5 mandatory FLN points required for compatibility with Siemens control systems It
114. source for the process reference If Al1 is used Setting analog input Al1 limits scale inversion Setting the reference limits Setting the speed reference limits Setting the source and limits for the process actual value 1106 1301 1303 3001 1107 1108 2007 2008 4016 4018 4019 Start Stop Control Selecting the source for start and stop 1001 1002 signals of the two external control locations EXT1 and EXT2 Selecting between EXT1 and EXT2 1102 Defining the direction control 1003 Defining the start and stop modes 2107 2103 Selecting the use of Run Enable signal 1601 Protections Setting the current limits 2003 Output Signals Selecting the signals indicated through relay output RO Selecting the signals indicated through analog output AO Setting the minimum maximum scaling and inversion Group 14 Relay Outputs Group 15 Analog Outputs 92 Program features Name Description Set parameters Timed Functions Setting the timed functions Selecting the timed start stop control for external control locations EXT1 and EXT2 Selecting timed EXT1 EXT2 control Activation of timed constant speed 1 Selecting timed function status indicated through relay output RO Selecting timed PID1 parameter set 1 2 control Group 36 Timer Functions 1001 1002 1102 1201 1401 4027 Program features 93 B Contents of the assistant displays Th
115. starting order counter eeren 248 start up AUT te m T RS 55 Tuning EE 55 start up assistant sees 56 start up data parameter group 128 state diagram ABB drives deme cte 323 comi EFB tected teeta 323 station id RS232 parameter 232 status at fault history parameter 139 status word comm EFB definition 318 stop aux motor PFA parameters 242 aux motor delay ereere 243 DC brake time parameter 172 DC current ref parameter 172 emergency select parameter 172 function parameter suss 171 parameter group eeeeeeeeee 171 Stop fUnctlOm eebe ie ae quete trenes 127 emergenGcy 22 teh eatin ca ee es 172 MOTOT ers E oval A UR 171 supervision parameter group eee eects 186 parameter low limit parameters 187 parameter selection parameters 186 supply phase fault code 338 switching frequency control parameter 177 switching frequency derating 350 switching frequency parameter 177 System controls parameter group 158 1 temperature Aerating sseeeesss 350 termination scene etn 260 test date parameter
116. supervision function Measured outlet pressure PFC reference i PS Aur X 1 3 et D 1 1 FAULT 3 Detection of high outlet pressure trips the drive on a fault 4410 Al MEAS OUTLET NOT SEL Selects the analog input for pump fan outlet pressure supervision NOT SEL 0 No analog input selected An 1 Pump fan outlet pressure monitored through analog input Al1 Al2 2 See selection AI 4411 AL OUT HI LEVEL 0 00 100 00 120 0196 100 00 Sets the supervision limit for the primary outlet pressure measurement If the value of the selected analog input exceeds this limit the action defined by parameter 4409 OUTLET PROT CTRL is taken after a delay set with parameter 4475 OUTLET CTRL DLY expires Supervision level Actual signals and parameters 225 Group 44 Pump Protection Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4412 VERY HIGH CTRL NOT SEL Enables and selects the mode of the secondary outlet pressure supervision function The function uses the analog input selected by parameter 4410 Al MEAS OUTLET NOT SEL 0 Secondary outlet pressure monitoring not used STOP 1 Detection of very high outlet pressure stops the drive The drive will start again if the pressure falls below the supervision level FAULT 2 Detection of very high outlet pressure trips the drive on a fault 4413 AIL OUT VERY HIGH 0 00 100 00 120 0196 100 00 Supervision level for secondary outlet pressure monito
117. that continued operation is safe when the analog input signal is lost 3002 PANEL COMM ERR 1 3 1 1 Defines the drive response to a control panel communication error 1 FAULT Displays a fault 10 PANEL LOSS and the drive coasts to stop 2 CONST SP7 Displays a warning 2008 PANEL LOSS and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7 3 LAST SPEED Displays a warning 2008 PANEL LOSS and sets speed using the last operating level This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds Warning If you select CONST SP7 or LAST SPEED make sure that continued operation is safe when the control panel communication is lost 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 6 6 1 0 Defines the External Fault 1 signal input and the drive response to an external fault 0 NOT SEL External fault signal is not used 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the external fault input Activating the digital input indicates a fault The drive displays a fault 14 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 and the drive coasts to stop 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the external fault input See DI1 above 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input D11 as the external fault input De activating the digital input indicates a fault The drive displays a fault 14 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 and the drive coasts to stop 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the external fault input See DH INv above 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT
118. that only concern certain frame sizes are marked with the symbol of the frame size RO R4 E Sizing The current ratings are the same regardless of the supply voltage within one voltage range To achieve the rated motor power given in the table the rated current of the drive must be higher than or equal to the rated motor current Note 1 The maximum allowed motor shaft power is limited to 1 5 Py If the limit is exceeded motor torque and current are automatically restricted The function protects the input bridge of the drive against overload Note 2 The ratings apply at ambient temperature of 40 C 104 F B Derating The load capacity decreases if the installation site ambient temperature exceeds 40 C 104 F or if the altitude exceeds 1000 meters 3300 ft Temperature derating In the temperature range 40 C 50 C 4104 F 122 F the rated output current is decreased by 1 for every additional 1 C 1 8 F The output current is calculated by multiplying the current given in the rating table by the derating factor Example If the ambient temperature is 50 C 122 F the derating factor is 100 1 E 10 C 90 or 0 90 The output current is then 0 90 Joy Altitude derating In altitudes 1000 2000 m 3300 6600 ft above sea level the derating is 196 for every 100 m 330 ft Switching frequency derating Derate according to the switching frequency used see parameter 2606 SWITCHING
119. the 24 V DC voltage supply offered by the drive and a digital input The figure below displays the connection Par 3501 THERM 0 or THERM 1 Thermistor relay DM 5 _ 24 V DC Motor WARNING According to IEC 664 the connection of the motor thermistor to the digital input requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts and the thermistor Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creeping distance of 8 mm 400 500 V AC equipment If the thermistor assembly does not fulfill the requirement the other I O terminals of the drive must be protected against contact or a thermistor relay must be used to isolate the thermistor from the digital input B Settings Parameter Additional information Group 13 Analog Inputs Analog input settings Group 15 Analog Outputs Analog output settings Group 35 Motor Temp Meas Motor temperature measurement settings Other At the motor end the cable shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor If this is not possible the shield is to be left unconnected B Diagnostics Actual value Additional information 0145 Motor temperature Alarm Fault Additional information MOTOR TEMP MOT OVERTEMP Excessive motor temp 118 Program features Timed functions A variety of drive functions can be time co
120. the panel with the control being taken by FLN instead HAND mode at the panel has priority over this point Thus this point is only effective in temporarily taking control from the digital inputs or some other internal control functionality 69 FLN LOC REF Commanded by FLN to temporarily steal input reference control of the drive from its normal source and place it under FLN control This functionality is analogous to placing the drive in HAND mode at the panel with the reference control being taken by FLN instead HAND mode at the panel has priority over this point Thus this point is only effective in temporarily taking control from the analog inputs or some other internal control functionality 70 DI 1 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Digital Input 1 1 ON 0 OFF 0118 bit 2 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 295 FLN Detailed Point Descriptions mm Drive Point Description Parameter 71 DI 2 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Digital Input 2 1 ON 0 OFF 0118 bit 1 72 DI 3 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Digital Input 3 1 ON 0 OFF 0118 bit 0 73 DI 4 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Digital Input 4 1 ON 0 OFF 0119 bit 2 74 DI 5 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Digital Input 5 1 ON 0 OFF 0119 bit 1 76 RO 1 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Relay Output 1 1 ON 0 OFF 0122 bit 2 77 RO2ACTUAL
121. these steps Select MENU to enter the main menu hs Select ASSISTANTS with the Up Down buttons and select ENTER 2 NE NE Scroll to COMMISSION DRIVE with the Up Down buttons Change the values suggested by the assistant to your preferences and then press SAVE after every 4 change al d The Start Up Assistant will guide you through the start up Start Up 57 E Start Up by Changing the Parameters Individually To change the parameters follow these steps Select MENU to enter the main menu hs Select the Parameters mode with the UP DOWN buttons and select ENTER to select the 2 Parameters mode Select the appropriate parameter group with the UP DOWN buttons and select SEL Select the appropriate parameter in a group with the UP DOWN buttons Select EDIT to change 4 the parameter value Press the UP DOWN buttons to change the parameter value CPA ep eod er Select SAVE to store the modified value or select CANCEL to leave the set mode 6 Any modifications not saved are cancelled 4 Select EXIT to return to the listing of parameter groups and again to return to the main menu Ce wf To complete the control connections by manually entering the parameters see Parameters Mode in this section For detailed hardware description see the Technical Data section 58 Start Up Note The current pa
122. to Time Format with the er UM buttons and select C 7 NE The different formats are displayed Select a format wit CA the D aga buttons and select SEL to confirm the v 8 selection w Scroll to Set Date with the UP DOWN buttons and select SEL CA 9 NUES A Change the days months and year with the UP DOWN buttons c and select OK to save the 10 values The active value is Nur displayed in inverted color Scroll to Date Format with the UP DOWN buttons and select gt SEL 11 NE The Date formats are displayed Select a date format with ran C 5 DOWN buttons and select to 12 confirm the selection Sp CZ 13 Select EXIT twice to return to the main menu 72 Start Up B UO Settings Mode To view and edit the I O settings follow these steps Select MENU to enter the main menu NE 1 Scroll to I O Settings with the UP DOWN buttons and select 5 ENTER 2 NES Scroll to the I O setting you want to view with the UP DOWN A buttons and select SEL 3 Sy NE Select the setting you want to view with the UP DOWN buttons cA and select OK 4 Vy NE You can change the value with the UP DOWN buttons and save A 5 it by selecting SAVE 5 If you do not want to change the NE setting select CANCEL ES Select EXIT to return to th i SP erl o return to the main EZ Application Macros
123. to be controlled through digital inputs DI4 amp DI5 By activating digital input 4 the speed reference increases by activating digital input 5 the speed reference decreases If both digital inputs are active or inactive the reference does not change ue 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen 2 AM External reference 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC O 5 JAl2 PID feedback 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common 7 AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA UJ 8 AGND Analog output circuit common p 49 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC r 110 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 11 DCOM Digital input common for all 412 DI1 Start Stop Activate to start drive 4113 DI2 Run permissive Deactivate to stop drive P 1601 I 414 DIS Safety interlock1 Deactivate to stop drive P 1608 I 3115 DI4 Reference Up Activate to increase reference 16 DI5 Reference Down Activate to decrease reference X1BrizTRO1C Relay output 1 P 1401 18 RO1A fN Default operation Started gt 17 connected to 19 19 RO1B Ln 20 DOSRC Digital output max 100 mA P 1805 21 DOOUT ae No fault Fault 1 gt 20 connected to 22 22 DOGND Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Valu
124. usage since the last reset The value can be reset to zero The corresponding drive parameter is 0115 kWh Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 301 Instance Object Name Description Units Present Value Access Type AV9 KWH NR This object indicates the drive s accumulated energy usage in kW hours The value cannot be reset kWh R AV10 PRC PID FBCK This object is the Process PID feedback signal The corresponding drive parameter is 0130 Percent AV11 PRC PID DEV This object is the Process PID output signal s deviation from its setpoint The corresponding drive parameter is 0132 Percent AV12 EXT PID FBCK This object is the External PID feedback signal The corresponding drive parameter is 0131 Percent AV13 EXT PID DEV This object is the External PID output signal s deviation from its setpoint The corresponding drive parameter is 0133 Percent AV14 RUN TIME R This object indicates in hours the drive s accumulated run time since the last reset The value can be reset to zero The corresponding drive parameter is 0114 Hours AV15 MOTOR TEMP This object indicates the drive s motor temperature as set up in parameter Group 35 The corresponding drive parameter is 0145 AV16 INPUT REF 1 This object sets Input Reference 1 Control requires parameter 1103 value COMM Percent
125. 0 V 10 10 V or current 0 4 20 mA 20 20 mA as the signal types for analog inputs Ali and Al2 The factory settings are unipolar voltage for Al1 0 2 10 V and unipolar current for Al2 0 4 20 mA which correspond to the default usage in the application macros The switch is located to the left of I O terminal 9 see the I O terminal figure above Top position 0 4 20 mA default for Al2 or 20 20 mA Bottom position U 0 2 10 V default for Al1 or 10 10 V 1 Al1 m mja Al2 m m m Permanently affix control cables with a minimum 1 4 spacing from power cables Electrical installation 47 Voltage and current connection for analog inputs Bipolar voltage 10 10 V and current 20 20 mA are also possible If a bipolar connection is used instead of a unipolar one see section Programmable analog inputs on page 97 for how to set parameters accordingly Unipolar voltage Bipolar voltage Unipolar Bipolar current 1 10 kohm SCR SCR 4 SCR Al Al ZEND 1 J TOND 18ND 10V Use external power supply 10 V GND 10 V R SES Ld PNP and NPN configuration for digital inputs You can wire the digital input terminals in either a PNP or NPN configuration
126. 0 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common nd 7 AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA V 748 AGND Analog output circuit common r 49 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC r 10 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 11 DCOM Digital input common for all I 412 DI1 Start Stop Activate to start drive I 413 DI2 Run permissive Deactivate to stop drive P 1601 lt 414 DI3 Constant Preset speed 1 P 1202 I 3415 DI4 Safety interlock1 Deactivate to stop drive P 1608 L_ __ 46 DI5 Safety interlock2 Deactivate to stop drive P 1609 X1BG77ROIG Relay output 1 P 1401 18 RO1A x Default operation Started gt 17 connected to 19 19 RO1B 20 DOSRC Digital output max 100 mA P 1805 21 DOOUT pt No fault Fault 1 gt 20 connected to 22 22 DOGND Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9902 applic macro 5 CONDENSER 2203 deceler time 1 10 0s 1401 relay output 1 7 STARTED 3207 superv 3 param 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 1601 run enable 2 D12 4005 error value inv 1 YES 1609 start enable 2 5 D15 4101 gain 1 0 2202 acceler time 1 10 0s 4102 integration time 60 0s Start Up 81 E Booster Pump This macro configures for booster pump applications where the pump speed is controlled according to a signal received from a transducer When using direct speed reference in AUTO mode or process PID see General Considerations on page 73
127. 03 3 REQUEST is the same as 1003 1 FWD 4 DI1P 2P 3 Three wire Start Stop Direction Start Stop commands are through momentary push buttons as described for DITP 2P Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST is through digital input DIS DI3 activated Reverse de activated Forward Actual signals and parameters 141 Group 10 AcStart Stop Dir Code Description Range Resolution Default S 5 DI1P 2P 3P Start Forward Start Reverse and Stop Start and Direction commands are given simultaneously with two separate momentary push buttons the P stands for pulse Start Forward command is through a normally open push button connected to digital input DI1 In order to start the drive the digital input DI3 must be activated during the pulse in Di Start Reverse command is through a normally open push button connected to digital input D12 In order to start the drive the digital input DI3 must be activated prior the pulse in DI2 Connect multiple Start push buttons in parallel Stop is through a normally closed push button connected to digital input DI3 Connect multiple Stop push buttons in series Requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST 6 DI6 Two wire Start Stop Sonn is through digital input DI6 DI6 activated Start DI6 de activated top Parameter 1003 defines the direction Selecting 1003 3 REQUEST is the same as 1003 1 FWD 7
128. 032 STATUS WORD Bit 31 Reserved ACK OFF ILCK 10033 DH DI DH 10034 DI2 DIS DIS 10035 DI3 DI3 DI3 10036 DI4 DA DI4 10037 DI5 DI5 DI5 Active low For the 1xxxx registers e Additional discrete inputs are added sequentially The ACS320 supports the following Modbus function codes for discrete inputs Function Code Description 02 Read input status 3xxxx Mapping Modbus Inputs The drive maps the following information to the 3xxxx Modbus addresses called Modbus input registers Any user defined analog inputs 312 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus The following table summarizes the input registers Internal Mou aste Location Remarks All Profiles 30001 ail This register shall report the level of Analog Input 1 0 100 30002 ai2 This register shall report the level of Analog Input 2 0 100 The ACH550 supports the following Modbus function codes for 3xxxx registers Function Code Description 04 Read 3xxxx input status 4xxxx Register Mapping The drive maps its parameters and other data to the 4xxxx holding registers as follows 40001 40099 map to drive control and actual values These registers are described in the table below 40101 49999 map to drive parameters 0101 9999 Register addresses that do not correspond to drive parameters are invalid If there is an attempt to read or write outside the param
129. 06 1 0 0 Constant speed 6 1207 O 0 O Constant speed 7 1208 13 E Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI3 D14 and bib See above DI1 2 3 INv for code Actual signals and parameters 151 Group 12 Constant Speeds Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1202 CONST SPEED 1 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 6 0 US Sets value for Constant Speed 1 The range and units depend on parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE Range 0 30000 rpm when 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED Range 0 500 Hz when 9904 3 SCALAR FREQ 12083 CONST SPEED 2 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 12 0 Sets a value for a Constant Speed See CONST SPEED 1 above 1204 CONST SPEED 3 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 18 0 Sets a value for a Constant Speed See CONST SPEED 1 above 1205 CONST SPEED A 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 24 0 Sets a value for a Constant Speed See CONST SPEED 1 above 1206 CONST SPEED 5 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 30 0 Sets a value for a Constant Speed See CONST SPEED 1 above 1207 CONST SPEED 6 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 48 0 Sets a value for a Constant Speed See CONST SPEED 1 above 1208 CONST SPEED 7 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 60 0 Sets a value for a Constant Speed See CONST SPEED 1 above 1209 TIMED MODE SEL 1 2 1 2 Y Defines timer activated constant speed mode Timer can be used to change between external reference and a maximum of three constant speeds or to change between a maximum of
130. 1 Defines timer 4 weekly start day See parameter 3604 3617 STOP DAY A 1 7 1 1 Defines timer 4 weekly stop day See parameter 3605 3622 BOOSTER SEL 6 6 1 0 Selects the source for the booster signal 0 NOT SEL Booster signal is disabled 1 DI1 Defines DI as the booster signal 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines DI2 DI6 as the booster signal 1 Di INV Defines an inverted digital input DI as the booster signal 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the booster signal 3623 BOOSTER TIME 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 Defines the booster ON time Time is started when booster sel signal I Booster active 5 M is released If parameter range is 01 30 00 then booster Activation DI is active for 1 hour and 30 minutes after La activation DI is f released Booster time 200 Actual signals and parameters Group 36 Timer Functions Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3626 TIMER 1 SRC 0 31 1 0 Defines the time periods used by the timer 0 NOT SEL No timers have been selected 1 P1 Time Period 1 selected in the timer 2 P2 Time Period 2 selected in the timer 3 P2 P1 Time Periods 1 and 2 selected in the timer 4 P3 Time Period 3 selected in the timer 5 P3 P1 Time Periods 1 and 3 selected in the timer 6 P3 P2 Time Periods 2 an
131. 1 0 1s Dis Defines the filter time constant for frequency input ie the time within 6396 of a step change is reached See section Frequency input on page 100 168 Actual signals and parameters Group 18 FREQ IN amp TRAN OUT Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1804 TO MODE DIGITAL Selects the operation mode for the transistor output TO See section Transistor output on page 707 DIGITAL 0 Transistor output is used as a digital output DO FREQUENCY 1 Transistor output is used as a frequency output FO 1805 DO SIGNAL FAULT 1 Selects a drive status indicated through digital output DO See parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1806 DO ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 1 0 1s 0 0s Defines the operation delay for digital output DO 1807 DO OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 120 1s 0 0s Defines the release delay for digital output DO 1808 FO CONTENT SEL X X 104 Selects a drive signal to be connected to frequency output FO Parameter index in Group 01 Operating Data Eg 102 0102 SPEED 1809 FO CONTENT MIN X X Defines the minimum frequency output FO signal value Signal is selected with parameter 7808 FO CONTENT SEL FO minimum and maximum correspond to 7877 MINIMUM FO and 1812 MAXIMUM FO settings as follows FO 1812 1912 I 1811 1811 r Leg r i Ee 1809 1810 FO 1809 1810 FO content content Setting range depends on parameter 1808 FO CONTENT SEL se
132. 1 controller setpoint signal Units and scale defined by PID parameters 4006 4106 amp 4007 4107 0129 PID 2 SETPNT The PID 2 controller setpoint signal Units and scale defined by PID parameters 4206 amp 4207 0130 PID 1 FBK The PID 1 controller feedback signal Units and scale defined by PID parameters 4006 4106 amp 4007 4107 0131 PID 2 FBK The PID 2 controller feedback signal Units and scale defined by PID parameters 4206 amp 4207 0132 PID 1 DEVIATION The difference between the PID 1 controller reference value and actual value Units and scale defined by PID parameters 4006 4106 amp 4007 4107 0133 PID 2 DEVIATION s The difference between the PID 2 controller reference value and actual value Units and scale defined by PID parameters 4206 amp 4207 0134 COMM RO WORD 0 65535 1 0 Free data location that can be written from serial link Used for relay output control See parameter 1401 132 Actual signals and parameters Group 01 Operating Data Code Description Range Resolution Default S 0135 COMM VALUE 1 32768 32767 1 0 Free data location that can be written from serial link 0136 COMM VALUE 2 32768 32767 1 0 Free data location that can be written from serial link 0137 PROCESS VAR 1 1 Process variable 1 Defined by parameters in Group 34 Panel Display Process Variables 0188 PR
133. 128 bytes overflow the buffer The excess characters are counted 5208 CRC ERRORS 0 65535 1 Contains a count of the messages with a CRC error that the drive receives For high counts check Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors CRC calculations for possible errors 234 Actual signals and parameters E Group 53 EFB Protocol This group defines set up variables used for an embedded fieldbus EFB communication protocol Refer to communication protocol documentation for more information on these parameters Group 53 EFB Protocol Code Description Range Resolution Default S 5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID 0000 FFFF hex 1 0000 hex Contains the identification and program revision of the protocol Format XXYY where xx protocol ID and YY program revision 5302 EFB STATION ID 0 65535 1 1 v Defines the node address of the RS485 link The node address on each unit must be unique 5303 EFB BAUD RATE 1 2 76 8 kbits s 9 6 kbits s Defines the communication speed of the RS485 link in kbits per second kbits s 1 2 kbits s 2 4 kbits s 4 8 kbits s 9 6 kbits s 19 2 kbits s 38 4 kbits s 57 6 kbits s 76 8 kbits s 5304 EFB PARITY 0 3 0 Defines the data length parity and stop bits to be used with the RS485 link communication The same settings must be used in all on line stations 0 8N1 8 data bits No parity one stop bit 1 8N2 8 da
134. 15 displays as 8000 Bit 0301 fb cmd word 1 0302 fb cmd word 2 0 STOP FBLOCAL CTL 1 START FBLOCAL REF 2 REVERSE START DISABLE1 3 LOCAL START DISABLE2 4 RESET Reserved 5 EXT2 Reserved 6 RUN DISABLE Reserved 7 STPMODE R Reserved 8 STPMODE EM Reserved 9 STPMODE C Reserved 10 RAMP 2 Reserved 11 RAMP OUT 0 REF CONST 12 RAMP HOLD REF AVE 13 RAMP IN O LINK ON 14 RREQ LOCALLOC REQ STARTINH 15 TORQLIM2 OFF INTERLOCK 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 Read only copy of the Fieldbus Command Word 2 See parameter 0301 Actual signals and parameters 135 Group 03 Actual Signals Code Description Range Resolution Default S 0303 FB STS WORD 1 1 hex Read only copy of the Status Word 1 The drive sends status information to the fieldbus controller The status consists of two Status Words Bit 0303 sts cmd word 1 0304 fb sts word 2 0 READY ALARM 1 ENABLED REQ_MAINT 2 STARTED DIRLOCK 3 RUNNING LOCALLOCK 4 ZERO SPEED CTL MODE 5 ACCELERATE Reserved 6 DECELERATE Reserved 7 WI SETPOINT Reserved 8 LIMIT Reserved 9 SUPERVISION Reserved 10 REV REF REQ CTL 11 REN ACT REQ REF1 12 PANEL LOCAL REQ REF2 13 FIELDBUS LOCAL REQ REF2EXT 14 EXT2 ACT ACK STARTINH 15 FAULT ACK OFF ILCK 0304 FB STS WORD 2 1 hex Read only copy of the Status Word 2 See parameter 0303 136 Actual signals a
135. 2 6 6 1 0 Defines the External Fault 2 signal input and the drive response to an external fault See parameter 3003 above Actual signals and parameters 181 Group 30 Fault Functions Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3005 MOT THERM PROT 0 2 1 1 Defines the drive response to motor overheating 0 NOT SEL No response and or motor thermal protection not set up 1 FAULT When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 90 C displays a warning 2010 MOT OVERTEMP When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 110 C displays a fault 9 MOT OVERTEMP and the drive coasts to stop 2 WARNING When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 90 C displays a warning 2010 MOT OVERTEMP 3006 MOT THERM TIME 256 9999 s 1 1050 s Sets the motor thermal time Motor load 4 constant for the motor temperature model This is the time required for t the motor to reach 63 of the gt final temperature with steady load Temp Rise 4 l For thermal protection 100 s a according to UL requirements 63951 ____ I for NEMA class motors use i the rule of thumb MOTOR l THERM TIME equals 35 times t6 where t6 in seconds is specified by the motor manufacturer as the time that the motor can safely operate at six times its rated current The thermal time for a Class 10 trip curve is 350 s for a Class 20 trip curve 700 s and for a Class 30 trip curve 1050 s
136. 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC r 10 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 11 DCOM Digital input common for all I 4312 DH Start Stop Activate to start drive I 4113 DI2 Run permissive Deactivate to stop drive P 1601 I 3414 DI3 Timer Override Activate to start drive I 3415 DI4 Safety interlock1 Deactivate to stop drive P 1608 L 7 16 DI5 Safety interlock2 Deactivate to stop drive P 1609 XQ1BrzTROiC Relay output 1 P 1401 18 RO1A x Default operation Started gt 17 connected to 19 19 RO1B 20 DOSRC Digital output max 100 mA P 1805 21 DOOUT pt No fault Fault 1 gt 20 connected to 22 22 DOGND Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9902 applic macro 9 INT TIMER CS 3416 signal 3 min 200 0 1002 ext2 commands 0 NOT SEL 3417 signal 3 max 200 0 1103 refi sel 0 KEYPAD 3419 output 3 dsp unit 4 96 1106 ref3 sel 2 Ai2 3420 output 3 min 200 0 1201 const speed sel 15 TIMER1 3421 output 3 max 200 0 1301 minimum ai 0 096 3622 boost sel 3 DI3 1401 relay output 1 7 STARTED 4001 gain 1 0 1601 run enable 2 D12 4002 integration time 60 0s 1609 start enable 2 5 D15 4101 gain 1 0 3207 superv 3 param 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 4102 integration time 60 0s 3415 signal 3 param 0105 TORQUE 4110 setpoint sel 1 A1 B Floating Point Start Up 85 This application macro is for applications where speed reference needs
137. 3 only with MREL 01 1404 RO 1 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s Dis 0 0s Defines the switch on delay for relay 1 Control event Aoo ee On off delays are ignored when relay output 1401 is set to PFA Relay status gu F Ae Gd 1404 ON DELAY 1405 OFF DELAY 1405 RO1 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0 s Defines the switch off delay for relay 1 On off delays are ignored when relay output 1401 is set to PFA 1406 RO 2 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0 s Defines the switch on delay for relay 2 See RO 1 ON DELAY 1407 RO 2 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s Dis 0 0s Defines the switch on delay for relay 2 See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1408 RO 3 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0 s Defines the switch on delay for relay 3 See RO 1 ON DELAY 1409 RO 3 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s Dis 0 0s Switch off delay for relay 3 See RO 1 OFF DELAY 156 Actual signals and parameters Group 14 Relay Outputs Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1410 RELAY OUTPUT A 0 45 See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1 0 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 4 what relay output 4 means Defines the switch off delay for relay 4 See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1413 RO 4 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s Defines the switch on delay for relay 4 See RO 1 ON DELAY 1414 RO 4 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0 s E Group 15 Analog Outputs This group defines the drive s analog current signal outputs The drive
138. 3009 bit 15 2033 INLET VERY LOW Pressure at pump fan Check for a closed valve on the inlet 0310 bit 0 inlet too low side of the pump fan Check piping for leaks See parameter Group 44 Pump Protection 2034 OUTLET VERY Pressure at pump fan Check piping for blocks HIGH outlet too high See parameter Group 44 Pump 0310 bit 1 Protection 1 Even when the relay output is configured to indicate alarm conditions eg parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 5 ALARM or 16 FLT ALARM this alarm is not indicated by a relay output Fault tracing 333 Alarms generated by the Basic Control Panel The Basic Control Panel indicates Control Panel alarms with a code A5xxx ALARM CODE CAUSE WHAT TO DO 5001 Drive is not responding Check panel connection 5002 Incompatible Contact your local ABB representative communication profile 5010 Corrupted panel parameter Retry parameter upload backup file Retry parameter download 5011 Drive is controlled from Change drive control to local control mode another source 5012 Direction of rotation is Enable change of direction See parameter locked 1003 DIRECTION 5013 Panel control is disabled Start from the panel is not possible Reset the because start inhibit is emergency stop command or remove the 3 wire active stop command before starting from the panel See parameters 1007 EXT1 COMMANDS 1002 EX
139. 3709 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2 300 Defines the torque value of the second overload curve definition point 3710 LOAD FREQ 3 43 Hz Defines the frequency value of the third load curve definition point 3711 LOAD TORQ LOW 3 2596 Defines the torque value of the third underload curve definition point Must be smaller than 3712 LOAD TORQ HIGH 3 3712 LOAD TORQ HIGH 3 300 Defines the torque value of the third overload curve definition point 3713 LOAD FREQ A 50 Hz Defines the frequency value of the fourth load curve definition point 3714 LOAD TORQ LOW 4 30 Defines the torque value of the fourth underload curve definition point Must be smaller than 3715 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4 3715 LOAD TORQ HIGH A 300 Defines the torque overvalue of the fourth load curve definition point 3716 LOAD FREQ 5 500 Hz Defines the frequency value of fifth load curve definition point 3717 LOAD TORQ LOW 5 30 Defines the torque value of the fifth underload curve definition point Must be smaller than 3718 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5 3718 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5 300 Defines the torque value of the fifth overload curve definition point Actual signals and parameters 203 B Group 40 Process PID Set 1 This group defines a set of parameters used with the Process PID PID1 controller Typically only parameters in this group are needed PID Controller Basic Set up In PID control mode the drive compares a reference signal setpoint to an actual signal feed
140. 4 121 71 42 03x 34A1 4 350 1195 33 4 114 57 8 197 96 57 03x 41A8 4 440 1503 33 4 114 57 8 197 96 57 03x 48A4 4 530 1810 33 4 114 57 8 197 96 57 00578903 xls D 354 Technical data E Noise Frame Noise level size dBA RO lt 30 R1 50 62 R2 50 62 R3 50 62 R4 lt 62 00578903 xls D Terminal and lead through data for the power cables Frame Max cable U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 PE size diameter for NEMA 1 U1 V1 W1 Max terminal size Tightening Max clamp size Tightening U2 V2 W2 flexible rigid torque solid or stranded torque mm i mm N m Ibf in mm AWG Nm Ibfin RO 16 0 63 4 0 6 0 10 0 8 7 25 3 1 2 11 R1 16 0 63 4 0 6 0 10 0 8 7 25 3 1 2 11 R2 16 0 63 4 0 6 0 10 0 8 7 25 3 1 2 11 R3 29 1 14 10 0 16 0 6 1 7 15 25 3 1 2 11 R4 35 1 38 25 0 35 0 2 2 5 22 25 3 1 2 11 00578903 xls D Terminal and lead through data for the control cables Conductor size Tightening Solid or stranded Stranded with ferrule Stranded with ferrule toraue without plastic sleeve with plastic sleeve Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max mm mm mm AWG Nm tin 0 14 1 5 26 16 0 25 1 5 23 16 0 25 1 5 23 16 0 4 3 5 Technical data 355 Electric power network specification Voltage U41 Short circuit capacity Frequency Imbalance 200 208 220 230 240 V AC 3 phase for 200 V AC drives 380 400 415
141. 4 selectable speeds i e constant speeds 1 2 3 and 4 1 EXT CS1 2 3 Selects an external speed when no timer is active selects Constant speed 1 when Timer 1 is active Selects Constant speed 2 when Timer 2 is active and selects Constant speed 3 when both Timers 1 and 2 are active TIMER1 TIMER2 Function 0 0 External reference 1 0 Constant speed 1 1202 0 1 Constant speed 2 1203 1 1 Constant speed 3 1204 2 CS1 2 3 4 Selects Constant speed 1 when no timer is active selects Constant speed 2 when Timer 1 is active selects Constant speed 3 when Timer 2 is active selects Constant speed 4 when both timers are active TIMER1 TIMER2 Function 0 0 Constant speed 1 1202 1 0 Constant speed 2 1203 0 1 Constant speed 3 1204 1 1 Constant speed 4 1205 152 Actual signals and parameters E Group 13 Analog Inputs This group defines the limits and the filtering for analog inputs Group 13 Analog Inputs Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1301 MINIMUM Al1 0 0 100 0 0 1 20 0 Defines the minimum value of the analog input Define value as a percent of the full analog signal range See example below The minimum analog input signal corresponds to 1104 REF1 MIN or 1107 REF2 MIN MINIMUM AI cannot be greater than MAXIMUM Al These parameters reference and analog min and max settings provide scale and offset adj
142. 4114 for the PFA frequency reference The figure shows the relation between the control signal 4014 FBK SEL OR 4114 and the speed regulated motor s frequency in a three motor system P 4014 Y Actual signals and parameters 253 Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution Default S Example In the diagram below the pumping station s outlet flow is controlled by the measured inlet flow A 3 Contactors Mains 3 ACS320 Outlet Pipe2 Inlet Pipe Outlet Pipe3 8122 PFA START DELAY 0 00 10 00 s 0 01 s 0 50 s Sets the start delay for speed regulated motors in the system Using the delay the drive works as follows Switches on the contactor of the speed regulated motor connecting the motor to the ACH550 power output Delays motor start for the time 8122 PFA START DELAY Starts the speed regulated motor Starts auxiliary motors See parameter 8115 for delay Warning Motors equipped with star delta starters require a PFA Start Delay After the ACH550 relay output switches a motor On the star delta starter must Switch to the star connection and then back to the delta connection before the drive applies power So the PFA Start Delay must be longer than the time setting of the star delta starter 8123 PFA ENABLE 0 1 0 Y Sets the start delay for speed regulated motors in the system Using the delay the drive works as
143. 440 460 480 V AC 3 phase for 400 V AC drives 10 variation from converter nominal voltage is allowed as default Maximum allowed prospective short circuit current at the input power connection as defined in IEC 60439 1 is 100 kA The drive is suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 kA rms symmetrical amperes at the drive maximum rated voltage 50 60 Hz 5 maximum rate of change 17 s Max 3 of nominal phase to phase input voltage Motor connection data Voltage U gt Short circuit protection IEC 61800 5 1 UL 508C Frequency Frequency resolution Current Power limit Field weakening point Switching frequency Maximum recommended motor cable length 0 to U4 3 phase symmetrical Umax at the field weakening point The motor output is short circuit proof by IEC 61800 5 1 and UL 508C 0 500 Hz 0 01 Hz See section Ratings on page 349 1 5 PN 10 500 Hz 4 8 12 or 16 kHz R0 30 m 100 ft R1 R4 50 m 165 ft With output chokes Wu motor cable length may be extended to 60 m 195 ft for RO and 100 m 330 ft for R1 R4 To comply with the European EMC Directive use the cable lengths specified in the table below for 4 kHz switching frequency The lengths are given for using the drive with the internal EMC filter or an optional external EMC filter 4 kHz switching Internal EMC filter Optional external frequency EMC filter Second E nt 30 m 100 ft 30 m 100
144. 4403 AIIN LOW LEVEL 0 00 100 00 1 0 01 0 00 Sets the supervision limit for the primary inlet pressure measurement If the value of the selected input falls below this limit the action defined by parameter 4407 INLET PROT CTRL is taken after the delay set by parameter 4407 INLET CTRL DLY expires The range corresponds to 0 10 V or 0 20 mA on the analog input With a bipolar input the absolute input value is considered 4404 VERY LOW CTRL NOT SEL Enables and selects the mode of the secondary inlet pressure supervision function The function uses the analog input selected by parameter 4402 Al MEASURE INLET NOT SEL 0 Secondary inlet pressure supervision not used STOP 1 Detection of very low inlet pressure stops the drive The drive will start again if the pressure exceeds the supervision level FAULT 2 Detection of very low inlet pressure trips the drive on a fault 4405 AIIN VERY LOW 0 00 100 00 1 0 01 0 00 Supervision level for the secondary inlet pressure monitoring function See parameter 4401 INLET PROT CTRL Supervision level 4406 DI STATUS INLET NOT SEL Selects the digital input for connection of a pressure switch at the pump fan inlet The normal state is 1 active If the selected input switches to 0 inactive the action defined by parameter 4407 INLET PROT CTRL is executed after the delay set by parameter 4407 INLET CTRL DLY expires NOT SEL 0 No digital input selected DH 1 Pump fan inlet pressure monit
145. 5 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5314 to select using 5314 Select an actual value for this register Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 313 Modbus Register Access Remarks 40010 Actual 6 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5315 to select using 5315 select an actual value for this register 40011 Actual 7 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5316 to select using 5316 select an actual value for this register 40012 Actual 8 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5317 to select using 5317 select an actual value for this register 40031 ACS320 R W Maps directly to the Least Significant Word of the CONTROL WORD LSW DCU profile s CONTROL WORD Supported only if 5305 1 See parameter 0301 40032 ACS320 R Maps directly to the Most Significant Word of the CONTROL WORD DCU profile s CONTROL WORD Supported only if MSW 5305 1 See parameter 0302 40033 ACS320 R Maps directly to the Least Significant Word of the STATUS WORD LSW DCU profile s CONTROL WORD Supported only if 5305 1 See parameter 0303 40034 ACS320 R Maps directly to the Most Significant Word of the STATUS WORD MSW DCU profile s CONTROL WORD Supported only if 5305 1 See parameter 0304 For the Modbus protocol drive parameters in group 53 report the parameter mapping to 4xxxx Registers Code Description 5310 EFB PAR 10 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modb
146. 7 MOTOR NOM FREQ 4603 REV STEP 0 0 100 0 1 0 1 0 0 Defines the reverse step frequency for the pump cleaning sequence in percent of the nominal motor frequency parameter 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ 4604 OFF TIME 0 0 1000 0 s 120 1s 0 0 s Defines the length of the interval between forward and reverse steps in the pump cleaning sequence in seconds 4605 FWD TIME 0 0 1000 0 s 120 1s 0 0s Defines the duration of each forward step in the pump cleaning sequence in seconds 4606 REV TIME 0 0 1000 0 s 120 1s 0 0s Defines the duration of each reverse step in the pump cleaning sequence in seconds 4607 TRIG TIME 0 0 200 0 h 1 0 1h 0 0h Defines the time for setting TIMER TRIG of parameter 4607 PUMP CLEAN TRIG 4608 COUNT 0 100 1 1 0 Number of steps to be performed in the pump cleaning sequence B Group 52 Panel Communication This group defines the communication settings for the control panel port on the drive Normally when using the supplied control panel there is no need to change settings in this group In this group parameter modifications take effect on the next power up Group 52 Panel Communication Code Description Range Resolution Default S 5201 STATION ID 1 247 1 1 Defines the address of the drive Two units with the same address are not allowed on line Range 1 247 Actual signals and parameters 233 Group 52 Panel Communication
147. 9 COMM Al1 Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 10 comm Ali Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 11 DI3U 4D RNC Same as DI3uU 4D R above except that Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC to REM does not copy the reference 12 DISU 4D NC Same as DI3U 4D above except that Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC to REM does not copy the reference 13 DI5U 6D NC Same as DI3U 4D above except that Changing the control source EXT to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC to REM does not copy the reference 14 Al1 A12 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 15 Ald AI2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 Al2 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 16 Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 17 AI AI2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 146 Actual signals and parameters Group 11 Reference Select
148. 9 780 7 245 197 7 330 095 D510 319 D541 7438 D541 744S 5 532 568 5 952 613 6 252 436 6 396 236 6 774 758 6 956 352 6 992 908 7 059 390 7 164 562 7 250 739 7 349 814 D510 320 5 589 754 6 094 364 6 265 724 6 448 735 6 844 794 6 958 923 6 999 329 7 067 997 7 176 779 7 262 577 7 352 220 D511 137 D541 745S 5 612 604 6 147 887 6 305 464 6 498 452 6 856 502 6 967 453 7 023 160 7 082 374 7 190 599 7 271 505 7 365 622 D511 150 D548 182S Dimension drawings 363 Dimension drawings Dimension drawings of the ACS320 are shown below The dimensions are given in millimeters and inches 364 Dimension drawings Frame sizes RO and R1 IP20 cabinet installation UL open R1 and RO are identical except for the fan at the top of R1 VT DIN rail x Om EC ECH C3 Frame sizes RO and R1 IP20 cabinet installation UL open O A ewe cg ca A AN a Loo g 3AUA0000050967 A Dimension drawings 365 Frame sizes RO and R1 IP20 NEMA 1 R1 and RO are identical except for the fan at the top of R1 Frame sizes R0 and H1 IP20
149. 902 applic macro 14 HAND CONTROL 3415 signal 3 param 100 NOT SEL 1001 exti commands D NOT SEL 3416 signal 3 min 1002 ext2 commands D NOT SEL 3417 signal 3 max 1106 ref3 sel 2 A2 3418 output 3 dsp form 1201 const speed sel 0 NOT SEL 3419 output 3 dsp unit 1301 minimum ai1 0 096 3420 output 3 min 1304 minimum ai2 0 096 3421 output 3 max 1401 relay output 1 7 STARTED 4001 gain 1 0 1504 minimum ao1 0 0mA 4002 integration time 60 0s 1510 minimum ao2 0 0mA 4010 setpoint sel 1 Alt 1601 run enable 2 DI2 4101 gain 1 0 1608 start enable 1 D NOT SEL 4102 integration time 60 0s 2108 start inhibit 1 ON 4110 setpoint sel 1 all 3207 superv 3 param 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 4210 setpoint sel 1 Ai 90 Program features Program features What this chapter contains The chapter describes program features For each feature there is a list of related user settings actual signals and fault and alarm messages Start up Assistant B Introduction The Start up Assistant requires the Assistant Control Panel guides the user through the start up procedure helping to enter the requested data parameter values to the drive The Start up Assistant also checks that the entered values are valid ie within the allowed range The Start up Assistant calls other assistants each of which guides the user through the task of specifying a related parameter set At the first start the drive sugge
150. A Supply Fan nicis rure E esci aed epa Rd PRG PCIE Dre Ra RE cu Return Fan MERERETUR Cooling Tower FAN uu ok rete DOE EXER r Ee acer EE E EE Per EOI E oeren ee E ETETEN EE ates EEEE Booster PUMP issu iu hh mehr dene een ene SER RE EXER AER E PFC Control MACIO 3 gien EE EE ebe e ag ead i RC oman Default VO connections oe rra siae ele ku Rye RR Rr ANNE Rh exa Internal Timer uk ren ARE ed E ead a NERO eee Re goed tion qusc Internal Timer with Constant Speeds PRV 84 Floating Pont 4 212r ea gli Marae ihe eae ete dale d cx de CO ERR INE 85 Dual Setpoint with PID lssseleeeee RR IRI 86 Dual Setpoint with PID and Constant Speeds 00 00 c cece eee eee 87 cue 88 Hand Control usar ERREGA UR HECESURRSA EROS DE au deed IR RET PE NA 89 9 Program features What this chapter contains 4 crei e etm rh hh y eg Re 90 Start up Assistant 90 Introductionis iiome Debra ter Sr yRhebv er eels RAD Deis 90 List of the tasks and the relevant drive parameters 91 Contents of the assistant displays 0 0 0c ccc eee ese 93 Local control vs external contra 93 Local control icula vow beth er Merb RE Ends Mba ois he ee Eus 94 External control icc 20 pe Sage EE RP PEPRe enr head ay gaa Dea qs 94 SENINGS MIR 94 Diagnostics i acit no Sorge eR cad tebe eve Eid av ta dd ee oem E ede aaa mes 95 8 Table of contentis Block diagram Start stop direction source for EST 95 Block diagram Reference s
151. A x Default operation Started gt 17 connected to 19 19 RO1B 20 DOSRC Digital output max 100 mA P 1805 21 DOOUT e No fault Fault 1 gt 20 connected to 22 22 DOGND Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9902 applic macro 3 RETURNFAN 3207 superv 3 param 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 1401 relay output 1 7 STARTED 4001 gain 0 7 1601 run enable 2 D12 4002 integration time 10 0 s 1609 start enable 2 5 D15 4101 gain 1 0 2202 acceler time 1 15 0 s 4102 integration time 60 0 s 2203 deceler time 1 15 0 s B Cooling Tower Fan Start Up 79 This macro configures for cooling tower fan applications where the fan speed is controlled according to the signals received from a transducer When using direct speed reference in AUTO mode or process PID see General Considerations on page 73 aes 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen 2 JA External reference 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC O 5 JAl2 PID feedback 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common 7 AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA UJ 8 AGND Analog output circuit common 9 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC r 110 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 11 DCOM Digital input common for all
152. ABB DRV LIM This profile is based on the PROFIBUS interface and is discussed in detail in the following sections Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 309 DCU PROFILE Another profile is called the DCU PROFILE profile It extends the control and status interface to 32 bits and is the internal interface between the main drive application and the embedded fieldbus environment ABB DRV FULL This profile is also based on the PROFIBUS interface and supports two control word bits not supported by the ABB DRV LIM profile B Modbus Addressing With Modbus each function code implies access to a specific Modbus reference set Thus the leading digit is not included in the address field of a Modbus message Note The ACS320 supports the zero based addressing of the Modbus specification Holding register 40002 is addressed as 0001 in a Modbus message Similarly coil 33 is addressed as 0032 in a Modbus message Refer again to the Mapping Summary above The following sections describe in detail the mapping to each Modbus reference set Oxxxx Mapping Modbus Coils The drive maps the following information to the Oxxxx Modbus set called Modbus Coils Bit wise map of the CONTROL WORD selected using parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE The first 32 coils are reserved for this purpose Relay output states numbered sequentially beginning with coil 00033 The following table summarizes the Oxxxx reference set
153. ACS320 User s Manual ACS320 Drives 0 5 to 30 Hp List of related manuals DRIVE MANUALS Document Number ACS310 User s Manual 3AUA0000044201 OPTION MANUALS Document Number MFDT 01 FlashDrop User s Manual SAFE68591074 MREL 01 Relay Output Extension Module User s Manual for ACS310 3AUA0000035974 ACS320 ACS350 esie Installation Instructions for ACS150 ACS310 ACS320 and 3AFE68642868 ACS350 MOLID Installation Instructions for ACS150 ACS310 ACS320 and 3AFE68643147 ACS350 MUL1 R4 Installation Instructions for ACS320 and ACS350 3AUA0000025916 SREA 01 Ethernet Adapter Module Quick Start up Guide 3AUA0000042902 SREA 01 Ethernet Adapter Module User s Manual 3AUA0000042896 MAINTENANCE MANUALS Document Number Guide for Capacitor Reforming in ACS50 ACS55 ACS150 ACS310 3AFE68735190 ACS320 ACS350 ACS550 and ACH550 All manuals are available in PDF format on the Internet at www abbnow com BACnet is a registered trademark of ASHRAE CANopen is a registered trademark of CAN in Automation e V ControlNet is a registered trademark of ControlNet International DeviceNet is a registered trademark of Open DeviceNet Vendor Association DRIVECOM is a registered trademark of DRIVECOM User Organization Interbus is a registered trademark of Interbus Club LonWorks is a registered trademark of Echelon Corp Metasys is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls Inc Modbus and Modbus Plus are registered trademarks of Schneid
154. ACnet Protocol Revision 2 Product Description The ACS320 is a high performance adjustable frequency drive specifically designed for commercial automation applications This product supports native BACnet connecting directly to the MS TP LAN All standard MS TP baud rates are supported as well as master mode functionality Over BACnet the drive can be fully controlled as a standard adjustable frequency drive In addition up to 16 configurable UO ports are available over BACnet for user applications BACnet Standardized Device Profile Annex L O BACnet Operator Workstation B OWS O BACnet Building Controller B BC O BACnet Advanced Application Controller B AAC BACnet Application Specific Controller B ASC O BACnet Smart Sensor B SS O BACnet Smart Actuator B SA List all BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks Supported Annex K DS RP B DS WP B DM DDB B DM DOB B DM DCC B DM RD B Segmentation Capability O Segmented requests supported Window Size O Segmented responses supported Window Size Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 305 BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement Standard Object Types See table at Object Property Support Matrix on page Supported 306 An object type is supported if it may be present in the device For each standard Object Type supported provide the following data 1 Whether objects of this type are dynamically creat
155. AE E A Ea 119 El ER ME 119 User load Cue 21 erem n RE Rx rhy Dede wae tee ea ER RR e 120 Settings og dead ee te hens pire Madera due DER da TR WP ERda d Nd NEIN I 120 BIagiostieS russare at ac E erect dodo 0o ide RoR Ga ame ip bag Senta eda ded rau E dia E RE Pati sedge 120 Energy optitilzel uite x aret dece oe et p dred wed wa Oboe d Sege Feeder d 121 STEMS CREME rr EE 121 DiaQnOstiCs PC TTTTTT 121 Pump cleaning ssa rhe nene n enm kr hr REIR ODES PEET Rae ER EE 121 Settiigs EE EE 122 Load atialyzet xxt no better c i EC Roe ecce bob eda ol ed e edet ad 122 el x MET 122 ele le 122 PFC Control Requires use of MREL 01 option purchased Separately 123 PEG COMmtrl 2 sss SES geed EE Ge gg geet 123 10 Table of contents Settings 2 4 darent abd nte PR COR p PE da a 124 Diagnostics i e e hh EELER EN AEN ERE EE PRESE CR RETE neue a 124 10 Actual signals and parameters What this chapter contains lllleelee III Ih 125 Terms and abbreviations cece eee heh he hes 125 Fieldbus equivaletlt 2 0 x ee Y hx Up RO EE EE YR Re 126 Actual signals in the short parameter view 126 04 FAULT HISTORY EN d REEL vh bre bp perd harte 126 Parameters in the short parameter view 126 1T REFERENCE SELECT 2 4 x RR renee dA ihai a paia ea Ea 126 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS aiino n rrt e deli EE donee teo e en 126 19 ANALOG INPUTS Seet EES hem m RR RR RU Run SIS RUBORE nn 126 T4 R
156. AO4 DECEL TIME 1 2203 10 S 0 1 1800 AO5 CURRENT LIMIT 2003 10 A 0 1 3 lon AO6 PID1 CONT GAIN 4001 10 0 1 100 AO7 PID1 CONT I TIME 4002 10 0 1 600 AO8 PID1 CONT D TIME 4003 10 0 10 AO9 PID1 CONT D FILTER 4004 10 0 10 AO10 PID2 CONT GAIN 4101 10 96 0 1 100 AO11 PID2 CONT I TIME 4102 10 S 0 1 600 AO12 PID2 CONT D TIME 4103 10 S 0 10 AO13 PID2 CONT D FILTER 4104 10 S 0 10 AO14 COMMAND AO 1 135 10 K 0 100 AO16 EXT PID SETPOINT 4211 10 96 0 100 AO17 SPD OUT MIN 2001 2007 10 K D 200 AO18 SPD OUT MAX 2002 2008 10 K D 200 A019 MAILBOX PARAMETER 1 0 65535 A020 MAILBOX DATA 1 0 65535 280 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus B N2 Binary Output Objects The following table lists the N2 Binary Output objects defined for the ACS320 drive N2 Binary Outputs Number Object Drive Parameter Range BO1 STOP START Command Word 0 Stop 1 Start to Speed BO2 FORWARD REVERSE Command Word 0 Forward 1 Reverse BO3 PANEL LOCK Command Word 0 Open 1 Locked BO4 RUN ENABLE Command Word 0 Enable 1 Disable BO5 REF1 REF2 SELECT Command Word 0 Refi 1 Ref2 BO6 FAULT RESET Command Word Change 0 gt 1 Resets BO7 COMMAND RO 1 134 bit mask 01 0 Off 1 On BO8 COMMAND RO 2 134 bit mask 02 0 Off 1 On BO9 COMMAND RO 3 134 bit mask 04 0 Off 1 On BO10 COMMAND RO 4 134 bit mask 08 0
157. Application Macros on page 72 Use the macro that best fits system needs 2 Edit parameter 9902 to select the appropriate macro Use either of the following e Use the Start up Assistant which displays the macro selection immediately after motor parameter setup Referto Parameters Mode on page 61 for parameter editing instructions Turning Parameters The system can benefit from one or more of the ACS320 special features and or fine tuning 1 Review the parameter descriptions in ParameterDescriptions starting on page 61 Enable options and fine tune parameter values as appropriate for the system 2 Edit parameters as appropriate Fault and Alarm Adjustments The ACS320 can detect a wide variety of potential system problems For example initial system operation may generate faults of alarms that indicate set up problems 1 Faults and alarms are reported on the control panel with a number Note the number reported 2 Review the description provided for the reported fault alarm Use the fault and alarm listings shown in Chapter 12 Fault tracing on 328 Pressthe help key Assistant Control Panel only while fault or alarm is displayed 3 Adjust the system or parameters as appropriate 56 Start Up Start Up Start Up can be performed in two ways Using the Start Up Assistant Changing the parameters individually E Start Up by Using the Start Up Assistant To start the Start Up Assistant follow
158. B 20 DOSRC Digital output max 100 mA P 1805 21 DOOUT ae No fault Fault 1 gt 20 connected to 22 22 DOGND Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9902 applic macro 8 INT TIMER 1609 start enable 2 5 DI5 1001 exti commands 11 TIMER1 3207 superv 3 param 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 1002 ext2 commands 11 TIMER1 3601 timers enable 1 D11 1201 const speed sel D NOT SEL 3622 boost sel 3 DI3 1401 relay output 1 7 STARTED 3626 timer 1 src 23 B P3 P2 P1 1601 run enable 2 D12 84 Start Up B Internal Timer with Constant Speeds PRV This macro configures for applications such as a timed powered roof ventilator PRV which alternates between two constant speeds constant speed 1 and 2 based on a built in timer Momentarily activating digital input 3 DI3 provides a boost function which operates the motor See group 36 Timer Functions for more information on setting up timers X1 A 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen 2 Alt External reference 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC QO 5 AI2 PID feedback 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common lt er 7 AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA 8 AGND Analog output circuit common 9
159. B Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 1001 1002 EXT1 EXT2 start stop according to supervision functions 1401 Supervision status through RO 1 1402 1403 1410 Supervision status through RO 2 4 With option MREL 01 only 1805 Supervision status through DO 4022 4122 Sleep start according to supervision functions 4601 Pump clean trigger according to supervision functions 110 Program features Parameter lock The user can prevent parameter adjustment by activating the parameter lock B Settings Parameters 7602 PARAMETER LOCK and 7603 PASS CODE PID control There are two built in PID controllers in the drive Process PID PID1 and External Trim PID PID2 The PID controller can be used when the motor speed needs to be controlled based on process variables such as pressure flow or temperature When the PID control is activated a process reference setpoint is connected to the drive instead of a speed reference An actual value process feedback is also brought back to the drive The drive compares the reference and the actual values and automatically adjusts the drive speed in order to keep the measured process quantity actual value at the desired level reference The control operates on a 2 ms time level B Process controller PID1 PID1 has two separate sets of parameters Group 40 Process PID Set 1 Group 41 Process PID Set 2 Selection between parameter sets 1 and
160. CK Each host FLN application e g CIS or Insight i6 LA PRCPID DEV EE 50 LAO PRC PID GAIN 51 LAO PRC PID ITIM 52 LAO PRC PID DTIM 53 LAO PRC PID DFIL 54 LDO PRC PID SEL 60 LAO INPUT REF1 61 LAO INPUT REES 82 LAI AI 1 ACTUAL 83 LAI Al2 ACTUAL 84 LAI AO 1 ACTUAL External PID FLN External PID Report Poing Subpoint Name Data Type 55 LAO EXT PID GAIN 56 LAO EXT PID ITIM 57 LAO EXT PID DTIM Each host FLN application e g CIS or Insight controls both the particular data reported for each point and the report format 286 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus FLN External PID Report Point Subpoint Name Data Type 58 LAO EXT PID DFIL 62 LAO EXT PID STPT 63 LA EXT PID FBCK 64 LAI EXT PID DEV 82 LA Al1 ACTUAL 83 LAI AI2 ACTUAL 84 LA AO 1 ACTUAL B Scaling Drive Feedback Values Feedback values are provided with units of percent where 0 and 100 correspond to the range of the sensor being used to measure the control variable These points have default units in Hz If other units are required Unbundle these points with appropriate slopes and intercepts The new intercept equals the lowest value of the desired range Calculate the new slope as follows Desired Range i e high low values x Slope of Existing Point New Slope Range of Existing Point 60 Hz 0 Hz x 0
161. CW Bit0 0 gt fe aci OS SWITCH ON SW Bito 0 CW Bit3 0 CW Xxxx xxxx xxxx x110 OPERATION READY TO SW Bit2 0 INHIBITED SWITCH ON SW Bit0 1 CW oxx xxxx xxxx x111 gt C D READY TO m OPERATE SW Bit1 1 CW Bit5 0 CW Bit3 1 and SW Bit 2 1 L2 OPERATION D ENABLED SW Bit2 1 CW Bit6 0 CW Bit5 1 KEY State RFG UE um CW CONTROL WORD SW STATUS WORD waa Path described in CW Bit6 1 example Param 0104 CURRENT OPERATING SW Bit8 1 f Param 0103 OUTPUT FREQ This state transition also occurs if the fault is reset from any other source e g digital input 324 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus E Reference Scaling ABB Drives and DCU Profiles The following table describes REFERENCE scaling for the ABB Drives profile ABB Drives and DCU Profiles Reference i Reference Range Type Scaling Remarks REF1 32767 Speed or 20000 par 1105 Final reference limited by Wi frequency 0 0 1104 1105 Actual motor 32767 20000 par 1105 speed limited by 2001 2002 20000 corresponds to Speed or 2007 2008 100 frequency REF2 32767 Speed or 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by oe frequency 0 0 1107 1108 Actual motor 32767 10000 par 1108 speed limited by 2001 2002 10000 corresponds to Speed or 2007 2008 100 frequency Torque 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by 0 0 2015 2017 torque1 or
162. Comm setup This parameter sets the BACnet Device Object Max Info Frames Property 5313 EFB PAR13 Not used for Comm setup This parameter sets the BACnet Device Object Max Master Property 5314 EFB PAR14 Not used for Comm setup 5315 EFB PAR15 Not used for Comm setup 5316 EFB PAR 16 Not used for Comm setup This parameter indicates the count of MS TP tokens passed to this drive 5317 EFB PAR17 This parameter works with parameter 5311 to set BACnet Device Object Instance IDs See parameter 5311 Note After any changes to the communication settings protocol must be reactivated by either cycling the drive power or by clearing and then restoring the station Id 5302 or use Reinitialize Device Service Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 265 Activate Drive Control Functions EFB B Controlling the Drive Fieldbus control of various drive functions requires configuration to Tell the drive to accept fieldbus control of the function Define as a fieldbus input any drive data required for control Define as a fieldbus output any control data required by the drive The following sections describe at a general level the configuration required for each control function For the protocol specific details see the document supplied with the FBA module E Start Stop Direction Control Using the fieldbus for start stop direction
163. Control Panel can store a full set of drive parameters The Par Backup mode has these functions Upload to Panel Copies all parameters from the drive to the Control Panel This includes user sets of parameters if defined and internal parameters such as those created by the Motor Id Run The Control Panel memory is non volatile and does not depend on the panel s battery To upload parameters to control panel follow these steps Select MENU to enter the main menu WI Select PAR BACKUP with the UP DOWN buttons and select ENTER 2 NEU Scroll to Upload to Panel and select SEL The text Copying parameters and a progress diagram is Ce displayed Select ABORT if you 4 want to stop the process d 66 Start Up The text Parameter upload successful is displayed and the T control panel returns to the PAR BACKUP menu Select EXIT to return to the main menu Now you can disconnect the panel Download Full Set Restores the full parameter set from the Control Panel to the drive Use this option to restore a drive or to configure identical drives This download does not include user sets of parameters To download all parameters to drive follow these steps Select MENU to enter the menu WE 1 Select PAR BACKUP with the UP DOWN buttons C 2 NE Scroll to Download to drive all and select SEL 3 The text restori
164. D DERIV FILTER 0 0 NOT SEL Disables the error D part of controller outout derivative part of the PID controller PID output P P output Gain _ 0 1 10 0 Derivation time seconds P 401 t e r P4003 ki 4004 PID DERIV FILTER 0 0 10 0 s Dis 0 1s Defines the filter time constant for the error derivative part of the PID controller output Before being added to the PID controller output the error derivative is filtered with a 1 pole filter Increasing the filter time smooths the error derivative reducing noise 0 0 NOT SEL Disables the error derivative filter 0 1 10 0 Filter time constant seconds Actual signals and parameters 207 Group 40 Process PID Set 1 Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4005 ERROR VALUE INV 0 1 0 Selects either a normal or inverted relationship between the feedback signal and the drive speed 0 Ter Normal a decrease in feedback signal increases drive speed Error Ref 1 2 ss Inverted a decrease in feedback signal decreases drive speed Error Fbk e 4006 UNITS 0 31 4 Selects the unit for the PID controller actual values PID1 parameters 0128 0130 and 0132 See parameter 3405 for list of available units 4007 UNIT SCALE 0 4 1 1 Defines the decimal point location in PID 7 controller actual values 4007 Value Entry Display Enter the decimal point location counting i
165. D Analog output circuit common 9 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC max 200 mA 10 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 11 DCOM Digital input common 412 Ip Stop 0 Start 1 peres 13 DI2 Not Configured L144 DIB Constant speed selection hs TD Safety Interlock L 16 DI5 Not Configured X1B 17 ROCOM Relay output 1 18 RONC Default operation Ready a ho Rono 20 DOSRC Digital output max 100 mA e 21 DOOUT No fault Fault 1 22 DOGND 1 See parameter Group 12 Constant Speeds DI3 Operation parameter 0 Get speed through Al1 1 Speed 1 1202 D Speed2 1203 1 Speed 3 1204 50 Electrical installation E Connection procedure 1 Remove the terminal cover by simultaneously pushing the recess and sliding the cover off the frame Digital signals Strip the outer insulation of the digital signal cable 360 degrees and ground the bare shield under the clamp Connect the conductors of the cable to the appropriate terminals Use a tightening torque of 0 4 N m 3 5 in Ib For double shielded cables twist also the grounding conductors of each pair in the cable together and connect the bundle to the SCR terminal terminal 1 Analog signals Strip the outer insulation of the analog signal cable 360 degrees and ground the bare shield under the clamp Connect the conductors to the appropriate terminals U
166. DI4 First PFA Relay DI4 Second PFA Relay DI5 Second PFA Relay DI5 Di5 Free 3 DI1 DI2 Free DI1 DI2 Free DI3 Speed Reg Motor DI3 First PFA Relay DI4 First PFA Relay DI4 Second PFA Relay DI5 Second PFA Relay Di5 Third PFA Relay 4 Not allowed DI1 DI2 Free DI3 First PFA Relay DI4 Second PFA Relay DI5 Third PFA Relay Note MREL 01 required for PFA relays 2 3 and 4 4 DI4 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with D14 to the interlock signal for each PFA relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on The number of PFA relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFA The Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG No PFA Autochange Disabled Autochange Enabled Relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 DI3 Free Not allowed DI4 Speed Reg Motor DI5 DI5 Free 1 DI1 DI3 Free DI1 DI3 Free DI4 Speed Reg Motor DI4 First PFA Relay DIS First PFA Relay DI5 DI5 Free 2 DI1 DI3 Free DI1 DI3 Free DI4 Speed Reg Motor DI4 First PFA Relay DIS First PFA Relay DI5 Second PFA Relay 3 Not allowed DI1 DI3 Free DI4 First PFA Relay DI5 Second PFA Relay 4 Not allowed Not allowed 252 Actual signals and parameters Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution Default S 5 DI5 Enables the Int
167. DI6 5 Two wire Start Stop Direction zlari Stop is through digital input DI6 DI6 activated Start DI6 de activated top Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST is through digital input DI5 DI5 activated Reverse de activated Forward 8 KEYPAD Control Panel Start Stop and Direction commands are through the control panel when EXT1 is active Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST 9 DIE 2R Start Stop Direction commands through DI1 and DI2 combinations Start forward DI1 activated and DI2 de activated Start reverse DI1 de activated and DI2 activated Stop both DU and DI2 activated or both de activated Requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST 10 comm Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start stop and direction commands Bits 0 1 2 of Command Word 1 parameter 0301 activates the start stop and direction commands SeeFieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 11 TIMER 1 Assigns Start Stop control to Timer 1 Timer activated START Timer de activated STOP See Group 36 Timer Functions 12 14 TIMER 2 4 Assigns Start Stop control to Timer 2 4 See Timer Function 1 above 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 0 14 1 1 Y Defines external control location 2 EXT2 the configuration of start stop and direction commands See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS above 142 Actual signal
168. Diagnostics Parameter Additional information 1401 PID sleep function status through RO 1 1402 1403 1410 PID sleep function status through RO 2 4 With option MREL 01 only Alarm Additional information PID SLEEP Sleep mode Motor temperature measurement through the standard I O This section describes the temperature measurement of one motor when the drive I O terminals are used as the connection interface Motor temperature can be measured using PT100 or PTC sensors connected to analog input and output One sensor Three sensors em i An Motor ia AH i s A E O GND GND em 7 r AO d AO g i ia GND GND 10nF li e 3 me I WARNING According to IEC 664 the connection of the motor temperature sensor requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts and the sensor Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creepage distance of 8 mm 400 500 V AC equipment If the assembly does not fulfill the requirement thel O board terminals must be protected against contact and they may not be connected to other equipment or the temperature sensor must be isolated from the I O terminals Program features 117 It is also possible to monitor motor temperature by connecting a PTC sensor and a thermistor relay between
169. ELAY OUTPUTS dE EEN rue epe bibens pe p aoe gee Rae ER RS 126 16 SYSTEM CONTROLS ssssssse esee hh rr 126 PRBIU SEM 126 2A STARTS TOP olore rex Pot gege ined e Sau de ee p Deo Ore ene d 127 22 ACGEL DEGEL tu RUD RM eee Pee RARE pad FEMME 127 99 START UP DATA acces 5 ies dE EIN pb donee PRX oped eb en ee 127 Parameter Descriptions lese hh he hh hn 128 Group 99 Start up Data 21e cte emet RR RUPEE RR Ku d EE 128 Group 01 Operating Data iera rira EES one RR Pe Ree eee 130 Group 03 Actual Signals cis esliea t Ry ee ve eae ee p Rd RR E H 134 Group 04 Fault FIiStOry i seated dan pr etre EE er ddan ape eek 139 Group 10 Start Stop Dir III 140 Group 11 Reference Geet 142 Group 12 Constant Speeds 0 eee eae 148 Group 13 Analog Inputs HN en eee eee eee aes eka gua Reed es ews 152 Group 14 Relay Outputs suu herr eere RE ET RIS ened a 153 Group 15 Analog Outputs 156 Group 16 System Controls 158 Group 17 Override 164 Group 18 Freq In amp Tran Out 167 Group 20 Eimils 2 ore nente rax e ed x ePi PA D Reda 169 Group 21 Star StOp csse e ELE ensued agama te whee RERO E RR 171 Group 22 Accel Decel erroe bre e ERR P Ra ea odora ea y tes 173 Group 25 Critical Speeds RER EEN Eno ipa Reid ERG 175 Group 26 Motor Control 176 Group 29 Maintenance ig 179 Group 30 Fault Functions 180 Group 31 Automatic Reset 184 Group 32 Supervisi
170. ER TIME 1 2206 DECELER TIME 2 0 0 1800 0 s Dis 60 0 s Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for ramp pair 2 See 2003 DECELER TIME 1 2207 RAMP SHAPE 2 0 1000 0 s Dis 0 0 Selects the shape of the acceleration deceleration ramp for ramp pair 2 See 2004 RAMP SHAPE 1 2208 EM DEC TIME 0 0 1800 s Dis 1 0s Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for an emergency See parameter 2109 EM STOP SEL Rampis linear Actual signals and parameters 175 Group 22 Accel Decel Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2209 RAMP INPUT 0 6 6 1 0 Defines control for forcing the ramp input to 0 0 NOT SEL 1 Di Defines digital input DI1 as the control for forcing the ramp input to 0 Activating the digital input forces ramp input to 0 Ramp output will ramp to 0 according to the currently used ramp time after which it will stay at 0 De activating the digital input ramp resumes normal operation 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for forcing the ramp input to 0 See DH above 1 DIT INV Defines an inverted digital input DI as the control for forcing the ramp input to 0 De activating the digital input forces ramp input to 0 Activating the digital input ramp resumes normal operation 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for forcing the ramp function gene
171. H Supervision for the torque dropping below the underload curve or exceeding the overload curve 3702 USER LOAD C 1 2 1 1 FUNC Action wanted during load supervision 1 FAULT A fault is generated when the condition defined by 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than the time set by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 2 ALARM An alarm is generated when the condition defined by 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than half of the time defined by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 20s Defines the time limit for generating a fault Half of this time is used as the limit for generating an alarm 3704 LOAD FREQ 1 5Hz Defines the frequency value of the first curve definition point Must be smaller than 3707 LOAD FREQ 2 3705 LOAD TORQ LOW 1 10 Defines the torque value of the first underload curve definition point Must be smaller than 3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1 3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1 300 Defines the torque value of the first overload curve definition point 202 Actual signals and parameters Group 37 User Load Curve Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3707 LOAD FREQ 2 25 Defines the frequency value of the second curve definition point Must be smaller than 3710 LOAD FREQ 3 3708 LOAD TORQ LOW 2 15 Defines the torque value of the second underload curve definition point Must be smaller than 3709 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2
172. H OUTLET VERY HIGH Pressure at pump fan outlet too high Fault Additional information PAR PFC REF NEG 2007 lt 0 PAR PFC IO 1 Not enough relays parameterized for PFC Conflict between Group 14 Relay Outputs parameter 8117 and parameter 8118 PAR PFC IO 2 Parameter 8127 does not match the PFC motors in Group 14 Relay Outputs and parameter 8118 PAR PFC IO 3 Allocation of a digital input interlock for each PFC motor not possible INLET LOW INLET VERY LOW Pressure at pump fan inlet too low OUTLET HIGH OUTLET VERY HIGH Pressure at pump fan outlet too high Actual signals and parameters 125 Actual signals and parameters What this chapter contains The chapter describes the actual signals and parameters and gives the fieldbus equivalent values for each signal parameter It also contains a table of the default values for the different macros Note When the control panel is in the short parameter view ie when parameter 1611 PARAMETER VIEW is set to 2 SHORT VIEW the control panel only shows a subset of all signals and parameters The list of these signals and parameters starts on page 126 To be able to view all actual signals and parameters set parameter 1611 PARAMETER VIEW to 3 LONG VIEW The descriptions of parameters start on pages 128 Terms and abbreviations Actual signal Signal measured or calculated by the drive Can be monitored by the user No user se
173. ITIM 600 SEC 0 1 0 57 LAO EXT PID DTIM jO SEC 0 1 0 58 LAO EXT PID DFIL 10 SEC 0 1 0 59 LDO LOCKPANEL UNLOCK 1 0 LOCK UNLOCK 60 LAO INPUT REF1 0 PCT 0 1 0 61 LAO INPUT REF2 0 PCT 0 1 0 E 62 LAO EXT PID STPT 0 PCT 0 1 0 63 LAl EXT PID FBCK JO PCT 0 1 0 64 LAl EXT PID DEV 0 PCT 0 1 0 66 LDO SPDOUTMIN JO PCT 0 1 0 E 67 LDO SPD OUT MAX 1000 PCT 0 1 0 68 LDO FLN LOC CTL AUTO 1 0 FLN AUTO 69 LDO FLNLOC REF AUTO 1 0 FLN AUTO 70 LDI DI 1 ACTUAL OFF 1 0 ON OFF 71 LDI DI 2 ACTUAL OFF 1 0 ON OFF 72 LDI DI 3 ACTUAL OFF 1 0 ON OFF 73 LDI DI 4 ACTUAL OFF 1 0 ON OFF 74 LDI DI 5 ACTUAL OFF 1 0 ON OFF 76 LDI RO1 ACTUAL OFF 1 0 ON OFF 77 ILDI RO2ACTUAL OFF 1 0 ON OFF 78 LDI RO3 ACTUAL OFF 1 0 ON OFF 79 ILDI RO4ACTUAL OFF 1 0 ON OFF 82 LAI Al 1 ACTUAL 0 PCT 0 1 0 83 LAI AI 2 ACTUAL 0 PCT 0 1 0 84 ILAI AO1 ACTUAL 0 MA 0 1 0 290 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus FLN Point Database Factory Engr Point Subpoint Name Default Units Slope Intercept On Text Off Text Type SI Units 86 LDI OK ALARM OK 1 0 ALARM OK 87 LDI OK MAINT OK 1 0 MAINT OK 88 LAI qM WORD 1 0 KR 89 LAI pou WORD 1 0 2 90 LAl LAST FAULT S 1 0 91 ILAI PREV FAUL
174. LOC indicates local control on the panel display Assistant panel Basic panel The control panel always overrides the external control signal sources when used in local mode B External control When the drive is in external control the commands are given through the standard I O terminals digital and analog inputs and or the fieldbus interface In addition it is also possible to set the control panel as the source for the external control External control is indicated with REM on the panel display Assistant panel Basic panel EE Lu A 49 10 OUTPUT FWD DTR 00 00 MENU The user can connect the control signals to two external control locations EXT1 or EXT2 Depending on the user selection either one is active at a time This function operates on a 2 ms time level B Settings Panel key Additional information LOC REM Selection between local and external control Parameter 1102 Selection between EXT1 and EXT2 1001 1002 Start stop direction source for EXT1 EXT2 1103 1106 Reference source for EXT1 EXT2 Program features 95 E Diagnostics Actual signals Additional information 0111 0112 EXT1 EXT2 reference B Block diagram Start stop direction source for EXT1 The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for start stop and direction for external control location EXT1
175. LT LIMIT 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 Sets a fault level for analog input 1 See 3001 Al lt MIN FUNCTION 3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 Sets a fault level for analog input 2 See 3001 Al lt MIN FUNCTION 3023 WIRING FAULT 0 1 1 1 Defines the drive response to cross wiring faults and to ground faults detected when the drive is NOT running When the drive is not running it monitors for Improper connections of input power to the drive output the drive can display fault 35 OUTPUT WIRING if improper connections are detected Ground faults the drive can display fault 16 EARTH FAULT if a ground fault is detected Also see parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT 0 DISABLE No drive response to either of the above monitoring results 1 ENABLE The drive displays faults when this monitoring detects problems 184 Actual signals and parameters E Group 31 Automatic Reset This group defines conditions for automatic resets An automatic reset occurs after a particular fault is detected The drive holds for a set delay time then automatically restarts You can limit the number of resets in a specified time period and you can set up automatic resets for a variety of faults Group 31 Automatic Reset Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3101 INR OF TRIALS 0 5 1 5 Sets the number of allowed automatic resets within a trial period defined by 3102 TRIAL TIME Ifthe number of a
176. N A When this protocol is selected the default Selects the protocol is value for this parameter is 0 communication profile selected Changing the value for this parameter has no used by the EFB protocol the coe affect on this protocol s behavior O ABB DRV LIM ecd E Operation of Control Status Words Mud conform to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACH400 1 DCU PROFILE Operation of Control Status Words conform to 32 bit DCU Profile 2 ABB DRV FULL Operation of Control Status Words conform to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACH600 800 264 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Code Description EFB Protocol Reference Modbus N2 FLN BACnet 5310 EFB PAR10 Not used for Comm setup 3 msec 0 msec Sets them response turnaround time in milliseconds When the default value is this protocol is selected 5 msec 5311 EFB PAR11 Not used for Comm setup This parameter together with parameter 5317 EFB PAR 17 sets BACnet Device Object Instance s For the range 1 to 65 535 This parameter sets the ID directly 5317 must be 0 For example the following values set the ID to 49134 5311 49134 and 5317 0 For IDs gt 65 335 The ID equals 5311 s value plus 10 000 times 5317 s value For example the following values set the ID to 71234 5311 1234 and 5317 7 5312 EFB PAR12 Not used for
177. NAL REF 1 0 30000 rpm 1rpm 0 500 Hz 0 1 Hz External reference REF1 rom or Hz units determined by parameter 9904 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 0 100 0 1 torque 0 600 External reference REF2 in 0113 CTRL LOCATION 0 2 1 Active control location Alternatives are 0 HAND 1 EXT1 2 EXT2 0114 RUN TIME R 0 65 535 h 1h Oh The drive s accumulated running time in hours h Can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN buttons simultaneously when in parameter set mode Actual signals and parameters 131 Group 01 Operating Data Code Description Range Resolution Default S 0115 KWH COUNTER R 0 65 535 kWh 1 kWh The drive s accumulated power consumption in kilowatt hours Can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN buttons simultaneously when in parameter set mode 0116 APPL BLK OUTPUT 0 100 0 1 torque 0 600 Application block output signal Value is from either PFA control if PFA Control is active or Parameter 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 0120 AM 0 100 0 1 Relative value of analog input 1 in 96 0121 Al2 0 100 0 1 Relative value of analog input 2 in 96 0124 AO1 0 20 mA 0 1 mA The analog output 1 value in milliamperes 0126 PID 1 OUTPUT 1000 1000 0 1 The PID Controller 1 output value in 96 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT 100 100 0 1 The PID Controller 2 output value in 96 0128 PID 1 SETPNT x The PID
178. NERATOR ACCELERATION ENABLED 0 RFG OUT ZERO Force ramp function generator output to Zero Drive ramps to stop current and DC voltage limits in force 5 RAMP HOLD RFG OUT ENABLED Enable ramp function Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ACCELERATOR ENABLED RFG OUT HOLD Halt ramping Ramp Function Generator output held 6 DAMP IN ZERO RFG INPUT ENABLED Normal operation Enter OPERATING RFG INPUT ZERO Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 317 ABB Drives Profile EFB CONTROL WORD Commanded Bit Name Value State Comments 7 RESET 0 gt 1 RESET Fault reset if an active fault exists Enter SWITCH ON INHIBITED Effective if 1604 COMM 0 OPERATING Continue normal operation 8 9 Unused 10 Unused ABB DRV LIM REMOTE_CMD 1 Fieldbus control enabled ABB DRV FULL fg CW 0 or Ref 0 Retain last CW and Ref CW 0 and Ref 0 Fieldbus control enabled Ref and deceleration acceleration ramp are locked 11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 EXT2 SELECT Select external control location 2 EXT2 Effective if 1102 COMM 0 EXT SELECT Select external control location 1 EXT1 Effective if 1102 COMM 12 15 Unused DCU Profile The following tables describe the CONTROL WORD content for the DCU profile DCU Profile coNTROL WORD See Parameter 0301
179. OCESS VAR 2 1 Process variable 2 Defined by parameters in Group 34 Panel Display Process Variables 0139 PROCESS VAR 3 1 Process variable 3 Defined by parameters in Group 34 Panel Display Process Variables 0140 RUN TIME 0 499 99 kh 0 01 kh 0 kh The drive s accumulated running time in thousands of hours kh 0141 MWH COUNTER 0 65 535 MWh 1 MWh The drive s accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours Cannot be reset 0142 REVOLUTION CNTR 0 9999 1 0 The motor s accumulated revolutions in millions of revolutions 0143 DRIVE ON TIME HI 0 65535 days 1 day 0 The drive s accumulated power on time in days 0144 DRIVE ON TIME LO 0 43200hh mm ss 2s 0 The drive s accumulated power on time in 2 second ticks 30 ticks 60 seconds 0145 MOTOR TEMP 10 200 C 1 0 0 5000 Ohm 0 1 Motor temperature in degrees centigrade PTC rdsistance in Ohms e Applies only if motor temperature sensor is set up See parameter 3501 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 Data received from fieldbus for PID control PID1 and PID2 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 Data received from fieldbus for PID control PID1 and PID2 0160 DI 1 5 STATUS Status of digital inputs EXAMPLE 10000 DI1 is on DI2 DI5 are off 0161 PULSE INPUT FREQ 1 1Hz Value of frequency input in Hz 0162 RO STATUS 121 Status of relay output 1 1 RO is energized 0 RO is deenergized Actual signals and parameters 133 Group 01 Operating Data
180. ODE 0 65535 1 0 Entering the correct override pass code unlocks parameter 1705 for one change Enter the pass code always before changing the value of the parameter 1705 See parameter 1705 below The pass code is 358 The entry reverts back to zero automatically 1705 OVERRIDE ENABLE 0 1 1 0 Selects whether the override is enabled or disabled 0 OFF Override disabled 1 ON Override enabled When enabled the drive stores the values of all parameters into an override parameter set see parameter 9902 and the parameters in Group 17 will be write protected except parameter 1704 To change the other parameters in the Group 17 override has to be disabled Actual signals and parameters 167 Group 17 Override Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1706 OVERRIDE DIR Selects the source of the override direction signal 0 FORWARD Assigns forward as the override direction 1 Di Defines digital input DI1 as the override direction signal Activating the digital input selects the forward direction De activating the digital input selects the reverse direction 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the override direction signal See DI1 above 7 REVERSE Assigns reverse as the override direction 1 DH INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the override direction signal De activating the digital input selects the forward direction Act
181. Off 1 On BO13 RESET RUN TIME 114 indirectly 0 N A 1 On Reset Run Time BO14 RESET KWH COUNT 115 indirectly 0 N A 1 On Reset kWh Count BO15 PRC PID SELECT 4027 indirectly 0 SET2 1 SET2 BO16 N2 LOCAL CTL Command Word 0 Auto 1 N2 BO17 N2 LOCAL REF Command Word 0 Auto 1 N2 BO18 SAVE PARAMETERS 1607 indirectly 0 N A 1 On Save Parameters B019 READ MAILBOX 0 No 1 Yes B020 WRITE MAILBOX 0 No 1 Yes 1 Requires optional MREL realy output card 2 N2 LOCAL CTL and N2 LOCAL REF have priority over drive input terminals Use these binary outputs for temporary N2 control of the drive when COMM is not the selected control source B DDLFile for NCU The listing below is the Data Definition Language DDL file for ACS320 drives used with the Network Control Units This listing is useful when defining drive I O objects to the Network Controller Units Below is the ACS320 DDL file listing Ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck ck KKK Ck ck ck kk Ck KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK ck Ck Sk ck kk ck kk ck kk kk ko kk kk ck ckckckckck ko ABB Drives ACS 320 Variable Frequency Drive ck ok ck ck ck kk ck ck KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK ck kk KK KKK ck ck kk ck ck ck ck ck kk ko kk ko ko ko ko ko ko kockockok CSMODEL ACS 320 VND ATTT Analog Inputs BITI Binary Inputs AOTI Analog Outputs BOTI Binary Outputs CSAI AT1 N N FREQ_ACT Hz CSAI AI2 N N PCT
182. PID OUT FREEZE NOT SEL Freezes the output of the process PID controller NOT SEL 0 Not selected DH 1 Output is frozen on the rising edge of digital input DI1 DI2 2 See selection DI DI3 3 See selection DI DI4 4 See selection DI DI5 5 See selection DI DI1 INV 1 Output is frozen on the falling edge of digital input DI1 DI2 INV 2 See selection DI1 INV DI3 INV 3 See selection DI1 INV DI4 INV 4 See selection DI1 INV DI5 INV 5 See selection DI INV 4036 INTERNALSETPNT2 100 0 100 0 1 0 1 40 0 Selects a constant value as the process PID controller reference which becomes active when parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL value is set to INTERNAL and setpoint ER with the input defined by parameter 4039 INT SETPNT SEL Value in 4037 INTERNAL SETPNT3 100 0 100 0 1 0 1 40 0 Selects a constant value as the process PID controller reference which becomes active when parameter 4070 SET POINT SEL value is set to INTERNAL and setpoint a with the input defined by parameter 4039 INT SETPNT SEL Value in 4038 INTERNALSETPNT4 100 0 100 0 1 0 1 40 0 Selects a constant value as the process PID controller reference which becomes active when parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL value is set to INTERNAL and setpoint 4 is selected with the input defined by parameter 4039 INT SETPNT SEL Value in percent 218 Actual signals and parameters Group 40 Process PID Set 1 Code Description Range Resolu
183. PID control 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for the PID sleep function See DI1 above 7 INTERNAL Defines the output rpm frequency process reference and process actual value as the control for the PID sleep function Refer to parameters 4025 WAKE UP DEV and 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI as the control for the PID sleep function De activating the digital input activates the sleep function Activating the digital input restores PID control 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for the PID sleep function See DH INV above 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL 0 0 120 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz 0 7200 rpm 1 rpm Sets the motor speed frequency that enables the PID sleep function a motor speed frequency below this level for at least the time period 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY enables the PID sleep function stopping the drive Requires 4022 7 INTERNAL See figure A PID output level B PID process feedback t lt P 4024 A oe 4 t P 4024 P 4023 7 me Setpoint P 4025 4005 1 P 4025 j 4005 0 p 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1 s 60 0 s Sets the time delay for the PID sleep function a motor speed frequency below 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL for at least this time period enables the PID sleep function stopping the drive See 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL above Actua
184. PUT 1 0 45 1 1 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 1 what relay output 1 means 0 NOT SEL Relay is not used and is de energized 1 READY Energize relay when drive is ready to function Requires Run enable signal present No faults exist Supply voltage is within range Emergency Stop command is not on 2 RUN Energize relay when the drive is running 3 FAULT 1 Energize relay when power is applied De energizes when a fault occurs 4 FAULT Energize relay when a fault is active 5 ALARM Energize relay when an alarm is active 6 REVERSED Energize relay when motor rotates in reverse direction 7 STARTED Energize relay when drive receives a start command even if Run Enable signal is not present De energized relay when drive receives a stop command or a fault occurs 8 SUPRV1 OVER Energize relay when first supervised parameter 3201 exceeds the limit 3203 See Group 32 Supervision starting on page 186 9 suprv1 under Energize relay when first supervised parameter 3201 drops below the limit 3202 See Group 32 Supervision starting on page 186 10 suprv2 over Energize relay when second supervised parameter 3204 exceeds the limit 3206 See Group 32 Supervision starting on page 186 11 suprv2 under Energize relay when second supervised parameter 3204 drops below the limit 3205 See Group 32 Superv
185. Par 0134 Binary RO4 RO3 RC2 RO1 0 000000 1 1 1 1 1 000001 1 1 1 0 2 000010 1 1 0 1 3 000011 1 1 0 0 4 000100 1 0 1 1 5 62 ET m E 63 111111 0 0 0 0 0 De energize relay 1 Energize relay Actual signals and parameters 155 Group 14 Relay Outputs Code Description Range Resolution Default S 37 TIMER 1 Energize relay when timer 1 is activated See Group 36 Timer Functions 38 40 TIMER 2 4 Energize relay when Timer 2 4 is active See Timer 1 above 41 M TRIG FAN Energize relay when cooling fan counter is triggered See group 29 Maintenance Trig 42 M TRIG REV Energize relay when revolutions counter is triggered See group 29 Maintenance Trig 43 M TRIG RUN Energize relay when run time counter is triggered See group 29 Maintenance Trig 44 M TRIG MWH Energize relay when power consumption counter is triggered See group 29 Maintenance Trig 45 OVERRIDE Energize relay when override is activated 47 USER LOAD C Energize relay when a user load curve fault or alarm occurs 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 0 45 1 2 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 2 what relay output 2 means See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Relay Output 2 only with MREL 01 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 0 45 1 2 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 3 what relay output 3 means See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Relay Output
186. Process PID Set 1 Group 41 Process PID Set 2 PID1 settings Group 42 External PID PID2 settings B Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0126 0127 PID 1 2 output value 0128 0129 PID 1 2 setpoint value 0130 0131 PID 1 2 feedback value 0132 0133 PID 1 2 deviation 114 Program features Sleep function for the process PID PID1 control The sleep function operates on a 2 ms time level The block diagram below illustrates the sleep function enable disable logic The sleep function can be put into use only when the PID control is active Compare Select Output 1 NOT SEL freq 1 2 INTERNAL G Ana Delay Delay Di e S Set Reset 4023 2 4022 D 5 S A amp refActive L PIDCtrlActive 4024 4030 9r S R modulating R 1 Or 5320 B1 4 5320 B2 lt 1 Set Reset 1 Compare S L 0132 1 NOT SEL Select Delay Or S R 122 FINTERNAL CT StatR f q q 4025 2 DI 6 D lt 1 R zd 4022 4026 1 1 Activate sleeping 0 Deactivate sleeping 2 1 Activate sleep boost 0 Deactivate sleep boost Mot speed Actual speed of the motor refActive The reference EXT REF2 is in use See parameter 1102 PIDCt
187. Property Device Binary Binary Binary Analog Analog Analog Input Output Value Input Output Value Status Flags Y Y Y Y Y v Event State Y Y Y Y Y v Out of Service Y Y Y Y Y v Units Y Y Y Priority Array Y v Y Y Relinquish Default Y Y Y v Polarity Y v Active Text Y Y v Inactive Text Y Y v For commandable values only Modbus Protocol Technical Data B Overview The Modbus protocol was introduced by Modicon Inc for use in control environments featuring Modicon programmable controllers Due to its ease of use and implementation this common PLC language was quickly adopted as a de facto standard for integration of a wide variety of master controllers and slave devices Modbus is a serial asynchronous protocol Transactions are half duplex featuring a single Master controlling one or more Slaves While RS232 can be used for point to point communication between a single Master and a single Slave a more common implementation features a multi drop RS485 network with a single Master controlling multiple Slaves The ACS320 features RS485 for its Modbus physical interface RTU The Modbus specification defines two distinct transmission modes ASCII and RTU The ACS320 supports RTU only Feature Summary The following Modbus function codes are supported by the ACS320 Code Function Hex Description Read Coil Status 0x01 Read discrete output status For the ACS320 the ind
188. Pull Up amp Pull Down BIAS resistors are on board the ACS320 Drive 3 Terminate Shield at the Reference terminal in the Building Automation Controller See Note 3 Reference Common Building Automation Controller 262 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Communication Set up EFB B Serial Communication Selection To activate the serial communication set parameter 9802 COMM PROTOCOL SEL e 1 STD MODBUS 2 N2 3 FLN 5 BACNET Note If you cannot see the desired selection on the panel your drive does not have that protocol software in the application memory B Serial Communication Configuration Setting 9802 automatically sets the appropriate default values in parameters that define the communication process These parameters and descriptions are defined below In particular note that the station Id may require adjustment EFB Protocol Reference Code Description P Modbus N2 FLN BACnet 5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID Contains the identification and program revision of the protocol Do not edit Any non zero value entered for parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL sets this parameter automatically The format is XXYY where xx protocol ID and YY program revision 5302 EFB STATION ID Defines the node address of the RS485 link Set each drive on the network with a unique value for this parameter When this protocol is select
189. QUIATION i iue te eee rte eres 262 configure for loss of communication 273 control interface seessssssusss 24 259 control profile parameter 234 control word ssssssseese 315 CRC errors count parameter 234 diagnostics nein 272 drive control of functions activate 265 exception codes eeeseees 314 fault code 28 sss 273 fault code 31 sss 274 faultcode 32 ainese aana in 274 fault code 33 enpero nae 274 fa lt Codes aiiiar or es 339 fault tracing parameters 272 fault duplicate device address 343 fault duplicate stations 273 fault intermittent off line 274 fault no master station on line 273 343 fault swapped wires 273 343 feedback from drive 269 feedback from drive mailbox 271 input ref sel activate 265 Installation o ri re re Reed 51 260 mailbox param read write 271 misc drive control activate 266 modbus actual values 314 normal operation seeren 272 ok messages count parameter 234 OVerVieW 257 parameter group e eee eee eters 232 paramete
190. RELAY 4 STATUS 0123 bit mask 04 l0 Off 1 On BI10 INPUT 1 STATUS 0118 bit mask 04 0 2 Off 1 On BI INPUT 2 STATUS 0118 bit mask 02 0 Off 1 2 On BI12 INPUT 3 STATUS 0118 bit mask 01 0 Off 1 On BI13 INPUT 4 STATUS 0119 bit mask 04 0 Off 1 2 On BI14 INPUT 5 STATUS 0119 bit mask 02 0 Off 1 2 On BI16 EXTERNAL 2 SELECT Status Word 0 EXT1 EXT2 BI17 HAND AUTO Status Word 0 AUTO 1 HAND Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 279 N2 Binary Inputs Number Object Drive Parameter Range BlI18 ALARM Status Word 0 OK 1 ALARM BI19 MAINTENANCE REQ Status Word 0 OK 1 MAINT REQ BI20 DRIVE READY Status Word 0 Not Ready 1 Ready BI21 AT SETPOINT Status Word 0 No 1 At Setpoint Bl22 RUN ENABLED Status Word 0 Not Enabled 1 Enabled BI23 N2 LOCAL MODE Status Word 0 Auto 1 N2 Local Bl24 N2 CONTROL SRC Status Word 0 No 1 Yes Bl25 N2 REF1 SRC Status Word 0 No 1 Yes BI26 N2 REF2 SRC Status Word 0 No 1 Yes 1 Require optional MREL relay output card B N2 Analog Output Objects The following table lists the N2 Analog Output objects defined for the ACS320 drive N2 Analog Outputs Number Object p eae Units Range AO1 REFERENCE 1 Reference 1 10 96 0 100 AO2 REFERENCE 2 Reference 2 10 96 0 100 AO3 ACCEL TIME 1 2202 10 S 0 1 1800
191. RT DELAY zero the delay is disabled Actual signals and parameters 173 E Group 22 Accel Decel This group defines ramps that control the rate of acceleration and deceleration You define these ramps as a pair one for acceleration and one for deceleration You can define two pairs of ramps and use a digital input to select one or the other pair Group 22 Accel Decel Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2201 ACC DEC 1 2 SEL 6 7 1 0 Defines control for selection of acceleration deceleration ramps Ramps are defined in pairs one each for acceleration and deceleration See below for the ramp definition parameters 0 NOT SEL Disables selection the first ramp pair is used 1 DI1 Defines digital input D11 as the control for ramp pair selection Activating the digital input selects ramp pair 2 De activating the digital input selects ramp pair 1 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for ramp pair selection See DIT above 7 COMM Defines serial communication as the control for ramp pair selection 1 Did INV Defines an inverted digital input DI as the control for ramp pair selection De activating the digital input selects ramp pair 2 Activating the digital input selects ramp pair 1 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for ramp pair selection See DH INV above 2202
192. Reference voltage 10 VDC O 5 JAl2 PID feedback 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common 7 AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA UJ 8 AGND Analog output circuit common 9 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC r 110 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 11 DCOM Digital input common for all 112 D1 I 113 DI2 114 DI3 I 415 DI4 7 16 DI5 X1Br7j Start Stop Activate to start drive D12 Presets PID Selection Activate to select PID D13 Setpoint Selection Activate to select Set 2 D14 Preset Speed 1 D15 Preset Speed 2 ROIC Relay output 1 P 1401 18 RO1A x Default operation Started gt 17 connected to 19 19 RO1B Ln 20 DOSRC Digital output max 100 mA P 1805 21 DOOUT Gin No fault Fault 1 gt 20 connected to 22 22 DOGND Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9902 applic macro 12 DUAL SPNTCS 3207 superv 3 param 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 1102 exti ext2 sel 2 DI2 4001 gain 0 7 1201 const speed sel 11 D15 6 4002 integration time 10 0s 1401 relay output 1 7 STARTED 4010 setpoint sel 19 INTERNAL 1608 start enable 1 D NOT SEL 4011 internal setpnt 50 096 2108 start inhibit 1 ON 4027 pid 1 param set 3 DI3 2202 acceler time 1 10 0s 4101 gain 0 7 2203 deceler time 1 10 0s 4102 integration time 10 0s 3105 arovervoltag
193. Resolution Default S 3409 SIGNAL 2 MIN Depends on 1 selection Defines the minimum expected value for the second display parameter See parameter 3402 3410 SIGNAL 2 MAX Depends on 1 selection Defines the maximum expected value for the second display parameter See parameter 3403 3411 OUTPUT 2 DSP 0 8 1 FORM SAM the decimal point location for the second display parameter See parameter 3412 OUTPUT 2 DSP UNIT 0 127 1 1 Selects the units used with the second display parameter See parameter 3405 3413 OUTPUT 2 MIN Depends on 1 selection SR minimum value displayed for the second display parameter See parameter 3414 OUTPUT 2 MAX Depends on 1 selection Sers tie maximum value displayed for the second display parameter See parameter 3415 SIGNAL 3 PARAM 100 199 1 120 Selects the third parameter by number displayed on the control panel See parameter 3401 3416 SIGNAL 3 MIN Depends on 1 selection Rennes the minimum expected value for the third display parameter See parameter 3417 SIGNAL 3 MAX Depends on 1 selection SE the maximum expected value for the third display parameter See parameter 3418 OUTPUT 3 DSP 0 8 1 1 FORM SE the decimal point location for the third display parameter See parameter 3419 OUTPUT 3 DSP UNIT 128 127 1 11 Selects the units used with the third display parameter See parameter 3405 3420 OUTPUT 3 MIN Depends on 1 selection Sets the minimum value displayed for the third display
194. Run permissive Deactivate to stop drive P 1601 I 414 DIS Setpoint Selection Activate to select Set 2 I 3115 DI4 Safety interlock1 Deactivate to stop drive P 1608 L 7 16 DI5 Safety interlock2 Deactivate to stop drive P 1609 X1BizjRoic Relay output 1 P 1401 18 RO1A x Default operation Started gt 17 connected to 19 19 RO1B 20 IDOSRC Digital output max 100 mA P 1805 21 DOOUT e No fault Fault 1 gt 20 connected to 22 22 DOGND Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9902 applic macro 11 DUAL SETPNT 4010 setpoint sel 19 INTERNAL 1201 const speed sel D NOT SEL 4011 internal setpnt 50 096 1401 relay output 1 7 STARTED 4027 pid 1 param set 3 DI3 1601 run enable 2 DI2 4110 setpoint sel 19 INTERNAL 1609 start enable 2 5 DI5 4111 internal setpnt 100 096 3207 superv 3 param 0103 OUTPUT FREQ Start Up 87 BW Dual Setpoint with PID and Constant Speeds This macro configures for applications with 2 constant speeds active PID and PID alternating between two setpoints using digital inputs Set PID setpoints internal to the drive using parameters 4011 SET1 and 4111 SET2 The digital input DI3 selects the setpoints X1A 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen LU 2 JA External reference 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V
195. S 4421 PIPEFILL ENABLE NOT SEL Enables the Precharge function which calculates reference steps NOT SEL 0 Not enabled DH 1 When DI is active 1 Precharge function is active when the drive is started If DI1 becomes inactive 0 before Precharge is finished normal PID control is enabled DI2 2 See selection DI DI3 3 See selection DI DI4 4 See selection DI DI5 5 See selection DI ACTIVE 7 Precharge is active at every start up DH INV 1 When DI is inactive 0 Precharge function is active when the drive is started If DI1 becomes active 1 before Precharge is finished normal PID control is enabled DI2 INV 2 See selection DI1 INV DI3 INV 3 See selection DI1 INV DI4 INV 4 See selection DI1 INV DI5 INV 5 See selection DI INV 4422 PIPEFILL STEP 0 0 100 0 1 0 1 0 0 Defines the speed step used in Precharge The PID reference ramp time is specified by parameter 4032 PID REF ACC TIME The speed step is added to the reference after the time defined by parameter 4424 ACT CHANGE DLY has elapsed and the change in feedback defined by parameter 4423 REQ ACT CHANGE has not been reached Speed step in percent of the maximum speed output 4423 REQ ACT CHANGE 0 0 100 0 1 0 1 0 0 Defines the requested change in process feedback during the time that is set by parameter 4424 ACT CHANGE DLY If the requested change in the feedback is not reached 4422 PIPEFILL STEP is added to the speed
196. S WORD Bit 4 OFF 2 STA ZERO SPEED 10006 STATUS WORD Bit 5 OFF 3 STA ACCELERATE 10007 STATUS WORD Bit 6 SWOC ON INHIB DECELERATE 10008 STATUS WORD Bit 7 ALARM AT SETPOINT 10009 STATUS WORD Bit 8 AT SETPOINT LIMIT Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 311 Modbus Internal Location ABB DRV DCU PROFILE Ref All Profiles 5305 0 or 2 5305 1 10010 STATUS WORD Bit 9 REMOTE SUPERVISION 10011 STATUS WORD Bit 10 ABOVE_LIMIT REV_REF 10012 STATUS WORD Bit 11 EXT2 REV_ACT 10013 STATUS WORD Bit 12 RUN_ENABLE PANEL_LOCAL 10014 STATUS WORD Bit 13 N A FIELDBUS_LOCAL 10015 STATUS WORD Bit 14 N A EXT2_ACT 10016 STATUS WORD Bit 15 N A FAULT 10017 STATUS WORD Bit 16 Reserved ALARM 10018 STATUS WORD Bit 17 Reserved REQ MAINT 10019 STATUS WORD Bit 18 Reserved DIRLOCK 10020 STATUS WORD Bit 19 Reserved LOCALLOCK 10021 STATUS WORD Bit 20 Reserved CTL MODE 10022 STATUS WORD Bit 21 Reserved Reserved 10023 STATUS WORD Bit 22 Reserved Reserved 10024 STATUS WORD Bit 23 Reserved Reserved 10025 STATUS WORD Bit 24 Reserved Reserved 10026 STATUS WORD Bit 25 Reserved Reserved 10027 STATUS WORD Bit 26 Reserved REQ CTL 10028 STATUS WORD Bit 27 Reserved REQ REF1 10029 STATUS WORD Bit 28 Reserved REQ REF2 10030 STATUS WORD Bit 29 Reserved REQ REF2EXT 10031 STATUS WORD Bit 30 Reserved ACK STARTINH 10
197. SIGNAL1 MIN Depends on 0 0 Hz selection Defines the minimum expected value for Display the first display parameter Value Use parameters 3402 3403 3406 and 3407 for example to convert a Group 01 P 3407 parameter such as 0102 SPEED in rpm l to the speed of a conveyor driven by the motor in ft min For such a conversion the source values in the figure are the min and max motor speed and the P 3406 display values are the corresponding min and max conveyor speed Use parameter 3405 to select the proper gt units for the display P3402 P 3403 Note Selecting units does not convert Source Value values 3403 SIGNAL1 MAX Depends on 600 0 Hz selection Defines the maximum expected value for the first display parameter 190 Actual signals and parameters Group 34 Panel Display Process Variables Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP 0 9 1 9 FORM Defines the decimal point location for the first display parameter 3404 Value Display Range 1 7 Defines the decimal point 0 3 32768 32767 location 1 3 1 Signed Enter the number of digits desired 2 x 3 14 to the right of the decimal point 3 3 142 See table for example using pi 4 3 0 65535 3 14159 5 31 Unsigned 8 BAR METER Specifies a bar meter 6 3 14 display 7 3 142 9 DIRECT Decimal poi
198. STATUS 40122 BI4 BI5 BIG 76 77 78 BIO DI BI2 0301 FB STATUS WORD bit 0 40301 bitO BI1 23 BVO STOP 0301 FB STATUS WORD bit 2 REV 40301 bit 2 BI2 21 BV1 Note With Modbus any parameter can be accessed using the format 4 followed by the parameter number Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 271 B Mailbox Read Write The ACS320 provides a Mailbox function to access parameters that have not been pre defined by the protocol Using mailbox any drive parameter can be identified and read Mailbox can also be used to adjust parameter settings by writing a value to any parameter identifiedThe following table describes the use of this function Name Description Protocol Reference P Modbus N2 FLN BACnet Mailbox Enter the number of the drive Does not AO19 95 AV25 Parameter parameter to access apply Mailbox Contains the parameter value after a AO20 96 AV26 Data read or enter the desired parameter value for a write Mailbox A binary value triggers a read the BO19 97 BV15 Read value of the Mailbox Parameter appears in Mailbox data Mailbox A binary value triggers a write the BO20 98 BV16 Write drive value for the Mailbox Parameter changes to the value in Mailbox data 1 As noted above Modbus provides direct access to all parameters using the format 4 followed by the parameter number E Actual Va
199. Set 1 and PID Set 2 p p parameter set selection When set 1 is selected parameters 4001 4026 are used When set 2 is selected parameters 4101 4126 are used 0 sET 1 PID Set 1 parameters 4001 4026 is active 1 DI1 Defines digital input Di as the control for PID Set selection Activating the digital input selects PID Set 2 De activating the digital input selects PID Set 1 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for PID Set selection See DI1 above 7 SET 2 PID Set 2 parameters 4101 4126 is active 8 11 TIMER 1 4 Defines the Timer as the control for the PID Set selection Timer de activated PID Set 1 Timer activated PID Set 2 See parameter Group 36 Timer Functions 12 2 ZONE MIN The drive calculates the difference between setpoint 1 and feedback 1 as well as setpoint 2 and feedback 2 The drive will control the zone and select the set which has a larger difference A positive difference a setpoint higher than the feedback is always larger than a negative difference This keeps feedback values at or above the setpoint Controller does not react to the situation of feedback above setpoint if another zone s feedback is closer to its setpoint 13 2 ZONE MAX The drive calculates the difference between setpoint 1 and feedback 1 as well as setpoint 2 and feedback 2 The drive will control the zone and select the set which has a smaller difference
200. T 1 1 0 7 92 LAl PREV FAULT 2 1 0 2 93 LDI OK FAULT OK 1 0 FAULT OK 94 LDO RESET FAULT NO 1 0 RESET NO 95 LAO MBOX PARAM 1 0 96 LAO MBOX DATA 1 0 97 LDO MBOX READ DONE 1 0 READ DONE 98 LDO MBOX WRITE DONE 1 0 WRITE DONE 99 LAO ERROR gt 1 0 STATUS a Points not listed are not used in this application b A single value in a column means that the value is the same in English units and in SI units c Point numbers that appear in brackets may be unbundled at the field panel Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 291 E Detailed Point Descriptions FLN Detailed Point Descriptions n nr Drive Point Description Parameter 1 CTRL The FLN address of the drive It can be set by FLN and by 5302 ADDRESS the panel 2 APPLICATION The Application ID for FLN on the ACS320 This ID is assigned by Siemens for each unique application It correlates directly to a particular point list approved at the time of release Therefore this point list shall remain fixed once approval is granted Any changes to the point list shall require a new Application ID and re approval by Siemens The Application ID assigned to ACS320 is 2934 3 FREQ OUTPUT The output frequency applied to the motor in Hertz 0103 4 PCT OUTPUT The ratio of output frequency or speed to the None This corresponding maximum rating depending on control ratio is
201. T2 COMMANDS and 2709 EMERG STOP SEL 5014 Panel control is disabled Reset drive fault and retry because of drive fault 5015 Panel control is disabled Deactivate local control mode lock and retry because local control See parameter 1606 LOCAL LOCK mode lock is active 5018 Parameter default value is Contact your local ABB representative not found 5019 Writing non zero Only parameter reset is allowed parameter value is prohibited 5020 Parameter or parameter Contact your local ABB representative group does not exist or parameter value is inconsistent 5021 Parameter or parameter Contact your local ABB representative group is hidden 5022 Parameter is write Parameter value is read only and cannot be protected changed 5023 Parameter change is not Stop drive and change parameter value allowed when drive is running 5024 Drive is executing task Wait until task is completed 5025 Software is being uploaded Wait until upload download is complete or downloaded 5026 Value is at or below Contact your local ABB representative minimum limit 5027 Value is at or above Contact your local ABB representative maximum limit 5028 Invalid value Contact your local ABB representative 5029 Memory is not ready Retry 334 Fault tracing ALARM CODE CAUSE WHAT TO DO 5030 Invalid request Contact your local ABB representative 5031 Drive is not ready f
202. TOR NOM FREQ and 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ are within range Fault tracing 341 CODE FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO 1001 PAR PFC REF NEG Incorrect PFC Check parameter Group 81 PFA 6320 parameters settings Check that following applies 0307 bit 15 2007 MINIMUM FREQ gt 0 when 8123 is ACTIVE or SPFC ACTIVE 1003 PAR Al SCALE Incorrect analog input Check parameter Group 13 Analog 6320 Al signal scaling Inputs settings Check that following 7 bit 1 applies EES 1301 MINIMUM Alt lt 1302 MAXIMUM AI 1304 MINIMUM AI2 lt 1305 MAXIMUM Al2 1004 PAR AO SCALE Incorrect analog output Check parameter Group 15 Analog 6320 AO signal scaling Outputs settings Check that following 0307 bit 15 applies 1504 MINIMUM AO1 lt 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 1005 PAR PCU 2 Incorrect motor Check parameter 9009 setting 6320 nominal power setting Following must apply 0307 bit 15 1 1 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT 1 73 Pn lt 3 0 where Py 1000 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER if units are in KW or Py 746 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER if units are in hp 1006 PAR EXT RO Incorrect extension Check parameter settings Check that 6320 relay output following applies 0307 bit 15 parameters Relay Output Extension Module MREL 0 is connected to the drive 1402 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 2 3 and 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 have non zero values See MREL 01 Relay Output Extension Module User
203. ULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO 0031 EFB1 Error from the See chapter Fieldbus control with FF92 embedded fieldbus embedded fieldbus on page 257 0307 bit 0 IEF P protocol application The 0032 EFB 2 meaning is protocol FF93 dependent 0307 bit 1 0033 EFB3 FF94 0307 bit 2 0034 MOTOR PHASE Motor circuit fault due Check motor and motor cable FF56 to missing motor Check motor thermistor relay if used 0306 bit 14 phase or motor i y thermistor relay used in motor temperature measurement fault 0035 OUTP WIRING Incorrect input power Check input power connections FF95 and motor cable Check fault function parameters 0306 bit 15 connection ie input programmable fault function 3023 power cable is connected to drive motor connection The fault can be erroneously declared if the input power is a delta grounded system and the motor cable capacitance is large This fault can be disabled using parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT 0036 INCOMPATIBLE Loaded software is not Contact your local ABB SW compatible representative 630F 0307 bit 3 0038 USER LOAD Condition defined by See parameter Group 37 User Load CURVE 3701 USERLOADO Curve FF6B MODE has been valid longer than the time 0307 bit 4 setby 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 0039 UNKNOWN Option module not Check connections EXTENSION supported by the drive 7086 firmware is connected 0307 bit 5 to the drive 0040 INLET VERY LOW Pressur
204. _ACT 3 CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSAO CSAO CSAO CSAO CSAO AI3 N N AIA N N AT5 N N AT6 N N AI7 N N AI8 N N AI9 N N AI10 N AII1 N AI12 N AI13 N AI14 N AI15 N AI16 N AIIT7 N AI18 N AI19 N AI20 N AI21 N AI22 N AI24 N AI25 N BI1 N N BI2 N N BI3 N N BI4 N N BI5 N N BI6 N N BI7 N N BI10 N BI11 N BI12 N BI13 N BI14 N BI16 N BI17 N BI18 N BI19 N BI20 N BI21 N BI22 N BI23 N BI24 N BI25 N BI26 N AO1 Y Y AO2 Y Y RAO SM LY RO4 Y Y AO5 Y Y SPE CURRE TORQUE POWER DRV TEMP ENERGY k ENERGY M RUN TIME DC VOLT S VO PI PI A PI DI DI ACT D2 DEV ER D2 DEV LAST FLT PREV FLT l1ST FL Y AI_1_ACT AI 2 ACT AO 1 ACT MTR TEMP REVL CNT STOP RUN LT ACT ACT Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 281 ED RPM NI A ky ocn kWh MWh S H wy yn omn r wow p wow on Co
205. a 1 in Bit 15 displays as 80000 Bit 0308 alarm word 1 0309 alarm word 2 D OVERCURRENT Reserved 1 OVERVOLTAGE PID SLEEP 2 UNDERVOLTAGE Reserved 3 DIRLOCK Reserved 4 JO COMM START ENABLE 1 MISSING 5 Al1 LOSS START ENABLE 2 MISSING 6 Al2 LOSS EMERGENCY STOP 7 PANEL LOSS Reserved 8 DEVICE OVERTEMP FIRST START 9 MOT OVERTEMP Reserved 10 UNDERLOAD USER LOAD CURVE 11 MOTOR STALL START DELAY 12 AUTORESET Reserved 13 PFA AUTOCHANGE INLET LOW 14 PFC INTERLOCK INLET HIGH 15 Reserved PIPE FILL 0309 ALARM WORD 2 1 0000 hex Read only copy of the ALARM WORD 3 See parameter 0308 0310 ALARM WORD 3 0 1 0000 hex A 16 bit data word For the possible causes and remedies and fieldbus equivalents see chapter Fault tracing on page 328 An alarm can be reset by resetting the whole alarm word Write zero to the word Bit 2 D INLET VERY LOW 1 JOUTLET VERY HIGH 2 15 Reserved Actual signals and parameters 139 E Group 04 Fault History This group stores a recent history of the faults reported by the drive Group 04 Fault History Code Description Range Resolution Default S 0401 LAST FAULT Fault code text 1 0 0 Clear the fault history on panel NO RECORD n Fault code of the last recorded fault 0402 FAULT TIME 1 Date dd mm yy 1 0 power on days The day on which the last fault occurred Either as A date if real time clock is
206. able using the CreateObject service 2 Whether objects of this type are dynamically detectable using the DeleteObject service 3 List of the optional properties supported 4 List of all properties that are writable where not otherwise required by this standard 5 List of proprietary properties and for each its property identifier datatype and meaning 6 List of any property range restrictions O BACnet IP Annex J O BACnet IP Annex J Foreign Device O ISO 8802 3 Ethernet Clause 7 O ANSI ATA 878 1 2 5 Mb ARCNET Clause 8 O ANSI ATA 878 1 EIA 485 ARCNET Clause 8 baud rates MS TP master Clause 9 baud rate s 9600 19200 Data Link Layer Options 38400 76800 O MS TP slave Clause 9 baud rate s O Point To Point EIA 232 Clause 10 baud rate s D Point To Point modem Clause 10 baud rate s D LonTalk Clause 11 medium O Other Device Address Binding O Yes Is static device binding supported No This is currently necessary for two way communication with MS TP slaves and certain other devices O Router Clause 6 List all routing configurations e g ARCNET Ethernet Ethernet MS TP etc O Annex H BACnet Tunneling Router over IP O BACnet IP Broadcast Management Device BBMD Networking Options Does the BBMD support O Yes registrations by Foreign Ll No Devices 306 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus BACnet Protocol Imple
207. aches the local laws and or other regulations Furthermore if the recommendations given by ABB are not followed the drive may experience problems that the warranty does not cover Implementing the AC power line connection See the requirements in section Electric power network specification on page 355 Use a fixed connection to the AC power line WARNING As the leakage current of the device typically exceeds 3 5 mA a fixed installation is required according to IEC 61800 5 1 Selecting the supply disconnecting device disconnecting means Install a hand operated supply disconnecting device disconnecting means between the AC power source and the drive The disconnecting device must be of a type that can be locked to the open position for installation and maintenance work 34 Planning the electrical installation E European union To meet the European Union Directives according to standard EN 60204 1 Safety of Machinery the disconnecting device must be one of the following types aswitch disconnector of utilization category AC 23B EN 60947 3 adisconnector having an auxiliary contact that in all cases causes switching devices to break the load circuit before the opening of the main contacts of the disconnector EN 60947 3 acircuit breaker suitable for isolation in accordance with EN 60947 2 B North America The ACS320 does not include a disconnect device A means to disconnect input power must be installed b
208. against thermal overload when the cables are dimensioned according to the nominal current of the drive No additional thermal protection devices are needed WARNING If the drive is connected to multiple motors a separate thermal overload switch or a circuit breaker must be used for protecting each cable and motor These devices may require a separate fuse to cut off the short circuit current E Protecting the motor against thermal overload According to regulations the motor must be protected against thermal overload and the current must be switched off when overload is detected The drive includes a motor thermal protection function that protects the motor and switches off the current when necessary It is also possible to connect a motor temperature measurement to the drive The user can tune both the thermal model and the temperature measurement function further by parameters The most common temperature sensors are motor sizes IEC180 225 thermal switch for example Klixon motor sizes IEC200 250 and larger PTC or Pt100 For more information on the thermal model see section Motor Thermal Protection on page 707 For more information on the temperature measurement function see section Motor temperature measurement through the standard I O on page 116 Using residual current devices RCD with the drive ACS320 03x drives are suitable to be used with residual current devices of Type B Other measures for protection in
209. age 363 The number and location of the holes used depend on how the drive is installed a back mounting frame sizes RO R4 four holes b side mounting frame sizes RO R2 three holes one of the bottom holes is located in the clamping plate 2 Fix the screws or bolts to the marked locations GI Mechanical installation 31 3 Position the drive onto the screws on the wall 4 Tighten the screws in the wall securely 9 9 D On DIN rail 1 Click the drive to the rail To detach the drive press the release lever on top of the drive 1b 32 Mechanical installation W Fasten clamping plates 1 Fasten the clamping plate to the plate at the bottom of the drive with the provided screws 2 For frame sizes RO R2 fasten the I O clamping plate to the clamping plate with the provided screws Planning the electrical installation 33 Planning the electrical installation What this chapter contains The chapter contains the instructions that you must follow when checking the compatibility of the motor and drive and selecting cables protections cable routing and way of operation for the drive Note The installation must always be designed and made according to applicable local laws and regulations ABB does not assume any liability whatsoever for any installation which bre
210. alar control mode to prevent possible voltage oscillations in the drive DC bus caused by motor load or weak supply network In case of voltage variation the drive tunes the frequency reference to stabilize the DC bus voltage and therefore the load torque oscillation 0 DISABLE Disables DC stabilizer 1 ENABLE Enables DC stabilizer Actual signals and parameters 179 E Group 29 Maintenance Trig This group contains usage levels and trigger points When usage reaches the set trigger point a notice displayed on the control panel signals that maintenance is due Group 29 Maintenance Trig Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2901 COOLING FAN TRIG 0 0 6553 5 kh 0 1 kh 0 0 Sets the trigger point for the drive s cooling fan counter 0 0 NOT SEL 2902 COOLING FAN ACT 0 0 6553 5 kh 0 1 kh 0 0 Defines the actual value of the drive s cooling fan counter The parameter is reset by writing 0 0 to it 2903 REVOLUTION TRIG 0 65535 MRev 1 MRev 0 Sets the trigger point for the motor s accumulated revolutions counter 0 0 NOT SEL 2904 REVOLUTION ACT 0 65535 MRev 1 MRev 0 Defines the actual value of the motor s accumulated revolutions counter The parameter is reset by writing O to it 2905 RUN TIME TRIG 0 0 6553 5 kh 0 1 kh 0 0 Sets the trigger point for the drive s run time counter 0 0 NOT SEL 2906 RUN TIME ACT 0 0 6553 5 kh 0 1 kh 0 0 Defines th
211. also the speed regulated motor This value must be compatible with number of relays allocated to PFA if the autochange function is used f Autochange function is not used the speed regulated motor does not need to have a relay output allocated to PFA but it needs to be included in this value 8128 AUX START ORDER Sets the start order of the auxiliary motors 1 EVEN RUNTIME Time sharing is active The start order depends on the run times 2 RELAY ORDER The start order is fixed to be the order of the relays 256 Actual signals and parameters E Group 98 Options This group configures for options in particular enabling serial communication with the drive Group 98 Options Code Description Range Resolution Default S 9802 COMM PROT SEL 0 5 1 0 Selects the communication protocol 0 NOT SEL No communication protocol selected 1 STD MODBUS The drive communicates with Modbus via the RS485 channel X1 communications terminal See also parameter Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL 2 N2 Enables fieldbus communication with the drive using Metasys N2 protocol via the RS485 serial link X1 communications terminal 3 FLN Enables fieldbus communication with the drive using FLN protocol via the RS485 serial link X1 communications terminal 5 BACNET Enables fieldbus communication with the drive using BACnet protocol via the RS485 serial link X1 communications terminal
212. alues to memory 1603 PASS CODE 0 65535 1 0 Entering the correct pass code allows you to change the parameter lock See parameter 1602 above The code 358 allows you to change the value of the parameter 1602 once This entry reverts back to 0 automatically Actual signals and parameters 159 Group 16 System Controls Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1604 FAULT RESET SEL 6 8 1 0 Selects the source for the fault reset signal The signal resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no longer exists 0 KEYPAD Defines the control panel as the only fault reset source Fault reset is always possible with control panel 1 Di Defines digital input DI1 as a fault reset source Activating the digital input resets the drive 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as a fault reset source See Di above 7 START STOP Defines the Stop command as a fault reset source Do not use this option when fielbus communication provides the start stop and direction commands 8 COMM Defines the fieldbus as a fault reset source The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The bit 4 of the Command Word 1 parameter 0301 resets the drive 1 Di INV Defines an inverted digital input DI as a fault reset source De activating the digital input resets the drive 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inv
213. ameter 2611 USER DEFINED F1 See section Custom U f ratio on page 105 2611 USER DEFINED F1 0 0 500 0 Hz 120 1Hz 10 0 Hz Defines the first frequency point of the custom U f curve 2612 USER DEFINED U2 0 120 of Uy V 1 1V 38 of Un Defines the second voltage point of the custom U f curve at the frequency defined by parameter 2673 USER DEFINED F2 See section Custom U f ratio on page 105 2613 USER DEFINED F2 0 0 500 0 Hz 120 1Hz 20 0Hz Defines the second frequency point of the custom U f curve 2614 USER DEFINED U3 0 120 of Uy V 1 1V 47 5 of Un Defines the third voltage point of the custom U f curve at the frequency defined by parameter 2675 USER DEFINED F3 See section Custom U f ratio on page 105 2615 USER DEFINED F3 0 0 500 0 Hz 120 1Hz 25 0 Hz Defines the third frequency point of the custom U f curve 2616 USER DEFINED U4 0 120 of Uy V 1 1V 76 of Un Defines the fourth voltage point of the custom U f curve at the frequency defined by parameter 2617 USER DEFINED F4 See section Custom U f ratio on page 105 2617 USER DEFINED EA 0 0 500 0 Hz 120 1Hz 40 0Hz Defines the fourth frequency point of the custom U f curve 2618 FW VOLTAGE 0 120 of Uy V 1 1V 95 of Un Defines the voltage of the U f curve when frequency is equal to or exceeds the motor nominal frequency 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ See section Custom U f ratio on page 2619 DC STABILIZER Enables or disables the DC voltage stabilizer The DC stabilizer is used in sc
214. anger or damage the drive If a drive whose EMC filter is not disconnected is installed on a corner grounded TN system the drive will be damaged All ACS320 Drive End Grounding screws are removed at the factory See Product Overview for location details All ELV extra low voltage circuits connected to the drive must be used within a zone of equipotential bonding ie within a zone where all simultaneously accessible conductive parts are electrically connected to prevent hazardous voltages appearing between them This is accomplished by a proper factory grounding Note Even when the motor is stopped dangerous voltage is present at the power circuit terminals U1 V1 W1 and U2 V2 W2 For more technical information contact the factory or your local ABB sales representative Safely 17 B General safety WARNING Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or death or damage to the equipment Never attempt to repair a malfunctioning drive contact your local ABB representative or Authorized Service Center for service support Make sure that dust from drilling does not enter the drive during the installation Electrically conductive dust inside the drive may cause damage or lead to malfunction Ensure sufficient cooling Safe start up and operation These warnings are intended for all who plan the operation start up or operate the drive B General safety WARNING Ignoring the
215. arns about conditions other than those caused by electricity which can result in physical injury and or damage to the equipment 16 Safety Safety in installation and maintenance These warnings are intended for all who work on the drive motor cable or motor W Electrical safety WARNING Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or death or damage to the equipment Only qualified electricians are allowed to install and maintain the drive Never work on the drive motor cable or motor when input power is applied After disconnecting the input power always wait for 5 minutes to let the intermediate circuit capacitors discharge before you start working on the drive motor or motor cable Always ensure by measuring with a multimeter impedance at least 1 Mohm that there is no voltage between the drive input phases U1 V1 and W1 and the ground Do not work on the control cables when power is applied to the drive or to the external control circuits Externally supplied control circuits may carry dangerous voltage even when the input power of the drive is switched off Do not make any insulation or voltage withstand tests on the drive If a drive whose EMC filter is not disconnected is installed on an IT system an ungrounded power system or a high resistance grounded over 30 ohms power system the system will be connected to ground potential through the EMC filter capacitors of the drive This may cause d
216. ased on the state of the Timer See Timer 1 above 1 DH INV Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of DI1 Di1 activated EXT1 DI1 de activated EXT2 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the selected digital input See DI1 INv above 144 Actual signals and parameters Group 11 Reference Select Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1103 REF1 SELECT 0 21 1 1 Y Selects the signal source for external reference REF1 0 KEYPAD Defines the control panel as the reference source 1 Al1 Defines analog input 1 A11 as the reference source 2 AI2 Defines analog input 2 A12 as the reference source 3 Al1 JOYST Defines analog input 1 A11 configured for joystick operation as the reference source The minimum input signal runs the drive at the maximum reference in the reverse direction Define the minimum using parameter 1104 The maximum input A signal runs the drive at maximum reference in the forward direction Define the maximum using parameter 1105 Requires parameter 1003 3 request Warning Because the low end of the EXT REF 1 MAX reference range 2V 4MA commands full 0 V 0MA reverse operation EXT REF 1 MIN do not use 0 V as the lower end of the reference EXT REF 1 MIN range Doing so eae that 3 the HYSTERESIS 4 OF FuLL SCALE control signal is lost which is a 0 V input the res
217. ask 5085 Parameter download from Check that source and destination drive types Source to destination drive are same ie ACS320 See the type designation has failed label of the drive 5086 Parameter download from Check that source and destination drive type Source to destination drive has failed designations are the same See type designation labels of the drives Fault tracing 335 ALARM CODE CAUSE WHAT TO DO 5087 Parameter download from Check that source and destination drive source to destination drive information are same See parameters in has failed because Group 33 Information parameter sets are incompatible 5088 Operation has failed Contact your local ABB representative because of drive memory error 5089 Download has failed Contact your local ABB representative because of CRC error 5090 Download has failed Contact your local ABB representative because of data processing error 5091 Operation has failed Contact your local ABB representative because of parameter error 5092 Parameter download from Check that source and destination drive Source to destination drive has failed because parameter sets are incompatible information are same See parameters in Group 33 Information 336 Fault tracing Fault messages generated by the drive CODE FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO 0001 OVERCURRENT Output current has Ch
218. ation UL open 3AUA0000051109 A Dimension drawings 369 Frame size R3 NEMA 1 72 D 1 4 Ho lo 9j S 14 Frame size R3 IP20 NEMA 1 J di li I 3AUA0000051118 A 370 Dimension drawings Frame size R4 IP20 cabinet installation UL open TI Y E019 ESI 0 0 0 0 00 gt mm rail 35 bi yo de 8 oj es o Se est z Ms oo 2 e e ee es esi es LO 1 Frame size R4 IP20 cabinet installation UL open 3AUA0000051130 A Dimension drawings 371 Frame size R4 NEMA 1 rt L 1 Sr e ofp i
219. ayaa WR RERO Ri i 352 Losses cooling data and noise 0 2 0 tee 353 Losses and cooling data 3 pro R4 vr Rea re er ES PERPE RES LR qvx DRE Ra EE 353 NOISE me PCIE DEA 354 Terminal and lead through data for the power Gabes 354 Terminal and lead through data for the control cables 354 Electric power network specification 355 Motor connection data sesers estne ee isa See ek ba te ee bee bed eg ios te 355 Control connection data 356 E fICIOn Cy no reb t sor are tank Sc cube ut eo EE Eo ente ebat eed e bre Degrees of protection Ambient conditions 42 2 ssa EUER EEN REG RR hi UR beeen ahaa ee Materials Seeds eles Ries qud epa er euo vu mdi i Deb E dd Applicable standards GE marking orc ime pre RD eda RR EE bRENEI LA UNE EE nb PPSP RES Compliance with the European EMC Directive 359 Compliance with EN 61800 3 2004 issssssslsesesee aaan 359 Definitions ETT 359 Category 2 EE 359 Category C3 EE 360 BI gm FT 360 Ul checklist s 5p dne Lh RR bte x ode x rede te op bed ae Yen e DOLI d 360 eiTe dur dll MP mmm 361 ROHS marking i ics ssec pst rape eee eta eee ee Reo 361 Liability litmillS sireni preninte the eae beer e or ree noted e rw e Rn d A 362 Patent protectioniin the USA csse E E RR XGA GR DOR UA Ree NEEN 362 15 Dimension drawings Frame sizes RO and R1 IP20 cabinet installation UL open esesssse 364 Frame sizes RO and R1 IP20 NEMA 1 lsesseelee een ee
220. back and automatically adjusts the speed of the drive to match the two signals The difference between the two signals is the error value Typically PID control mode is used when the speed of a fan or pump needs to be controlled based on pressure flow or temperature In most cases when there is only 1 transducer signal wired to the ACS320 only parameter group 40 is needed A Schematic of setpoint feedback signal flow using parameter group 40 is presented Panel REF1 P 1101 5 REF1 Panel REF 2 P1106 0 17 REF2 500 PID Setpoint nn Panel REF2 500 19 Al P40T6 G40 Sumen PID1 PANEL orque Hand Auto Power Selection AI IP4017 1P4014HP4015 HAND Qurrent PID Act Value orque AUTO Power Panel REF 1 P1103 P1102 Die um og EXT 1 P11 Al Speed aid Comm REF 1 EXT2 Panel REF 2 Bi P1106 G12 Cons Alz Speed Comm REF 2 P1106 Panel REF2 454910 PID Setpoint 0 17 P1107 eel P4012 P1108 Comm P4013 ri Internal G40 AI P4016 PID1 Current PID1 Out Torque Powa HP4014F1P4015 P Current 4017 PID Act Value Torque Power
221. bject ind Active Inactive Present Value Name Description Text Access Type BOO RO1 This object controls the output ON OFF C COMMAND state of Relay 1 This control requires that parameter 1401 value COMM BO1 RO2 This object controls the output ON OFF C COMMAND state of Relay 2 This control requires that parameter 1402 value COMM also requires MREL 01 option BO2 RO3 This object controls the output ON OFF C COMMAND state of Relay 3 This control requires that parameter 1403 value COMM also requires MREL 01 option BO3 RO4 This object controls the output ON OFF C COMMAND state of Relay 4 This control requires that parameter 1410 value COMM also requires MREL 01 option Note For Present Value Access Types R z Read only W Writeable C Commandable Commandable values support priority arrays amp relinquish defaults E Binary Value Object Instance Summary The following table summarizes the Binary Value Objects supported Instance A Bett Active Inactive Present Value ID Object Name Description Text Access Type BVO RUN STOP ACT This object indicates the RUN STOP R drive Run Status regardless of the control source BV1 FWD REV ACT This object indicates the REV FWD R motor s rotation direction regardless of the control source BV2 FAULT ACT this object indicates the FAULT OK R drive s fault status BV3 EXT 1 2 ACT This object indicates which EXT2 EXT1 R contr
222. ble to delay the state change of digital inputs with delays defined in group Group 18 FREQ IN amp TRAN OUT This enables very simple program sequences by connecting several functions with the same physical wire eg to remove branches and leaves from a pipe by running the fan in reverse before normal operation One digital input DI5 can be programmed as a frequency input See section Frequency input on page 100 B Settings Parameter Additional information Group 10 AcStart Stop Dir DI as start stop direction Group 11 Reference Select DI in reference selection or reference source Group 12 Constant Speeds DI in constant speed selection Group 16 System Controls DI as external Run Enable fault reset or user macro change signal Group 18 FREQ IN amp TRAN OUT Delays in DI state changes 2109 DI as external emergency stop command source 2201 DI as acceleration and deceleration ramp selection signal 2209 DI as zero ramp force signal 3003 DI as external fault source Group 35 Motor Temp Meas DI in motor temperature measurement 3601 DI as timed function enable signal source 3622 DI as booster activation signal source 4010 4110 4210 DI as PID controller reference signal source 4022 4122 DI as sleep function activation signal in PID1 4027 DI as PID1 parameter set 1 2 selection signal source 4034 4035 DI as PID reference output freezing source 4039 4139 DI as
223. bles the Start inhibit function 2109 EM STOP SEL 6 6 1 0 Defines control of the Emergency stop command When activated Emergency stop decelerates the motor using the emergency stop ramp parameter 2208 EM DEC TIME Requires an external stop command and removal of the emergency stop command before drive can restart 0 NOT SEL Disables the Emergency stop function through digital inputs 1 Di Defines digital input DI1 as the control for Emergency stop command Activating the digital input issues an Emergency stop command De activating the digital input removes the Emergency stop command 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for Emergency stop command See DI1 above 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI as the control for Emergency stop command De activating the digital input issues an Emergency stop command Activating the digital input removes the Emergency stop command 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for Emergency stop command See DI1 INV above 2110 TORQ BOOST CURR 15 300 1 100 Sets the maximum supplied current during torque boost See parameter 2101 START FUNCTION 2113 START DELAY Defines the Start delay After the conditions for start have been fulfilled the drive waits until the delay has elapsed and then starts the motor Start delay can be used with all start modes f STA
224. cation The drive reference can be given with frequency input It is possible to scale the external reference so that the signal minimum and maximum values correspond to a speed other than the minimum and maximum speed limits B Settings Parameter Additional information Group 11 Reference Select External reference source type and scaling Group 20 Limits Operating limits Group 22 Accel Decel Speed reference acceleration deceleration ramps Group 32 Supervision Reference supervision B Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0111 0112 REF1 REF2 reference Group 03 Actual Signals References in different stages of the reference processing chain Program features 97 Reference trimming In reference trimming the external reference is corrected depending on the measured value of a secondary application variable The block diagram below illustrates the function Switch 2 Select 1105 REF1 MAX 2 DIRECT 2 1108 REF 2 MAX Ba REFI max freq Hz rpm Lei PROPOR 1 ETEO REF1 Hz rpm 0 NOT SEL 0 REF2 95 Add 4230 Mul Mul Switch 4231 TRIM SCALE PID2 ref pip PID2 A PID2 act output i 4232 CORRECTION SRC REF1 Hz rpm REF2 96 2 The drive reference before trimming REF The drive reference aft
225. ce functions are only valid in local control LOC mode Start Up 61 B Parameters Mode To change the parameters follow these steps Select MENU to enter the main menu hs Select the Parameters mode with the UP DOWN buttons and select ENTER to select the 2 Parameters mode Select the appropriate parameter group with the UP DOWN buttons and select SEL Select the appropriate parameter in a group with the UP DOWN buttons Select EDIT to change 4 the parameter Press the UP DOWN buttons to change the parameter value pd epit ep CF Select SAVE to store the modified value or select CANCEL to leave the set mode 6l Any modifications not saved are cancelled Eachindividual parameter setting is valid immediately after pressing SAVE Select EXIT to return to the listing of parameter groups and again to return to the main menu C7 al wf To complete the control connections by manually entering the parameters see Parameters Mode in the this section 62 Start Up For detailed hardware description see the Appendix Note The current parameter value appears below the highlighted parameter Note To view the default parameter value press the UPIDOWN buttons simultaneously Note The most typical and necessary parameters to change are parameter groups 99 Start up data 10 Start Stop Dir 11 Reference Select 20 Limits 21 Start S
226. ck parameter sssssesssss 161 low frequency PFA parameters 242 M macros booster pump iissa 81 conderiset euet eec 80 cooling tower fan seen 79 dual setpoint w PID sseees 86 dual setpoint w PID amp const speeds 87 floating point oeiee 85 Nana Ke ei te WEE 89 HVACG defau lt 5 525 d enssseXene 76 internal timen 1 tet 83 internal timer w constant speeds 84 le DEE 74 return TAE tagged 78 Supply fan hee 77 to select 1 ione ces 75 mailbox EFB comm eeeeeeeene 271 mains see input power maintenance CAPACIOMS e ice detis 346 Control panel ep 347 drive module fan sssssusss 345 IEEE 345 intervals c2 thn A onsen 344 triggers parameter group 179 manuals 2 oh aee ree ced 2 mapping EFB modbus eeeeeeee 308 Materials 1 i RR nup 358 maximum frequency parameter 170 metasys connection diagram companion 277 connection diagram system 276 Integration s eere e ctt t dete 276 minimum frequency parameter 170 modbus EFB addressing convention 309 EFB coil sit 5 me el 309 EFB discrete inputs 310 EFB holding registers 312 EFB input
227. ction changes Locks direction or enables direction control To select between the two external locations use the next group parameter 1102 Group 10 AcStart Stop Dir Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 0 14 1 1 Y Defines external control location 1 ExT1 the configuration of start stop and direction commands 0 NOT SEL No external start stop and direction command source 1 DU Two wire Start Stop ER is through digital input DI1 D11 activated Start D11 de activated Op Parameter 1003 defines the direction Selecting 1003 3 request is the same as 1003 1 fwd 2 DI1 2 Two wire Start Stop Direction EDU is through digital input DI1 D11 activated Start D11 de activated Op Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 request is through digital input DI2 DI2 activated Reverse de activated Forward 3 DHP 2P Three wire Start Stop Start Stop commands are through momentary push buttons the P stands for pulse Start is through a normally open push button connected to digital input D11 In order to start the drive the digital input DI2 must be activated prior the pulse in Di Connect multiple Start push buttons in parallel Stop is through a normally closed push button connected to digital input D12 Connect multiple Stop push buttons in series Parameter 1003 defines the direction Selecting 10
228. ctive Drive runs at preset speed Drive ignores all keypad commands Drive ignores all commands from communication links Drive ignores all digital inputs except override activation deactivation RUN ENABLE and START ENABLE Drive displays alarm message 2020 OVERRIDE MODE The following faults are ignored 3 DEVICE OVERTEMP 5 OVERLOAD 6 DC UNDERVOLT 7 Ali LOSS 8 AI2 LOSS 9 MOTOR TEMP 10 PANEL LOSS 12 MOTOR STALL 14 EXTERNAL FLT 1 15 EXTERNAL FLT 2 17 UNDERLOAD 18 THERM FAIL 21 CURR MEAS 22 SUPPLY PHASE 24 OVERSPEED 28 SERIAL 1 ERR 29 EFB CONFIG FILE 30 FORCE TRIP 31 EFB 1 Actual signals and parameters 165 32 EFB2 33 EFB 3 34 MOTOR PHASE 1001 PAR PFC REFNEG 1002 PAR PFC IOCONF 1003 PAR Al SCALE 1004 PAR AO SCALE 1006 PAR EXTROMISSING 1007 PAR FBUSMISSING 1008 PAR PFCWOSCALAR Commissioning the Override Mode 4 5 Enter the parameters in all groups as needed except group 17 Select the digital input that will activate override mode P1701 Enter the frequency or speed reference for override mode P1702 and P1703 according to the motor control mode P9904 Enter the pass code P1704 358 Enable the override mode P1705 Changing the Override Parameters le Boom If override mode is already enabled disable it Enter the pass code P1704 Disable the override mode P1705
229. ctual signals and parameters 195 Group 35 Motor Temp Meas Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3502 INPUT SELECTION 1 8 1 1 Defines the input used for the temperature sensor 12A PT100 and PTC 2 AI2 PT100 and PTC 3 8 DI1 DI6 Thermistor 3503 ALARM LIMIT 10 200 C 1 110 C 0 5000 Ohm 1500 Ohm 0 1 0 Defines the alarm limit for motor temperature measurement At motor temperatures above this limit the drive displays an alarm 2010 MOTOR OVERTEMP For thermistors 0 de activated 1 activated 3504 FAULT LIMIT 10 200 C 1 130 C 0 5000 Ohm 4000 Ohm 0 1 0 Defines the fault limit for motor temperature measurement At motor temperatures above this limit the drive displays a fault 9 MOTOR OVERTEMP and stops the drive For thermistors 0 de activated 1 activated 3505 AO EXCITATION 0 Enables current feed from analog output AO Parameter setting overrides parameter group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS settings With PTC the output current is 1 6 mA With Pt 100 the output current is 9 1 mA 0 disabled 1 enabled 196 Actual signals and parameters B Group 36 Timer Functions This group defines the timer functions The timer functions include Four daily start and stop times Four weekly start stop and boost times Four timers for collecting selected periods together A timer can be connected to multiple time periods and a time per
230. cy of the drive Tw Motor torque Loss of supply voltage at nominal load foy 40 Hz The intermediate circuit DC voltage drops to the minimum limit The controller keeps the voltage steady as long as the input power is switched off The drive runs the motor in generator mode The motor speed falls but the drive is operational as long as the motor has enough kinetic energy B Settings Parameter 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL Program features 103 DC Magnetizing When DC Magnetizing is activated the drive automatically magnetizes the motor before starting This feature guarantees the highest possible breakaway torque up to 180 of the motor nominal torque The Automatic Start feature and DC Magnetizing cannot be activated at the same time B Settings Parameters 2101 START FUNCTION and 2703 DC MAGN TIME Maintenance trigger A maintenance trigger can be activated to show a notice on the panel display when eg drive power consumption has exceeded the defined trigger point B Settings Parameter Group 29 Maintenance Trig Acceleration and deceleration ramps Two user selectable acceleration and Motor speed deceleration ramps are available It is possible to 4 lines adjust the acceleration deceleration times and Melo o the ramp shape Switching between the two ramps can be controlled via a digital input or fieldbus pus S curve The available ramp shape alternatives are Linear and S curve Linear Suitable for drives req
231. d 1 READY 0 NOTRDY 28 AT SETPOINT Indicates the drive has reached its commanded setpoint 1 YES 0 NO 29 DAY NIGHT 1 of the 5 mandatory FLN points required for compatibility None with Siemens control systems It has no functionality in the drive application 30 CURRENT LIM Sets the output current limit of the drive 2003 31 ACCEL TIME 1 Sets the acceleration time for Ramp 1 2202 32 DECEL TIME 1 Sets the deceleration time for Ramp 1 2203 33 HANDAUTO Indicates whether the drive is in Hand or Auto control ACT 1 HAND 0 AUTO 34 ENA DIS ACT Indicates the status of the Run Enable command regardless of its source 1 ENABLE 0 DISABL 35 ENA DIS CMD Commanded by FLN to assert the Run Enable command 1 ENABLE 0 DISABL Parameter 1601 must be set to COMM for FLN to have this control 36 FLN LOC ACT Indicates if the drive has been placed in FLN LOCAL mode by commanding either point 68 FLN LOC CTL or point 69 FLN LOC REF Commanding either of these points to FLN 1 steals control from its normal source and places in under FLN control Note that the HAND mode of the panel has priority over FLN local control Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 293 FLN Detailed Point Descriptions Point Description Drive Parameter 37 FLN CTL SRC Indicates if FLN is a source for control inputs 1 YES 0 NO Note that this status point is true if any o
232. d 3 selected in the timer 7 P3 P2 P1 Time Periods 1 2 and 3 selected in the timer 8 P4 Time Period 4 selected in the timer 9 P4 P1 Time Periods 4 and 1 selected in the timer 10 P4 P2 Time Periods 4 and 2 selected in the timer 11 P4 P2 P1 Time Periods 4 2 and 1 selected in the timer 12 P4 P3 Time Periods 4 and 3 selected in the timer 13 P4 P3 P1 Time Periods 4 3 and 1 selected in the timer 14 P4 P3 P2 Time Periods 4 3 and 2 selected in the timer 15 P4 P3 P2 P1 Time Periods 4 3 2 and 1 selected in the timer 16 BOOSTER B Booster selected in the timer 17 B P1 Booster and Time Period 1 selected in the timer 18 B P2 Booster and Time Period 2 selected in the timer 19 B P2 P1 Booster and Time Periods 1 and 2 selected in the timer 20 B P3 Booster and Time Period 3 selected in the timer function 21 B P3 P1 Booster and Time Period 3 and 1 selected in the timer 22 B P3 P2 Booster and Time Periods 3 and 2 selected in the timer 23 B P3 P2 P1 Booster and Time Periods 3 2 and 1 selected in the timer 24 B P4 Booster and Time Periods 4 selected in the timer 25 B P4 P1 Booster and Time Period 4 and Timer 1 selected in the timer 26 B P4 P2 Booster and Time Period 4 and 2 selected in the timer 27 B P4 P2 P1 Booster and Time Periods 4 2 and 1 selected in the time
233. d Od Last reset date of the peak logger and amplitude logger 2 Day of the last reset Format Date if the real time clock is operating The number of days elapsed after the power on if the real time clock is not used or was not set 6413 TIME OF RESET 2 00 00 00 00 00 00 23 59 58 Last reset time of the peak logger and amplitude logger 2 6414 ALTRANGEOTO 10 0 0 100 0 1 0 1 0 0 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current 0 10 distribution 6415 ALTRANGE10TO20 0 0 100 0 1 0 1 0 0 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current 10 20 distribution 6416 AL1RANGE20T0O30 0 0 100 0 1 0 1 0 0 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current 20 30 distribution 6417 AL1RANGE30TO40 0 0 100 0 1 0 1 0 0 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current 30 40 distribution 6418 AL1RANGE40TO50 0 0 100 0 1 0 1 0 0 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current 40 50 distribution 6419 AL1RANGE50TO60 0 0 100 0 1 0 1 0 0 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current 40 50 distribution 6420 AL1RANGE60TO70 0 0 100 0 1 0 1 0 0 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current 40 50 distribution 6421 AL1RANGE70TO80 0 0 100 0 1 0 1 0 0 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current 40 50 distribution 6422 AL1RANGE80TO90 0 0 100 0 1 0 1 0 0 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal curre
234. d TIMED FUNC 2 which internal setpoint is used as the reference 1 timed function active 0 timed function inactive TIMED TIMED Internal setpoint selected FUNC 1 FUNC 2 0 0 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT 1 0 4036 INTERNAL SETPNT2 0 1 4037 INTERNAL SETPNT3 1 1 4038 INTERNAL SETPNT4 B Group 41 Process PID Set 2 This group defines second set of parameters used with the Process PID PID1 controller The operation of parameters 4101 4139 is analogous with Process PID set 1 PID1 parameters 4001 4039 PID parameter set 2 can be selected by parameter 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET Group 41 Process PID Set 2 Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4101 B Group 42 External PID This group defines the parameters used for the second PID controller PID2 of ACS320 The operation of parameters 4201 4221 is analogous with Process PID set 1 PID1 parameters 4001 4021 Group 42 External PID Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4201 220 Actual signals and parameters Group 42 External PID Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4228 ACTIVATE 6 12 1 Defines the source for enabling the external PID function Requires 4230 TRIM MODE 0 NOT SEL 0 NOT SEL Disables external PID control 1 Di Defines digital input DI1 as the control for enabling external PID control Activating the dig
235. data on page 348 for the EMC requirements A symmetrical shielded motor cable see the figure below must be used to meet the EMC requirements of the CE and C Tick marks A four conductor system is allowed for input cabling but a shielded symmetrical cable is recommended Compared to a four conductor system the use of a symmetrical shielded cable reduces electromagnetic emission of the whole drive system as well as motor bearing currents and wear W Alternative power cable types Power cable types that can be used with the drive are presented below Motor cables Note A separate PE conductor is required recommended for input cables also if the conductivity of the cable shield is not sufficient for the purpose Symmetrical shielded cable three phase conductors a concentric or otherwise symmetrically constructed PE conductor and a shield PE hiel conductor Shiela Shield and shield PE ePE Allowed as input cables Shield A four conductor system three phase conductors and a protective conductor PE PE B Motor cable shield To function as a protective conductor the shield must have the same cross sectional area as the phase conductors when they are made of the same metal To effectively suppress radiated and conducted radio frequency emissions the shield conductivity must be at least 1 10 of the phase conductor conductivity The requirements are easily met with a copper or aluminium shield The minimum
236. dbus for relay output control requires Drive parameter values set as defined below Fieldbus controller supplied reference word s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Protocol Reference Drive Parameter Value Setting Modbus dcu N2 FLN BACnet abb drv profile 1401 RELAY 35 Relay Output 1 40134 bit O or BO7 40 BOO OUTPUT 1 COMM controlled by fieldbus 00033 1402 RELAY 35 Relay Output 2 40134 bit 1 or BO8 41 BO OUTPUT 2 COMM controlled by fieldbus 00034 1403 RELAY 35 Relay Output 3 40134 bit 2 or BO9 42 BO2 OUTPUT 3 COMM controlled by fieldbus 00035 268 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Protocol Reference Drive Parameter Value Setting Modbus dcu N2 FLN BACnet abb drv profile 1410 RELAY 35 Relay Output 4 40134 bit 3 or BO10 43 BO3 OUTPUT 4 COMM controlled by fieldbus 00036 1 More than 1 relay requires the addition of a relay extension module For example To control relays 1 and 2 using serial communication Set parameters 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 and 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 1 35 COMM Then for example using N2 To turn Relay 1 On Force object B07 to On To turn Relay 2 On Force object B08 to On To turn both Relay 1 and 2 On Force objects B07 and B08 On Note Relay status feedback occurs without configuratio
237. ddress If two or more devices have the same address parameter 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS value increases with every read write command What to do Checkthe device addresses No two devices on line may have the same address B Incorrect wiring If the communication wires are swapped terminal A on one device is connected to terminal B on another device parameter 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES value remains unchanged and parameter 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS increases What to do Check the RS 232 485 interface connection 344 Maintenance and hardware diagnostics Maintenance and hardware diagnostics What this chapter contains The chapter contains preventive maintenance instructions and LED indicator descriptions Maintenance intervals If installed in an appropriate environment the drive requires very little maintenance The table lists the routine maintenance intervals recommended by ABB Maintenance Interval Instruction Reforming of capacitors Every year when stored See Capacitors on page 346 Check of dustiness corrosion and temperature Every year Replacement of the cooling fan frame sizes R1 R4 Every three years See Cooling fan on page 345 Check and tightening of the power terminals Every six years See Power connections on page 346 Replacement of the battery in the Assistant Control Panel Every ten years See Changing the battery in the Assistant Contr
238. de Code Code omn wow E mA 2 on wu STOP RUN E WD REV FWD REV FAULT OK FLT OFF S Opp S Opp Opp d RELAY 1 RELAY 2 RELAY 3 RELAY 4 v Met T e MAT x TI T UT XU Ug 2 T 31 UT 4 UT 5 ON ON ON ON OFF E ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 2 ON 1 2 AUTO CE R REDY GI x si H DD mmm nm ETPT ENAB r N2 LOC M N2 CTRL N2_R1SRC N2_R2SRC REF REF 2 ACCEL 1 DECEL 1 CURR LIM EXT1 EXT2 HAND AUTO RI m OFF ON OFF ON NO YES 7 NO YES P NO YES AUTO N2 Lin NO YES 2 NO YES y NO YES s s AM 282 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus CSAO AO6 Y Y PID1_GN DBAD AGUA Y y ETDQ E Her CSAO AO8 Y Y PID1_D s CSAO AD9 Y Y PID1 FLT s CSAO AOI0 Y Y PID2 GN CSAO AGLI PIDO IW hg CSAO ADI2U Y v RBIDO Dj eM CSAO ACIA v Y DIDA FLT s CSAO AO14 Y Y CMD AO 1 CSAO ADIGU Y v PIS SEN 9 CSAO AO17 Y Y MIN SPD VS CSAO AO18 Y Y MAX SPD CSAO AO19 Y Y MB PARAM CSAO AO20 Y Y MB DATA CSBO BOL vov START Stor START CSBO BO2 Y Y REVERSE FWD REV CSBO BO3 Y Y PAN LOCK OPEN
239. e Source Group 44 Pump Protection Al as pump protection measurement source B Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0120 0121 Analog input values 1401 Al1 A2 signal loss Alarm Al1 LOSS Al2 LOSS Al1 Al2 signal below Al1 Al2 FAULT LIMIT 3021 3022 Fault Al1 LOSS Al2 LOSS Al1 Al2 signal below limit Al1 Al2 FAULT LIMIT 3021 3022 PAR Al SCALE Incorrect Al signal scaling 1302 1301 or 1305 lt 1304 Programmable analog output One programmable current output 0 20 mA is available Analog output signal can be inverted filtered and the maximum and minimum values can be adjusted The analog output signals can be proportional to motor speed output frequency output current motor torque motor power etc The update cycle for the analog output is 2ms It is also possible to write a value to an analog output through a serial communication link B Settings Parameter Additional information Group 15 Analog Outputs AO value selection and processing Group 35 Motor Temp Meas AO in motor temperature measurement B Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0124 AO value Fault PAR AO SCALE Incorrect AO signal scaling 1503 1502 Program features 99 Programmable digital inputs The drive has five programmable digital inputs The update time for the digital inputs is 2 ms It is possi
240. e given reference See table below Step CONTROL WORD Value Description 1 CW 0000 0000 0000 0110 l bit 15 bit 0 This CW value changes the drive state to READY TO SWITCH ON 322 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Step CONTROL WORD Value Description 2 Wait at least 100 ms before proceeding 3 CW 0000 0000 0000 0111 This CW value changes the drive state to READY TO OPERATE 4 CW 0000 0000 0000 1111 This CW value changes the drive state to OPERATION ENABLED The drive starts but will not accelerate 5 CW 0000 0000 0010 1111 This CW value releases the ramp function generator RFG output and changes the drive state to RFG ACCELERATOR ENABLED 6 CW 0000 0000 0110 1111 This CW value releases the ramp function generator RFG output and changes the drive state to OPERATING The drive accelerates to the given reference and follows the reference Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 323 The state diagram below describes the start stop function of CONTROL WORD CW and STATUS WORD SW bits for the ABB Drives profile From any state From any state From any state Emergency Stop Emergency Off Fault OFF3 CW Bit2 0 OFF2 CW Bit1 0 OFF3 OFF2 SW Bit5 0 ACTIVE ACTIVE SW Bit4 0 FAULT SW Bit3 1 f 0 1 0 i CW Bit7 1 Vy From any state SWITCH ON OFF1 CW Bit0 0 MAINS OFF INHIBITED SW Bit6 1 f 0 1 0 Power O
241. e location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Protocol Reference Drive Parameter Value Setting Modbus dcu N2 FLN BACnet abb drv profile 1102 EXT1 ExT2 8 COMM Reference set 40001 40031 BO5 26 BV13 SEL selection by fieldbus bit 11 bit 5 1103 REF1 SEL 8 COMM Input reference 1 by 40002 AO1 60 AV16 fieldbus 1106 REF2 SEL 8 COMM Input reference 2 by 40003 AO2 61 AV17 fieldbus Reference Scaling Where required REFERENCES can be scaled See the following as appropriate Modbus Register 40002 in the Modbus Protocol Technical Data section Reference Scaling in the ABB Control Profiles Technical Data section N2Analog Output Objects in the N2 Protocol Technical Data section The slope of points 60 and 61 in the FLN Protocol Technical Data section Miscellaneous Drive Control NOTE The user should change only the parameters for the functions you wish to control vial fieldbus All other parameters should typically remain at factory default For simple start stop and speed reference fieldbus control only parameters 1001 and 1103 need to be changed to comm Using the fieldbus for miscellaneous drive control requires Drive parameter values set as defined below Fieldbus controller supplied reference word s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent
242. e 0 DISABLE 4110 setpoint sel 19 INTERNAL 3107 arai min 0 DISABLE 4111 internal setpnt 100 096 88 Start Up B E Clipse This macro configures for an E Clipse Bypass device which can bypass the drive and connect the motor direct on line When using direct speed reference in AUTO mode or process PID see General Considerations on page 73 IA SCR Signal cable shield screen 2 AM Not configured 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC 5 Al2 Not configured 6 7 8 AGND Analog input circuit common AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA AGND Analog output circuit common 9 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC r 10 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 11 DCOM Digital input common for all 12 DI1 Not configured 13 DI2 Not configured 14 DI3 Not configured 15 DI4 Not configured 16 DI5 Not configured X1B 17 RO1C Relay output 1 P 1401 18 RO1A x Default operation Fault 1 2220 connected to 22 19 RO1B E 20 RO2C Digital output P 1805 21 RO2A x Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 22 RO2B Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9902 applic macro 15 e clipse 5303 efbbaud rate 76 8 kb s 9802 comm proto sel 1 std modbus 5304 efb parity 2 8 even 1 1001 exti commands 10 com
243. e PFA automatically stops an auxiliary pump The PFA also increases the speed of the first pump to account for the auxiliary pump s missing output An Interlock function when enabled identifies off line out of service motors and the PFA skips to the next available motor in the sequence An Autochange function when enabled and with the appropriate switchgear equalizes duty time between the pump motors Autochange periodically increments the position of each motor in the rotation the speed regulated motor becomes the last auxiliary motor the first auxiliary motor becomes the speed regulated motor etc 240 Actual signals and parameters Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution Default S 8103 REFERENCE STEP 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 1 Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference Applies only when at least one auxiliary constant speed motor is running Default value is 0 Example An ACS320 operates three parallel pumps that maintain water pressure in a pipe 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT sets a constant pressure reference that controls the pressure in the pipe The speed regulated pump operates alone at low water consumption levels As water consumption increases first one constant speed pump operates then the second As flow increases the pressure at the output end of the pipe drops relative to the pressure measured at the input end As auxiliary motors step in to increase
244. e Parameter Value 9902 applic macro 10 FLOATINGPNT 3416 signal 3 min 200 0 1103 refi sel 7 DI5U 6D 3417 signal 3 max 200 0 1401 relay output 1 7 STARTED 3419 output 3 dsp unit 4 96 1601 run enable 2 DI2 3420 output 3 min 200 0 3207 superv 3 param 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 3421 output 3 max 200 0 3415 signal 3 param 0105 TORQUE 86 Start Up B Dual Setpoint with PID This macro configures for dual setpoint PID applications where activating digital input 3 DI3 changes the process PID controller s setpoint to another value When using direct speed reference in AUTO mode or process PID see General Considerations on page 73 Set process PID setpoints internal to the drive using parameters 4011 SET1 and 4111 SET2 X1A Ce 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen 2 AM External reference 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC 5 AI2 PID feedback 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common m 447 AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA V 748 AGND Analog output circuit common r 49 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC r 10 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 11 DCOM Digital input common for all lt 4112 DI1 Start Stop Activate to start drive I 413 DI2
245. e actual value of the drive s run time counter The parameter is reset by writing 0 0 to it 2907 USER MWh TRIG 0 0 6553 5 MWh 0 1 MWh 0 0 Sets the trigger point for the drive s accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours counter 0 0 NOT SEL 2908 USER MWh ACT 0 0 6553 5 MWh 0 1 MWh 0 0 Defines the actual value of the drive s accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours counter The parameter is reset by writing 0 0 to it 180 Actual signals and parameters E Group 30 Fault Functions This group defines situations that the drive should recognize as potential faults and defines how the drive should respond if the fault is detected Group 30 Fault Functions Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3001 Al lt MIN FUNCTION 0 3 1 0 Defines the drive response if the analog input Al signal drops below the fault limits and Al is used in reference chain e 3021 Al1 FAULT LIMIT and 3022 AG FAULT LIMIT set the fault limits 0 NOT SEL No response 1 FAULT Displays a fault 7 Al1 LOSS or 8 AG LOSS and the drive coasts to stop 2 CONST SP7 Displays a warning 2006 Al1 Loss or 2007 AI2 LOSS and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7 3 LAST SPEED Displays a warning 2006 Ali LOSS or 2007 AI2 LOSS and sets speed using the last operating level This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds Warning If you select CONST SP7 or LAST SPEED make sure
246. e at pump fan Check for a closed valve on the inlet 8A81 inlet too low side of the pump fan 0307 bit 6 Check piping for leaks See parameter Group 44 Pump Protection 340 Fault tracing CODE FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO 0041 OUTLET VERY HIGH 8A83 0307 bit 7 Pressure at pump fan outlet too high Check piping for blocks See parameter Group 44 Pump Protection 0042 INLET LOW 8A80 0307 bit 8 Pressure at pump fan inlet too low Check for a closed valve on the inlet side of the pump fan Check piping for leaks See parameter Group 44 Pump Protection 0043 OUTLET HIGH 8A82 0307 bit 9 Pressure at pump fan outlet too high Check piping for blocks See parameter Group 44 Pump Protection 0101 SERF CORRUPT FF55 0307 bit 14 0103 SERF MACRO FF55 0307 bit 14 0201 DSP T1 OVERLOAD 6100 0307 bit 13 0202 DSP T2 OVERLOAD 6100 0307 bit 13 0203 DSP T3 OVERLOAD 6100 0307 bit 13 0204 DSP STACK ERROR 6100 0307 bit 12 0206 CB ID ERROR 5000 0307 bit 11 Drive internal error Write down fault code and contact your local ABB representative 1000 PAR HZRPM 6320 0307 bit 15 Incorrect frequency limit parameter setting Check parameter settings Check that following applies 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 9907 MO
247. e eee e eee 118 156 application block output data parameter 131 application macro parameter 128 130 134 139 141 143 applications see macros autochange interval parameter ssss 246 level parameter sssssssss 247 e EE 247 starting order counter 248 automatic reset see reset automatic auxiliary motor see motor auxiliary B backing up parameters Assistant panel 65 backup drive parameters enirere 65 BACnet data link layer mirs asiirsiisitsrpideessincni a 303 magid asics Aa heh Dep RIS 303 max info frame property 304 MS TP token counter 304 object analog inputs 299 object analog outputs 300 object analog values 300 374 Index object binary inputs secc 296 object binary outputs 297 object binary values A 297 object definitions ssessssss 306 pics statement sooeeneeeeoeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeen ee 304 pics summary 303 services Supporten 303 support matrix sseeen 306 battery assistant control panel 347 maintenance procedure 347 baud rate RS232 parameter 233 binary input BACnet object listing
248. e insulation of the motor and motor cable as follows 1 Check that the motor cable is connected to the motor and disconnected from the drive output terminals U2 V2 and W2 2 Measure the insulation resistance between each phase conductor and the Protective Earth conductor using a measuring voltage of 500 V DC The insulation resistance of an ABB motor must exceed 10 Mohm reference value at 25 C or 77 F For the insulation resistance of other motors please consult the manufacturer s instructions Note Moisture inside the motor casing will reduce the insulation resistance If moisture is suspected dry the motor and repeat the measurement Checking the compatibility with IT ungrounded and corner grounded TN systems WARNING If a drive whose EMC filter is not disconnected is installed on an IT system an ungrounded power system or a high resistance grounded over 30 ohms power system the system will be connected to ground potential through the EMC filter capacitors of the drive This may cause danger or damage the drive If a drive whose EMC filter is not disconnected is installed on a corner grounded TN system the drive will be damaged 1 If you have an IT ungrounded or corner grounded TN system disconnect the internal EMC filter by removing the EMC screw For 3 phase U type drives with type designation ACS320 03U the EMC screw is already removed at the factory and replaced by a plastic one Pd
249. e is no voltage present 2 Check the tightness of the power cable connections Use the tightening torques given in section Terminal and lead through data for the power cables on page 354 3 Restore power Maintenance and hardware diagnostics 347 Control panel B Cleaning the control panel Use a soft damp cloth to clean the control panel Avoid harsh cleaners which could scratch the display window B Changing the battery in the Assistant Control Panel A battery is only used in Assistant Control Panels that have the clock function available and enabled The battery keeps the clock operating in memory during power interruptions The expected life for the battery is greater than ten years To remove the battery use a coin to rotate the battery holder on the back of the control panel Replace the battery with type CR2032 Note The battery is NOT required for any control panel or drive functions except the clock LEDs There is a green and a red LED on the front of the drive They are visible through the panel cover but invisible if a control panel is attached to the drive The Assistant Control Panel has one LED The table below describes the LED indications Where LED off LED lit and steady LED blinking On the front of No power Green Power supply on Green Drive in an alarm the drive the board OK state If a control panel is attached to the Red Drive in a fault Red Drive in a fault state i itch state
250. e prn eR sea eed ees ex voeem Connection procedure Connecting the control cables et Cult Default I O connection diagram Connection procedure cu oeste ved agr eR nr d E ENEE Connecting the embedded fieldbus Connection diagram Ve ies we e bxc Becr xa dE d DEDERE EY e RR 7 Installation checklist Checking the installation Table of contents 7 8 Start Up HVAC Control Panel Features 54 General Display Features 55 Start Up ciis ur REEL needed bly e phe Suen ed Ee rack RO D d ais pt 56 Start Up by Using the Start Up Assistant 56 Start Up by Changing the Parameters Individual 57 MOd OS Zug BEER RR RP OEC QNS M nS ud ee dt BOITE Standard Display Mode Parameters Mode edd er e EEN x ux Ra SR EROR NEE ENEE Hares Start Up Assistant Meder cook ce PEE ETARE 3 Reged P eR Changed Parameters Mode Fault Logger Mode isse ee m m hex Rx ELE er RE REY Drive Parameter Backup Mode Glock S t Mode cs e d penises PER dE EE AE RR GE DUREE VO Settings Mode Application MacroS iiie RR saa pee eee oe Le REPRE E p ER ERRARE RE EEEEA OVOFVIB Wand eroe m e eege o aer Pura General Considerations Application Macro Listing ek sea ies eee as tea keene bem OPE wd teagan Selecting an Application Macro Restoring Deraults i 522 xa tp Reb se exe deb eo Yap E Eo Re reo eas Control Witing 3 2 tremens eme prre one oa AE ELE eau eer Red dn HVAC Default tab Peart dues ea RON ew e RE SERE XE RR NER
251. e source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 11 DI3U 4D RNC Digital inputs acting as a motor potentiometer control provide reference DI3 increases the speed the U stands for up DI4 decreases the reference the D stands for down Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 controls the reference signal s rate of change R Stop command resets the reference to zero NC Reference value is not copied 12 DI3U 4D NC Same as DI3U 4D RNC above except Stop command does not reset reference to zero At restart the motor ramps up at the selected acceleration rate to the stored reference 13 DI5U 6D NC Same as DI3U 4D NC above except Uses digital inputs DI5 and DI6 14 2 Al AI2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 15 An AI2 Defines an analog input 1 A1 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 16 Al AI Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 17 Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 19 INTERNAL A constant value set using parameter 4011 provides reference Actual signals and
252. e time See group 45 ENERGY SAVING 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 1 1000 Currency Energy saved in local currency in thousand currency units Eg value 5 means 5000 currency units See parameter 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 Local energy price is set with parameter 4502 ENERGY PRICE Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET resets all energy calculators at the same time See group 45 ENERGY SAVING 0178 SAVED CO2 1 2 0 1 tn Reduction on carbon dioxide emissions in tn CO conversion factor is set with parameter 4507 CO2 CONV FACTOR Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY SE all energy calculators at the same time See group 45 ENERGY AVING 134 Actual signals and parameters E Group 03 Actual Signals This group monitors fieldbus communications Group 03 Actual Signals Code Description Range Resolution 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 Read only copy of the Fieldbus Command Word 1 The fieldbus command is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus controller The command consists of two Command Words Bit coded instructions in the Command Words switch the drive between states To control the drive using the Command Words an external location EXT1 or EXT2 must be active and set to comm See parameters 1001 and 1002 The control panel displays the word in hex For example all zeros and a 1 in Bit O displays as 0001 All zeros and a 1 in Blt
253. e top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information of the drive HAND Indicates that the drive control is local that is from the control panel AUTO Indicates that the drive control is remote such as the basic I O X1 or fieldbus e 2 Indicates the drive and motor rotation status as follows Control panel display Significance Rotating arrow clockwise or Drive is running and at setpoint counterclockwise Shaft direction is forward or reverse Rotating dotted arrow blinking Drive is running but not at setpoint Stationary dotted arrow Start command is present but motor is not running E g start enable is missing Upper right shows the active reference Middle Using parameter group 34 the middle of the LCD display can be configured to display One to three parameter values The default display shows parameters 0103 OUTPUT FREQ in percentages 0104 CURRENT in amperes and 0120 Al1 in milliamperes 60 Start Up Use parameters 3401 3408 and 3415 to select the parameters from Group 01 to display Entering parameter 0100 results in no parameter displayed For example if 3401 0100 and 3415 0100 then only the parameter specified by 3408 appears in the Control Panel display You can also scale each parameter in the display for example to convert the motor speed to a display of conveyor speed Parameters 3402 3405 scale the parameter specified
254. eceived from a transducer When using direct speed reference in AUTO mode or process PID see General Considerations on page 73 pi 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen 2 JAH External reference 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC 5 AIS PID feedback 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common 7 AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA 1 8 AGND Analog output circuit common 9 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC r 110 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 11 DCOM Digital input common for all 412 D1 Start Stop Activate to start drive I 413 DI2 Run permissive Deactivate to stop drive P 1601 I 4114 DIS Constant Preset speed 1 P 1202 I 3415 DI4 Safety interlock1 Deactivate to stop drive P 1608 7 16 DI5 Safety interlock2 Deactivate to stop drive P 1609 XTBrzTRO1C Relay output 1 P 1401 18 RO1A fN Default operation Started gt 17 connected to 19 19 RO1B 20 DOSRC Digital output max 100 mA P 1805 21 DOOUT Hp No fault Fault 1 gt 20 connected to 22 22 DOGND Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9902 applic macro 2 SUPPLYFAN 3207 superv 3 param 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 1401 relay output 1 7 STARTED 4001 ga
255. eck motor load 2310 exceeded trip level Check acceleration time 2202 and 0305 bit 0 2505 Check motor and motor cable including phasing Check ambient conditions Load capacity decreases if installation site ambient temperature exceeds 40 C See section Derating on page 350 0002 DC OVERVOLT Excessive Check that overvoltage controller is on 3210 intermediate circuit DC parameter 2505 OVERVOLT CTRL 0305 bit 1 voltage DC Check input power line for static or SE voltage imp ntt IS transient overvoltage Or riv Qiiod and 840 V for 400 T Check deceleration time 2203 2206 drives 0003 DEV OVERTEMP Drive IGBT Check ambient conditions See also 4210 temperature is section Derating on page 350 0305 bit 2 I pM a trip Check air flow and fan operation KS Check motor power against unit power 0004 SHORT CIRC Short circuit in motor Check motor and motor cable 2340 cable s or motor 0305 bit 3 0006 DC UNDERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC Check that undervoltage controller is 3220 voltage is not sufficient on parameter 2006 UNDERVOLT 0305 bit 5 due to missing input CTRL power line phase Check i f i blown fuse rectifier eck input power supply and fuses bridge internal fault or too low input power 0007 Al1 LOSS Analog input Al1 signal Check fault function parameter 8110 has fallen below limit settings j defined by parameter Check for proper anal trol signal 0305 bit 6 3021 AM FAULT
256. ections as appropriate N2 Analog Input Objects in the N2 Protocol Technical Data section Scaling Drive Feedback Values in the FLN Protocol Technical Data section Scaling does not apply for the BACnet protocol Diagnostics EFB E Fault Queue for Drive Diagnostics For general ACS320 diagnostics information see Diagnostics in the ACS320 User s Manual The three most recent ACS320 faults are reported to the fieldbus as defined below Drive Parametar Protocol Reference Modbus N2 FLN BACnet 0401 Last Fault 40401 17 90 AV18 0412 Previous Fault 1 40402 18 91 AV19 0413 Previous Fault 2 40403 19 92 AV20 B Serial Communication Diagnostics Network problems can be caused by multiple sources Some of these sources are Loose connections Incorrect wiring including swapped wires Bad grounding Duplicate station numbers Incorrect setup of drives or other devices on the network The major diagnostic features for fault tracing on an EFB network include Group 53 EFB Protocol parameters 5306 5309 The Parameter Descriptions section describes these parameters in detail E Diagnostic Situations The sub sections below describe various diagnostic situations the problem symptoms and corrective actions Normal Operation During normal network operation 5306 5309 parameter values act as follows at each drive 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES advances advances for each applicati
257. ed the default value for this parameter is 1 Note For a new address to take affect the drive power must be cycled OR 5302 must first be set to 0 before selecting a new address Leaving 5302 0 places the RS485 channel in reset disabling communication Sets MS TP MAC ID A temporary value of 0 places the protocol channel in reset Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 263 EFB Protocol Reference Descripti Code escription Modbus N2 FLN BACnet 5303 EFB BAUD RATE When this protocol is selected When this protocol is Defines the the default value for this selected the default value communication speed of Parameter is for this parameter is the RS485 link in kbits per 9 6 9 6 48 938400 second kbits s 1 2 kbits s 2 4 kbits s 4 8 kbits s 9 6 kbits s 19 2 kbits s 38 4 kbits s 57 6 kbits s 76 8 kbits s 5304 EFB PARITY When this When this protocol is selected the default Defines the data length protocolis value for this parameter is 0 arity and stop bits to be Selected Used with the RS485 link the default ande alae communication value for The same settings must be used in all on line parameter stations 0 8N1 8 data bits No parity one stop bit 1 8N2 8 data bits No parity two stop bits 2 8E1 8 data bits Even parity one stop bit 3 801 8 data bits Odd parity one stop bit 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE When this
258. edded fieldbus Mechanical and Electrical Installation EFB Warning Connections should be made only while the drive is disconnected from the power source Drive terminals 23 26 are for RS485 communications Use Belden 9842 or equivalent Belden 9842 is a dual twisted shielded pair cable with a wave impedance of 120 Use one of these twisted shielded pairs for the RS485 link Use this pair to connect all A terminals together and all B terminals together Use one of the wires in the other pair for the logical ground terminal 26 leaving one wire unused Do not directly ground the RS485 network at any point Ground all devices on the network using their corresponding earthing terminals As always the grounding wires should not form any closed loops and all the devices should be earthed to a common ground Connect the RS485 link in a daisy chained bus without dropout lines To reduce noise on the network terminate the RS485 network using 120 Q resistors at both ends of the network Use the DIP switch to connect or disconnect the termination resistors See following wiring diagram For configuration information see the following below Activate Drive Control Functions EFB on page 265 The appropriate EFB protocol specific technical data For example Modbus Protocol Technical Data on page 307 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 261 Preferred Wiring Diagram ACS320 EIA 485 Te
259. eeee eee 296 12 Table of contents Binary Output Object Instance Summary ilseeleeeeee eese 297 Binary Value Object Instance Summary 297 Analog Input Object Instance Summary 0 0000 ee 299 Analog Output Object Instance Summary 300 Analog Value Object Instance Summary 300 BACnet Quick Start Sequence 00 cee ett 302 Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement PIC 303 Statement sese Ee NEE Ee Pandang aeger ep E E 304 BACnet Object Definitions 306 Object Property Support Matrix 306 Modbus Protocol Technical Data 307 OVENWIEW A ATELIER AUR OR Re CRI RO NO ee RR OR Ro e bd Men bee 307 Modbus Addressing ee NEES RI meh t etm re RR eee ewe a 309 ABB Control Profiles Technical Data 315 QVENIEW oi tants oudus oven dam bivio Rx epp X VER CER a qe Haddad Cei 315 atus VV ONG EEN 318 State Diagram i ssocbeeiripeebice per etd beo E a Secr ee der Ad ks 321 Reference Scaling ordo eke areas et edP READ Pee bee 324 12 Fault tracing What this chapter COntalllS i mc khe enm Eben Ie exem OR be cR o d aene 328 SCIAT 328 Alarm and fault indications 0 0 0 0 III 328 HOW tO reset ci cse er Re px n hy ha rr RE Er DETER Pape TEE P ER 328 Fault histo y coca eut coit B Eon cec ee pee RU aao UR E e bob a ulti ERASE 329 Alarm messages generated by the drive 330 Alarms generated by the Basic Control Panel 333 Fault messages generated by the drive 336 Embedded fieldbus faute
260. eld siig tsek em ku E RELIER Lb ENOPIQEREDREBPU IIS IR Additional North American requirements sllesele eee Selecting the control cables sacra uk x ERI RR DR EELER DER General rules 33 m heo pe PREIS esa avete E ad asma m vem in ie Relay cable 4 casero RR Lr e nee BRA RR TA ERE ERR Reta pee E E Control panel cable ag shawty REI np remm iere ues erae Y Ra ERE d Reide BA Control cable ducis ssi ke de dee AE xU ede e oe Che Eo e e Protecting the drive input power cable motor and motor cable in short circuit situations and against thermal overload EEN NNN rab eR hy EE Protecting the drive and input power cable in short circuit situations Protecting the motor and motor cable in short circuit situations Protecting the drive motor cable and input power cable against thermal overload Protecting the motor against thermal overload Using residual current devices RCD with the drive Implementing a bypass connection Protecting the contacts of relay outputs 000 cee 6 Electrical installation What this chapter contains 0 0 0 eee Checking the insulation of the assembly RW Input power cable e eg s Seen Zu cere C SAR dees eR i SN geg Ee a Kack Motor and motor Cable 02 sse e E EE ba que eh CR YE g EE ane dx ed Checking the compatibility with IT ungrounded and corner grounded TN systems Connecting the power Cales Connection diagrams mre rn
261. eldbus communication settings 2022 START ENABLE 2 No Start Enable 2 Check parameter 7609 START MISSING 3009 bit 5 signal received ENABLE 2 settings Check digital input connections Check fieldbus communication settings 332 Fault tracing CODE ALARM CAUSE WHAT TO DO 2023 EMERGENCY Drive has received Check that it is safe to continue STOP emergency stop operation 3009 bit 6 command and ramps Return emergency stop push button to to stop according to normal position ramp time defined by parameter 2208 EMERG DEC TIME 2025 FIRST START Motor identification Wait until drive indicates that motor 3009 bit 8 magnetization is on identification is completed This alarm belongs to normal start up procedure 2027 USER LOAD Condition defined by See parameter Group 37 User Load CURVE 3701 USERLOAD C Curve 3009 bit 10 MODE has been valid longer than half of the time set by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 2028 START DELAY Start delay in progress See parameter 2113 START DELAY 3009 bit 11 2030 INLETLOW Pressure at pump fan Check for a closed valve on the inlet 3009 bit 13 inlet too low side of the pump fan Check piping for leaks See parameter Group 44 Pump Protection 2031 OUTLET HIGH Pressure at pump fan Check piping for blocks 3009 bit 14 outlet too high See parameter Group 44 Pump Protection 2032 PIPE FILL Pipe fill in progress See parameters 4421 4426
262. enabled 8778 AUTOCHNG INTERV gt 0 Parameter setting Relay assignment 1 T i 1 H Autochange enabled seele 1 RO1 RO2 RO3 RO4 1 2 3 0 7 31 31 X X 1 PFC PFC X X 31 31 31 X 2 PFC PFC PFC X X 31 31 X 1 X PFC PFC X 31 31 X X 0 PFC PFC X X 2 No auxiliary motors but the autochange function is in use Working as a standard PID control 246 Actual signals and parameters Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution Default S 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 1 336 0 h 1 0 1h NOT SEL Controls operation of the Autochange function and sets the interval between changes The Autochange time interval only applies to the time when the speed regulated motor is running See parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL for an overview of the Autochange function The drive always coasts to stop when autochange is performed Autochange enabled requires parameter 8120 INTERLOCKS gt 0 WARNING When enabled the Autochange function requires the interlocks 8120 INTERLOCKS gt 0 enabled During autochange the power output is interrupted and the drive coasts to stop preventing damage to the contacts Relay logic PFC with Autochange mode 0 1 TEST MODE Forces the interval to value 36 48 s 0 0 NOT SEL Disables the Autochange function The operating time interval the time when the start signal is on between automatic
263. energy saved in kWh and MWh energy saved in local currency as well as reduction in CO emission all compared to the situation when the pump is connected directly to the supply B Settings Parameter Additional information Group 45 Energy Savings Energy saving settings B Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0174 0175 Energy saved in KWh Mwh 0176 0177 Energy saved in local currency 0178 Reduction in COs emission Pump cleaning Pump cleaning sequence consists of cyclic forward and reverse steps See the figure below The pump cleaning cycle can be activated at start up with a user defined period with a selectable digital input or by the Supervision function for example triggered by the motor input current Forward Reverse step Y e 1 i i i i 1 i 1 i i i 4 gt it gt it 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 1 f i 1 i gt it y Reverse l b re re Trigger Forward Off Reverse Off Forward Off time time time time time time time Number of steps 122 Program features B Settings Parameter Additional information Group 46 Pump Cleaning Pump cleaning settings 2205 2206 Acceleration time 2 Deceleration time 2 Load analyzer The load analyzer can be used for analyzing the customer s process and sizing the drive and the motor The peak value is logged at 2 ms level and the di
264. entary operation avoids any need for an explicit command to clear the point before a subsequent reset can be issued 49 RESET KWH Commanded by FLN to reset the cumulative kilowatt hour counter 1 RESET 0 NO The control input is rising edge sensitive so once the command is issued this point automatically returns to its inactive state This momentary operation avoids any need for an explicit command to clear the point before a subsequent reset can be issued 50 PRC PID GAIN Sets the proportional gain of the active Process PID set 3 selected by Point 54 PRC PID SEL 1 SET2 0 ET1 4001 SET1 4101 SET2 51 PRC PID ITIM Sets the integration time of the active Process PID set as aces by Point 54 PRC PID SEL 1 SET2 0 ET1 4002 SET1 4102 SET2 52 PRC PID DTIM Sets the derivation time of the active Process PID set as selected by Point 54 PRC PID SEL 1 SET2 0 SET1 4001 SET1 4101 SET2 294 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus FLN Detailed Point Descriptions i inti Drive Point Description Parameter 53 PRC PID DFIL Sets the time constant for the error derivative of the active 4004 SET1 Process PID set as selected by Point 54 PRC PID SEL 4104 SET2 1 SET2 0 SET1 54 PRC PID SEL Selects the active Process PID set 1 SET2 0 SET1 4027 55
265. entification risinn 26 rating parameter ssseeeeeeese 188 temperature data parameter 130 Walght fu Le nen Ibi 352 drive input protection 39 drive on time data parameters 132 E earth fault falt Code gege ein ede duces 337 parameter iinnat ai 183 earthing see ground effICIenioy ui detener 356 embedded field bus see comm EFB EMC GE markirig deret 359 C Tick marking sees 361 motor cable requirements 35 emergency deceleration time parameter 174 stop select parameter 172 EN 61800 3 first environment restricted distribution radiation limits 359 unrestricted distribution radiation limits 360 enclosure protection class code 26 energy savings group eeee 228 environment first definition 359 second definition 359 error value inversion PID parameter 207 exception codes EFB modbus 314 external commands selection parameter 140 external control selection parameter 143 external fault automatic reset parameter 185 paramleters ie hotter eoe 180 external reference data parameter 130 F fan drive module maintenance interval 344
266. er 1208 CONST SPEED 7 acts also as a so called fault speed which may be activated if the control signal is lost For example see parameters 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION 3002 PANEL COMM ERROR and 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC Actual signals and parameters 149 Group 12 Constant Speeds Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 14 19 1 3 Y Defines the digital inputs used to select Constant Speeds See general comments in the introduction 0 NOT SEL Disables the constant speed function 12 DI1 Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input D11 Digital input activated Constant Speed 1 activated 2 5 DI2 DI5 Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input DI2 D15 See above 7 DI1 2 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI1 and D12 Uses two digital inputs as defined below 0 DI de activated 1 DI activated DIT DS Function 0 0 No constant speed 1 0 Constant speed 1 1202 0 1 Constant speed 2 1203 1 1 Constant speed 3 1204 Can be set up as a so called fault speed which is activated if the control signal is lost Refer to parameter 3001 Al MIN function and parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR 8 DI2 3 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI2 and DI3 See above DI1 2 for code 9 DI3 4 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI3 and D14 See above DI1 2 for code 10 D14 5
267. er Automation Inc Profibus is a registered trademark of Profibus Trade Org Profibus DP is a registered trademark of Siemens AG User s Manual ACS320 EHATE 4 Mechanical installation P 6 Electrical installation P 8 Start Up e 3AUA00000 Rev Rev B EN 2009 ABB Inc All Rights Reserved EFFECTIVE June 1 2009 Table of contents 5 Table of contents List of related manuals 2 324200 m eum rm e rer mer rr wr xu raa 2 1 Safety What this chapter contains 15 Use of warnings m e mm ay Rx yk RE ERU RO C a YU RR EORR SEE E 15 Safety in installation and maintenance 16 Electrical Salety te eeh uer ss Y a aia dch e Ger dc S E Ree acd Ren 16 EL ECKE EE 17 Safe start up and operation 0 0 0 eect e 17 General safety ca c sobre estre e use be eee en n ede eas PE zeg d 2 Introduction to the manual What this chapter contains Applicability NN EELER ne iti g KEPER PRE Ben EOE TS EE EELER ER Target audience icici ese ed isr cea ee eme ee RN RETE ERR ANNE EEN et Purpose of the manual g ere pro REESE dee dan oh aw ie eee eee EA Contents of this manual Related COHEN A 2a x tet Rede ted Zare Recht ee Rex dee Be ayo Bed Ae Categorization by fraMe S ZE 25 002 cage SEELEN ey aie eke RR onere ee e eee eas 20 Quick installation and commissioning flowchart 21 3 Operation principle and hardware description What this chapter contains soceri ree em rr e he xh y c e e ph eS 22 Operation
268. er trimming max freq par 2008 or 2007 if the absolute value is greater PID2 ref 2 par 4210 PID2 act par 4214 4221 1 REF1 or REF2 depending on which is active See parameter 1102 When par 4232 PID2REF the maximum trimming reference is defined by parameter 1105 when HEET is active and by parameter 7708 when REF2 is active When par 4232 PID2 OUTPUT the maximum trimming reference is defined by parameter 2008 value B Settings Parameter Additional information 1102 REF1 2 selection 4230 4232 Trimming function settings 4201 4221 4228 4229 PID control settings Group 20 Limits Drive operation limits Programmable analog inputs The drive has two programmable analog voltage current inputs The inputs can be inverted filtered and the maximum and minimum values can be adjusted The update cycle for the analog input is 8 ms 12 ms cycle once per second The cycle time is shorter when information is transferred to the application program 8 ms gt 2 ms 98 Program features B Settings Parameter Additional information Group 11 Reference Select Al as reference source Group 13 Analog Inputs Analog input processing 3001 3021 3022 3107 Al loss supervision Group 35 Motor Temp Meas Al in motor temperature measurement Group 40 Process PID Set 1 Group 42 External PID Al as PID process control reference or actual valu
269. ere are two types of displays in the Start up Assistant Main displays and the information displays The main displays prompt the user to feed in information The assistant steps through the main displays The information displays contain help texts for the main displays The figure below shows a typical example of both and explanations of the contents Main display Information display LOC UPAR EDIT LOC WHELP Set exactly as given 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT on the motor nameplate If connected to multiple motors EXIT 100 00 SAVE EXIT 100 00 Parameter Help text 2 Feed in field help text continued Local control vs external control The drive can receive start stop and direction commands and reference values from the control panel or through digital and analog inputs Embedded fieldbus enables control over an open fieldbus link A PC equipped with DriveWindow Light PC tool can also control the drive Local control Drive External control RS 232 Embedded fieldbus Modbus RTU Control panel or a PC tool Standard I O With SREA 01 Ethernet Adapter Module it is possible to use Modbus TCP IP with the Ethernet For more information see SREA 01 Ethernet Adapter Module User s Manual 8AUA0000042896 English 94 Program features B Local control The control commands are given from the control panel keypad when the drive is in local control
270. erlock function and assigns a digital input starting with DI5 to the interlock signal for each PFA relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on The number of PFA relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFA The Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No PFA Autochange Disabled Autochange Enabled Relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 DI4 Free Not allowed DI5 Speed Reg Motor 1 DI1 DI4 Free DI1 DI4 Free DI5 Speed Reg Motor DI5 First PFA Relay 2 Not allowed DI1 DI4 Free DI5 First PFA Relay 3 5 Not allowed Not allowed 8121 REG BYPASS CTRL 0 1 1 0 Selects Regulator by f pass control When OUT 4 enabled Regulator by fax pass control provides a simple control mechanism without a PID regulator P 8110 Use Regulator by pass control only in P8109 Jj Special applications 0 NO Disables Regulator by pass P 8113 control The drive uses the normal PFA reference Palle 1106 REF2 SELECT fin 1 YES Enables Regulator by pass any ee pa C control ACN ili i The process PID No auxiliary motors running regulator is B One auxiliary motor running bypassed C Two auxiliary motors running Actual value of PID is used as the PFA reference input Normally EXT REF2 is used as the PFA reference The drive uses the feedback signal defined by 4014 FBK SEL or
271. erride The override feature is used only to change the value Metasys Integration The following diagram shows the drives integration to the Johnson Controls Metasys system N1LAN N2 Fieldbus Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 277 The following diagram shows the drives integration to the Johnson Controls Metasys Companion system PC Version r Panel Version LTD 4 M we RS232 RS485 Converter N2 Fieldbus On the N2 Fieldbus each ACS320 drive can be accessed by the full complement of Metasys FMS features including Change of State COS monitoring alarm notification scheduling trend and totalization On one N2 Fieldbus segment there can be up to 32 nodes while integrating ACS320 drives with Johnson Controls Metasys Drive Device Type For the Metasys and Metasys Companion products the device type for the ACS320 drive is VND E N2 Analog Input Objects The following table lists the N2 Analog Input objects defined for the ACS320 drive N2 Analog Inputs Number Object Bu poale Units Range Alt OUTPUT FREQUENCY 0103 10 Hz 0 250 Al2 RATED SPEED Note 1 10 96 0 100 AI3 SPEED 0102 1 rpm 0 9999 Al4 CURRENT 0104 10 A 0 9999 AIS TORQUE 0105 10 96 200 200 Al6 POWER 0106 10 kW 0 9999 278 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus N2 Analog Inputs
272. ers used for the set up of pump protection Group 44 Pump Protection Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4401 INLET PROT CTRL NOT SEL Enables and selects the mode of the primary supervision of pump fan inlet pressure Note Inlet protection is active only when the active reference is PID NOT SEL 0 Primary inlet pressure supervision not used ALARM 1 Detection of low inlet pressure generates an alarm on the control panel display PROTECT 2 Detection of low inlet pressure generates an alarm on the control panel display The output of the PI controller is ramped down according to parameter 4417 PID OUT DEC TIME to the forced reference set by parameter 4008 INLET FORCED REF The drive will revert to the original reference if the pressure subsequently exceeds the supervision level The following diagram describes the inlet pressure supervision function A Measured inlet pressure A PFC reference i i EXT 2 4417 A s E FAULT 3 Detection of low inlet pressure trips the drive on a fault 4402 Al MEASURE INLET NOT SEL Selects the analog input for pump fan inlet pressure supervision NOT SEL 0 No analog input selected An 1 Pump fan inlet pressure monitored through analog input Al1 Al2 2 See selection Al1 Actual signals and parameters 223 Group 44 Pump Protection Code Description Range Resolution Default S
273. erted digital input DI2 DI6 as a fault reset Source See DH INV above 160 Actual signals and parameters Group 16 System Controls Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1605 USER PAR SET CHG 6 6 1 0 Defines control for changing the user parameter set See parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO The drive must be stopped to change User Parameter Sets During a change the drive will not start Note Always save the User Parameter Set after changing any parameter settings or performing a motor identification Whenever the power is cycled or parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO is changed the drive loads the last settings saved Any unsaved changes to a user parameter set are lost Note The value of this parameter 1605 is not included in the User Parameter Sets and does not change if User Parameter Sets change Note You can use a relay output to supervise the selection of User Parameter Set 2 See parameter 1401 0 NOT SEL Defines the control panel using parameter 9902 as the only control for changing User Parameter Sets 1 DI Defines digital input DI1 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets The drive loads User Parameter Set 1 on the falling edge of the digital input The drive loads User Parameter Set 2 on the rising edge of the digital input The User Parameter Set changes only when the drive is stopped 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2
274. es data parameter 132 profiles abb drives overview 315 comm EFB EE 308 deu overview eeeeeenne 315 protection branch CIRCUITS x cete deeg 34 361 enclosure standard AA 357 environmental sssssesssesese 356 protocol BACnet technical data 296 protocol implementation conformance statement see BACnet pics PT100 temperature sensor 194 PTC temperature sensor 194 pump cleaning group eeeeenn 230 pump protection group eeeennnn 222 R radiation limits conducted EN 61800 3 sse 359 ramp pair accel decel parameter 173 Elle CET 349 reference analog input corrections 146 corrections for parameter values 146 keypad control parameter 142 maximum parameters 147 minimum parameters 146 select source parameter 144 select parameter group 142 reference scaling EFB ABB drives profile 324 reference step PFA parameters 240 regulator by pass control parameter 252 relative humidity environment limit esessssss 357 shipping limit nsee 357 rela
275. esignation on the type designation label attached to the drive The first digits from the left express the basic configuration for example ACS320 03U 09A7 4 The optional selections are given after that separated by signs for example J404 The explanations of the type designation selections are described below ACS320 03U 09A7 4 J404 ACS320 product series SE 3 phase 03 3 phase input Configuration U EMC filter disconnected 60 Hz frequency Output current rating In format xxAy where xx indicates the integer part and y the fractional part eg 09A7 means 9 7 A For more information see section Ratings on page 349 Input voltage range 2 200 240 V AC 4 380 480 VAC Options J404 ACS CP C Basic Control Panel 1 J400 ACS CP A Assistant Control Panel 2 1 The ACS320 is compatible with ACS CP C Basic Control Panel Rev M or later 2 The ACS320 is compatible with ACH CP B Assistant Control Panel Rev E or later new panel series manufactured since 2007 with serial number XYYWWRXXXX where year YY 07 or greater and revision R E F G Mechanical installation 27 Mechanical installation What this chapter contains The chapter tells how to check the installation site unpack check the delivery and install the drive mechanically Checking the installation site The drive may be installed on the wall or in a cabinet Check the enclosure requirements for the need to use the
276. ess PID Set 1 Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4014 FBK SEL 1 10 1 1 Defines the PID controller feedback actual signal You can define a combination of two actual values ACT and ACT2 as the feedback signal Use parameter 4016 to define the source for actual value 1 ACT1 Use parameter 4017 to define the source for actual value 2 ACT2 1 ACT Actual value 1 ACT1 provides the feedback signal 2 ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 minus ACT2 provides the feedback signal 3 ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 plus ACT2 provides the feedback signal 4 ACT1 ACT2 ACT times ACT2 provides the feedback signal 5 ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 divided by ACT2 provides the feedback signal 6 MIN A1 A2 The smaller of ACT1 or ACT2 provides the feedback signal 7 MAX A1 A2 The greater of ACT1 or ACT2 provides the feedback signal 8 SQRT A1 A2 Square root of the value for ACT1 minus ACT2 provides the feedback signal 9 SQA1 SQA2 Square root of ACT1 plus the square root of ACT2 provides the feedback signal 10 SQRT ACT1 Square root of ACT1 provides the feedback signal 11 COMM FBK 1 Signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 provides the feedback signal 12 COMM FBK 2 Signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 provides the feedback signal 13 AVE ACT1 2 The average of ACT and ACT2 provides the feedback signal 4015 FBK MULTIPLIER 32 768 32 767 0 001 0 Defines an extra multiplier for the PID
277. eter 0302 Bit Name Value Function Comments 16 26 Reserved 27 REF_CONST 1 Constant speed These bits are only for supervision ref purposes 0 no op 28 REF_AVE 1 Average speed ref 0 no op 29 LINK ON 1 Master is detected in link 0 Link is down 30 REQ STARTINH 1 Start inhibit request is pending 0 Start inhibit request is OFF 31 OFF INTERLOCK 1 Panel OFF button For the control panel or PC tool this pressed is the OFF button interlock 0 no op E Status Word The contents of the STATUS WORD is status information sent by the drive to the master station ABB Drives Profile Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 319 The following table and the state diagram later in this sub section describe the status word content for the ABB Drives Profile ABB Drives Profile EFB STATUS WORD Bit Name Value Description Correspond to states boxes in the state diagram DV ON READY TO SWITCH ON NOT READY TO SWITCH ON Div RUN READY TO OPERATE OFF1 ACTIVE RDY REF OPERATION ENABLED OPERATION INHIBITED TRIPPED FAULT No fault OFF 2 STA OFF2 INACTIVE OFF2 ACTIVE OFF 3 STA OFFS INACTIVE OFF3 ACTIVE SWC_ON_INHIB SWITCH ON INHIBIT ACTIVE SWITCH ON INHIBIT NOT ACTIVE ALARM Warning alarm See Alarm Listing in the Diagnostics section for details on alarms No warning alarm AT_SETPOINT
278. eter 7875 DI1 OFF DELAY 1822 DI5 ON DELAY 0 0s See parameter 7874 DI1 ON DELAY 1823 DI5 OFF DELAY 0 0s See parameter 1815 DI OFF DELAY B Group 20 Limits This group defines minimum and maximum limits to follow in driving the motor speed frequency current torque etc Group 20 Limits Code Description Range Resolution Default 2003 MAX CURRENT 0 0 1 1 lon 0 1A 1 1 lon Defines the maximum output current A supplied by the drive to the motor 170 Actual signals and parameters Group 20 Limits Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL 0 2 1 1 Sets the DC undervoltage controller on or off When on If the DC bus voltage drops due to loss of input power the undervoltage controller decreases the motor speed in order to keep the DC bus voltage above the lower limit When the motor speed decreases the inertia of the load causes regeneration back into the drive keeping the DC bus charged and preventing an undervoltage trip The DC undervoltage controller increases power loss ride through on systems with a high inertia such as a centrifuge or a fan 0 DISABLE Disables controller 1 ENABLE TIME Enables controller with 500 ms time limit for operation 2 ENABLE Enables controlled without maximum time limit for operation 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 500 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0Hz Vv Defines the minimum limit
279. eter addresses the Modbus interface returns an exception code to the controller The following table summarizes the 4xxxx drive control registers 40001 40099 for 4xxxx registers above 40099 see the drive parameter list e g 40102 is parameter 0102 Modbus Register Access Remarks 40001 CONTROL WORD R W Maps directly to the profile S CONTROL WORD Supported only if 5305 0 or 2 ABB Drives profile Parameter 5319 holds a copy in hex format 40002 Reference 1 R W Range 0 20000 scaled to 0 1105 REF1 MAX or 20000 0 scaled to 1105 REF1 MAX 0 40003 Reference 2 R W Range 0 10000 scaled to 0 1108 REF2 MAX or 10000 0 scaled to 1108 REF2 MAX 0 40004 STATUS WORD R Maps directly to the profile S STATUS WORD Supported only if 5305 0 or 2 ABB Drives profile Parameter 5320 holds a copy in hex format 40005 Actual 1 R By default stores a copy of 0103 oUTPUT FREQ Use select using 5310 parameter 5310 to select a different actual value for this register 40006 Actual 2 R By default stores a copy of 0104 CURRENT Use select using 5311 parameter 5311 to select a different actual value for this register 40007 Actual 3 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5312 to select using 5312 select an actual value for this register 40008 Actual 4 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5313 to select by 5313 Select an actual value for this register 40009 Actual
280. etween the AC power source and the ACS320 This branch circuit protection must Besized to conform to applicable safety regulations including but not limited to both National and local electrical codes Belocked in an open position during installation and maintenance work The disconnect device must not be used to control the motor Instead use the control panel or commands to the I O terminals for motor control B Other regions The disconnecting device must conform to the applicable safety regulations Checking the compatibility of the motor and drive Check that the 3 phase AC induction motor and the drive are compatible according to the rating table in section Ratings on page 349 The table lists the typical motor power for each drive type Selecting the power cables B General rules Dimension the input power and motor cables according to local regulations The input power and the motor cables must be able to carry the corresponding load currents See section Ratings on page 349 for the rated currents The cable must be rated for at least 70 C maximum permissible temperature of the conductor in continuous use For US see section Additional North American requirements on page 36 The conductivity of the PE conductor must be equal to that of the phase conductor same cross sectional area 600 V AC cable is accepted for up to 500 V AC Planning the electrical installation 35 Referto chapter Technical
281. ew fault history It also lists all alarm and fault messages including the possible cause and corrective actions Safety WARNING Only qualified electricians are allowed to maintain the drive Read the safety instructions in chapter Safety on page 15 before you work on the drive Alarm and fault indications Fault is indicated with a red LED See section LEDs on page 347 An alarm or fault message on the panel display indicates abnormal drive status Using the information given in this chapter most alarm and fault causes can be identified and corrected If not contact an ABB representative The four digit code number in parenthesis after the fault is for the fieldbus communication See chapter Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus on page 257 How to reset The drive can be reset either by pressing the keypad key Basic Control Panel or gt Assistant Control Panel through digital input or fieldbus or by switching the supply voltage off for a while The source for the fault reset signal is selected by parameter 1604 FAULT RESET SEL When the fault has been removed the motor can be restarted Fault tracing 329 Fault history When a fault is detected it is stored in the Fault History The latest faults are stored together with the time stamp Parameters 0401 LAST FAULT 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 and 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 store the most recent faults Parameters 0404 0409 show drive operation data at the time
282. f copper conductor in cablings ACS320 gG UL Class T Supply Motor PE 600 V U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 x E U A D mm AWG mm AWG 03x 02A6 2 10 10 2 5 1 5 2 5 03x 03A9 2 10 10 2 5 14 1 5 14 2 5 14 03x 05A2 2 10 15 2 5 14 1 5 14 2 5 14 03x 07A4 2 16 15 2 5 12 1 5 14 2 5 12 03x 08A3 2 16 15 2 5 12 1 5 14 2 5 12 03x 10A8 2 16 20 2 5 12 2 5 12 2 5 12 03x 14A6 2 25 30 6 0 10 6 10 6 0 10 03x 19A4 2 25 35 6 0 10 6 10 6 0 10 03x 26A8 2 63 60 10 0 8 10 8 10 0 8 03x 34A1 2 80 80 16 0 6 16 6 16 0 6 03x 50A8 2 100 100 25 0 2 25 2 16 0 4 03x 01A3 4 10 10 2 5 14 1 5 14 2 5 12 03x 02A1 4 10 10 2 5 14 1 5 14 2 5 12 03x 02A6 4 10 10 2 5 14 1 5 14 2 5 12 03x 03A6 4 10 10 2 5 12 1 5 14 2 5 12 03x 04A5 4 16 15 2 5 12 1 5 14 2 5 12 03x 06A2 4 16 15 2 5 12 1 5 14 2 5 12 03x 08A0 4 16 20 2 5 12 1 5 14 2 5 12 03x 09A7 4 20 25 2 5 12 2 5 12 2 5 12 03x 13A8 4 25 30 6 0 10 6 10 6 0 10 03x 17A2 4 35 35 6 0 8 6 8 6 0 8 03x 25A4 4 50 50 10 0 8 10 8 10 0 8 03x 34A1 4 80 80 16 0 6 16 6 16 0 6 03x 41A8 4 100 100 25 0 4 16 4 16 0 4 03x 48A4 4 100 100 25 0 4 25 4 16 0 4 00578903 xls D 352 Technical data Dimensions weights and free space requirements E Dimensions and weights Dimensions and weights IP20 cabinet UL open RO 169 6 65 202 7 95 239 9 41 70 2 76 161 634 1 1 2 4 R1 169 6 65 202 7 95 239 9 41
283. f the following control inputs are from FLN Run Stop Ext1 2 Select or Run Enable 38 FLN REF1 SRC Indicates if FLN is the source for speed reference 1 1 YES 0 NO 39 FLN REF2 SRC Indicates if FLN is the source for speed reference 2 1 YES 0 NO 40 RO1 COMMAND Controls the output state of Relay 1 Parameter 1401 must be set to COMM for FLN to have this control 1 ON 0 OFF 0134 bit 0 41 RO2 COMMAND Controls the output state of Relay 2 Access to relay 2 requires ACS320 option MREL Parameter 1402 must be set to COMM for FLN to have this control 1 ON 0 OFF 0134 bit 1 42 RO3 COMMAND Controls the output state of Relay 3 Access to relay 3 requires ACS320 option MREL Parameter 1403 must be set to COMM for FLN to have this control 1 ON 0 OFF 0134 bit 2 43 RO4 COMMAND Controls the output state of Relay 4 Access to relay 4 require ACS320 option MREL Parameter 1410 must be set to COMM for FLN to have this control 1 ON 0 OFF 0134 bit 3 46 AO1 COMMAND Controls Analog Output 1 Parameter 1501 must be set to this value for FLN to have this control 0135 COMM VALUE 1 48 RESET RUN TIME Commanded by FLN to reset the cumulative run timer 1 RESET 0 NO The control input is rising edge sensitive so once the command is issued this point automatically returns to its inactive state This mom
284. following instructions can cause physical injury or death or damage to the equipment VAN Before adjusting the drive and putting it into service make sure that the motor and all driven equipment are suitable for operation throughout the speed range provided by the drive The drive can be adjusted to operate the motor at speeds above and below the speed provided by connecting the motor directly to the power line Do notactivate automatic fault reset functions if dangerous situations can occur When activated these functions will reset the drive and resume operation after a fault Do not control the drive with an AC contactor or disconnecting device disconnecting means use the control panel start and stop keys lt gt and or external commands I O or fieldbus The maximum allowed number of charging cycles of the DC capacitors ie power ups by applying power is two per minute and the maximum total number of chargings is 15 000 Note Ifan external source for start command is selected and it is ON the drive will start immediately after an input voltage break or fault reset unless the drive is configured for 3 wire a pulse start stop When the control location is not set to local LOC not shown on the display the stop key on the control panel will not stop the drive To stop the drive using the control panel first press the LOC REM key and then the stop key CQ 18 Introduction to the manual Introduction to
285. for Fre the drive output frequency S 2007 value is lt 0 A positive or zero minimum P 2008 speed frequency defines two ranges one positive and one negative 0 y Time Anegative minimum speed frequency defines one speed range See figure Note Keep MINIMUM FREQ lt P 2007 MAXIMUM FREQ Freq 2007 value is gt 0 P 2007 0 Time P 2008 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1Hz 60 0Hz Vv US Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency Actual signals and parameters 171 E Group 21 Start Stop This group defines how the motor starts and stops The ACH550 supports several start and stop modes Group 21 Start Stop Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2101 START FUNCTION 1 8 1 1 Selects the motor start method 1 AUTO The drive starts the motor instantly from zero frequency If flying start is required use selection SCAN START 2 DC MAGN The drive pre magnetizes the motor with DC current before the start The pre magnetizing time is defined by parameter 2703 DC MAGN TIME Note Starting to a rotating machine is not possible when DC MAGN is selected WARNING The drive will start after the set pre magnetizing time has passed even if the motor magnetization is not completed Ensure always in applications where a full break away torque is essential that the constant magnetizing time is long enough to allow generatio
286. frequency interference is expected if the drive is used on such a network Note It is not allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC filter connected on IT ungrounded systems The supply network becomes connected to ground potential through the EMC filter capacitors which may cause danger or damage the drive Note It is not allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC filter connected on a corner grounded TN system as this would damage the drive UL marking See the type designation label for the valid markings of your drive The UL mark is attached to the drive to verify that it meets UL requirements B UL checklist Input power connection See section Electric power network specification on page 355 Disconnecting device disconnecting means See Selecting the supply disconnecting device disconnecting means on page 33 Technical data 361 Ambient conditions The drives are to be used in a heated indoor controlled environment See section Ambient conditions on page 357 for specific limits Input cable fuses For installation in the United States branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the National Electrical Code NEC and any applicable local codes To fulfil this requirement use the UL classified fuses given in section Power cable sizes and fuses on page 351 For installation in Canada branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code a
287. he drive consists of Protocol Control Interface Reference for more information Modbus Output Words The content of these words is defined by profiles For Control word details on the profiles used see Reference ABB Control Profiles Technical Data Reference2 Input Words Status word Actual value 1 Actual value 2 Actual value 3 Actual value 4 Actual value 5 Actual value 6 Actual value 7 Actual value 8 N2 e Binary output objects N2 Protocol Technical Data Analog output objects Binary input objects Analog input objects FLN Binary output points FLN Protocol Technical Data Analog output points Binary input points Analog input points BACnet Device management BACnet Protocol Technical Data Binary output objects Analog output objects Binary input objects Analog input objects Note The words output and input are used as seen from the fieldbus controller point of view For example an output describes data flow from the fieldbus controller to the drive and appears as an input from the drive point of view Planning Network planning should address the following questions Whattypes and quantities of devices must be connected to the network What control information must be sent down to the drives What feedback information must be sent from the drives to the controlling system 260 Fieldbus control with emb
288. he next available pump is started instead The drive controls the motor of pump 1 varying the motor speed to control the pump capacity This motor is the speed regulated motor Direct line connections power the motor of pump 2 and pump 3 etc The drive switches pump 2 and then pump 3 etc on and off as needed These motors are auxiliary motors The drive PID control uses two signals a process reference and an actual value feedback The PID controller adjusts the speed frequency of the first pump such that the actual value follows the process reference When demand defined by the process reference exceeds the first motor s capacity user defined as a frequency limit the PFC control automatically starts an auxiliary pump The PFC also reduces the speed of the first pump to account for the auxiliary pump s addition to total output Then as before the PID controller adjusts the speed frequency of the first pump such that the actual value follows the process reference If demand continues to increase PFC adds additional auxiliary pumps using the same process When demand drops such that the first pump speed falls below a minimum limit user defined by a frequency limit the PFC control automatically stops an auxiliary pump The PFC also increases the speed of the first pump to account for the auxiliary pump s missing output An Interlock function when enabled identifies off line out of service motors and the PFC control ski
289. he timed function enable signal 7 ENABLED Timed functions are enabled 1 DH INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the timed function enable signal This digital input must be de activated for timed function enable 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the timed function enable signal 3602 START TIME 1 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 12 00 00 Defines the daily start time Thetime can be changed in steps of 2 seconds 20 30 00 f parameter value is 07 00 00 then the period 17 00 00 will be activated at 7 a m The figure shows 15 00 00 multiple periods on different weekdays 13 00 00 CH When editing parameters to PS set times 12 00 00 H Use arrow keys to select desired hour setting 10 30 00 Press NEXT to advance to minutes 09 00 00 Use arrow keys to select desired minutes setting 00 00 00 Press NEXT to advance Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun to minutes Use arrow keys to select desired seconds setting Press SAVE 3603 STOP TIME 1 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 12 00 00 Defines the daily stop time The time can be changed in steps of 2 seconds If the parameter value is 09 00 00 then the period will be deactivated at 9 a m 198 Actual signals and parameters Group 36 Timer Functions Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3604 START DAY 1 1 7 1 1 Defines the weekly start day 1 Monday 7 Sunday f parameter value is 1
290. he total energy consumption and motor noise level are reduced when the drive operates below the nominal load The total efficiency motor and drive can be improved by 1 1096 depending on load torque and speed OFF 0 Disabled ON 1 Enabled 4502 ENERGY PRICE 0 00 655 35 1 z 0 1 0 00 Currency Currency Price of energy per kWh Used for reference when energy savings are calculated See parameters 0174 SAVED KWH 0175 SAVED MWH 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 and 0178 SAVED CO2 4507 CO2 CONV FACTOR 0 0 655 35 1 0 1 0 5 tn MWh tn MWh tn MWh Conversion factor used for multiplying the saved energy in MWh to calculate the value of parameter 0178 SAVED CO2 4508 PUMP POWER 0 0 1000 0 1 0 1 100 0 Pump power when connected directly to supply Used for reference when energy savings are calculated See parameters 0174 SAVED KWH 0175 SAVED MWH 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 and 0178 SAVED CO2 Actual signals and parameters 229 Group 45 Energy Savings Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4509 ENERGY RESET DONE Resets energy calculators 0174 SAVED KWH 0175 SAVED MWH 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 and 0778 SAVED CO2 DONE 0 Reset not requested normal operation RESET 1 Reset energy counters The value reverts automatically to DONE 230 Actual signals and parameters E Group 46 Pump Cleaning This group defines the set up f
291. hese it is possible to save two different user parameter sets into the drive permanent memory for later use Each set contains parameter settings including Group 99 START UP DATA and the results of the motor identification run QO USER S1 LOAD 2 USER S2 LOAD With these the user parameter sets can be taken back in use Actual signals and parameters 129 Group 99 Start up Data Code Description Range Resolution Default S 9905 MOTOR NORM VOLT 115 345V 200V US 1V 230V Y 230 690V 400V US 1V 460V 288 862V 600V US 1V 575V Defines the nominal motor voltage Output voltage Must equal the value on the motor rating plate P 9905F Sets the maximum drive output voltage supplied to the motor The ACH550 cannot supply the motor Output with a voltage greater than the mains frequency voltage l gt P 9907 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 0 15 loy 1 5 lon 0 1A 1 5 lon Y Defines the nominal motor current Must equal the value on the motor rating plate Range allowed 0 2 2 0 ly where ly is drive current 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ 10 0 500 Hz 0 1 Hz 60 Hz Y US Defines the nominal motor frequency Range 10 500 Hz typically 50 or 60 Hz Sets the frequency at which output voltage equals the MOTOR NOM VOLT Field weakening point Norm freq Supply Volt Mot Nom Volt 9908 MOTOR NOM 50 30000 rpm 1 rpm Size v SPEED dependent Defines the nominal moto
292. igh frequency noise increase the value of Parameter 1303 FILTER AUT or 1306 FILTER AI2 until the noise is filtered from the signal 206 Actual signals and parameters Group 40 Process PID Set 1 Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 3 0s Defines the PID Controller s A A integration time Integration time is by B definition is the time required to increase the output by the D P 4001 2 10 error value Error value is constant and C P400121 100 Gain 1 t Integration time of 1 second gt denotes that a 100 change P4002 gt is achieved in 1 second AcE Error 0 0 NOT SEL Disables B Error value step integration l part of C Controller output with Gain 1 controller D Controller output with Gain 10 0 1 3600 0 Integration time seconds See 4001 for adjustment procedure 4003 DERIVATION TIME 0 0 10 0 s 0 1s 0 0s Defines the PID Controller s derivation Error 4 Process Error Value time You can add the derivative of the error 100 7 7N TY to the PID controller output The derivative is the error value s rate of change For example if the process error value changes linearly the derivative is a constant added to the PID controller output The error derivative is filtered with a 1 pole filter The time constant of the filter is defined by parameter 4004 PI
293. iiwere tie p cee la dee nd iei ee Q3 p dag Ne he did pP n 108 De undervoltage 2u i ex eee ah ede EELER ees 108 Drive temperature i c Re rh e eee EE dE ENEE EE RR dE 108 SHOM CIICUIT PR T 108 Ju oC EEN 108 Supply phase loss ie ber tea be ead Se Ree ed RE RO ERR d 108 Operationilimils 7 6 nce se dents eines EE 108 Settings eck ee dues vEE2RLS bama ie PRMERA d epee aa wae SERERE GR RE pus 108 Power liMit ECC P UTUTITTTMTST 109 Automatic resets 2 6 severe e RR Rh hb RR UNN EN hee ee REA TRE E 109 Settiligs x c orensnelqe bubus Meee Cle pu NS aur d ddbe ne Lead Diagnostics Supervision aie ker pO by RP SQ OPERE Up eei ERG Red E hebt RE i o RA Diagnostics Parameter lock el TETTE ME PID CONUO c PI Tm Process controller PID1 celles RH 110 External Trim controller PID2 lees IIR 110 Block diagrams EEN EE Rx enr p RR ORE EG ORG ERE ens 111 ip PT 113 T lee le 113 Sleep function for the process PID PID1 control lisse seen 114 Example avi ite Mae ket es e be Ye gU ERRORI DER RIKE KO EGGS orae ou 115 Settings osse cea osurox bs aa EE E ETE DENE RETE y DENDO ORA CR REGE d 116 Diagnostl6S iss cece EELER ERENNERT EIERE A NEE RE EY RAE E op edis 116 Motor temperature measurement through the standard WO 116 run o rataste kroatan EE 117 DIEQNOSUCS 4 scans eel a e ve Cie a a E 117 JEE EP 118 EXAImpl6S extat pp ele eg Gne ede Eet etna iut ane Re
294. iliary motor is the one connected to the second relay with a parameter setting 31 PFC and so on The fourth auxiliary motor uses the same reference step low frequency and start frequency values as the third auxiliary motor Number of auxiliary motors Relay logic Standard PFC mode PFC with Autochange mode Actual signals and parameters 245 Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution Default S The table below shows the PFC motor assignments for some typical settings in the relay output parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 where the settings are either 31 PFC or X anything but 31 and where the Autochange function is disabled 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 Parameter setting Relay assignment d 1 Autochange disabled 0 0 0 1 1 RO1 RO2 RO3 RO4 1 2 3 0 7 31 X X X 1 Aux X X X 31 31 X X 2 Aux Aux X X 31 31 31 X 3 Aux Aux Aux X X 931 131 X 2 X Aux Aux X 31 31 X X 1 Aux Aux X X One additional relay output for the PFC that is in use One motor is in sleep when the other is rotating The table below shows the PFC motor assignments for some typical settings in the relay output parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 where the settings are either 31 PFC or X anything but 31 and where the Autochange function is
295. in 0 7 1601 run enable 2 DI2 4002 integration time 10 0s 1609 start enable 2 5 D15 4101 gain 1 0 2202 acceler time 1 15 0s 4102 integration time 60 0s 2203 deceler time 1 15 0s 78 Start Up B Return Fan This macro configures for return fan applications where the return fan removes air according to signals received from a transducer When using direct speed reference in AUTO mode or process PID see General Considerations on page 73 X1A 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen 2 AM External reference 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC oi 5 AI2 PID feedback 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common mAH 47 AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA V 748 AGND Analog output circuit common r 9 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC r 10 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 11 DCOM Digital input common for all I 4112 DI1 Start Stop Activate to start drive I 4113 DI2 Run permissive Deactivate to stop drive P 1601 I 414 DI3 Constant Preset speed 1 P 1202 I 3415 DI4 Safety interlock1 Deactivate to stop drive P 1608 7 16 DI5 Safety interlock2 Deactivate to stop drive P 1609 XQiBrzTRO1C Relay output 1 P 1401 18 RO1
296. ined limit Use Group 14 Relay Outputs to define the relay and whether the relay activates when the signal is too low or too high Group 32 Supervision Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 101 199 1 103 Selects the first supervised parameter Must be a parameter number from Group 01 Operating Data f the supervised parameter passes a limit a relay output is energized The supervision limits are defined in this group The relay outputs are defined in Group 14 Relay Outputs definition also specifies which supervision limit is monitored LO HI Operating data supervision using relay outputs when Y 9 Mora HI 3203 Value of supervised parameter Case A Parameter LO 3202 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or t 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 gt etc value is SUPRV1 OVER or SUPRV 2 OVER Case A A Use for monitoring Energized 1 when if the supervised 1 t signal exceeds a given 0 gt limit The relay remains active until the supervised Case B A value drops below the low limit Energized 1 I LLELI e t Case B Parameter 0 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV 1 UNDER or SUPRV 2 UNDER Use for monitoring when if the supervised signal falls below a given limit The relay remains active until the supervised value rises above the high limit Note Case LO lt HI represents a normal hysteresis
297. int Integer and Byte values The ACS320 drive does not support N2 Fieldbus communication internal values All of the Analog and Binary I O objects are listed below starting with N2 Analog Input Objects below Analog Input The analog input objects support the following features Analog Input actual value in engineering units Low Alarm limit Low Warning limit High Warning limit High Alarm limit Differential value for the hysteresis of the Alarms and Warnings Change of State COS enabled Alarm Enabled Warning Enabled Override value is received but there is no action taken Binary Input The binary input objects support the following features Binary Input actual value Normal Alarm state specification Alarm Enabled 276 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Change of State COS enabled Override value is received but there is no action taken Analog Output The analog output objects support the following features Analog Output value in engineering units e Override value is used to change the Analog Output value It is not possible to return to the previous value by removing the override The override feature is used only to change the value Binary Output The binary output objects support the following features Binary Output value e Override value is used to change the Binary Output value It is not possible to return to the previous value by removing the ov
298. iod can be in multiple timers Time Period 1 3602 START TIME 1 3603 STOP TIME 1 3604 START DAY 1 3605 STOP DAY 1 Time Period 2 3606 START TIME 2 Timer 1 3607 STOP TIME 2 3626 TIMER FUNC1 SRC 3608 START DAY 2 3609 sTOP DAY 2 Timer 2 3627 TIMER FUNC2 SRC Time Period 3 3610 START TIME 3 3611 STOP TIME 3 Timer 3 3612 START DAY 3 3628 TIMER FUNC3 SRC 3613 STOP DAY 3 Timer 4 3629 TIMER FUNC4 SRC Time Period 4 3614 START TIME 4 3615 STOP TIME 4 3616 START DAY 4 3617 STOP DAY 4 Booster 3622 BOOSTER SEL 3623 BOOSTER TIME Actual signals and parameters 197 A parameter can be connected to only one time Timer1 3626 TIMER FUNC1 SRC 1001 EXT 1 COMMANDS 1002 EXT 2 COMMANDS 1102 ExT 1 2 SEL 1201 CONST SPEED SEL Timer2 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 3627 TIMER FUNC2 SRC 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 1412 RELAY OUTPUT 6 4027 PID PARAM SET 8126 TIMED AUTOCHANGE Group 36 Timer Functions Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3601 TIMERS ENABLE 6 7 1 0 Selects the source for the timer enable signal 0 NOT SEL Timed functions are disabled 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI as the timed function enable signal The digital input must be activated for timed functions enable 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as t
299. ion of the drive before start up Go through the checklist below together with another person Read chapter Safety on page 15 of this manual before you work on the drive Check O The ambient operating conditions are allowed See Mechanical installation Checking the installation site on page 27 as well as Technical data Losses cooling data and noise on page 353 and Ambient conditions on page 357 The drive is fixed properly on an even vertical non flammable wall See Mechanical installation on page 27 The cooling air will flow freely See Mechanical installation Free space around the drive on page 28 The motor and the driven equipment are ready for start See Planning the electrical installation Checking the compatibility of the motor and drive on page 34 as well as Technical data Motor connection data on page 355 LI For ungrounded and corner grounded systems The internal EMC filter is disconnected EMC screw removed The capacitors are reformed if the drive has been stored over a year The drive is grounded properly The input power voltage matches the drive nominal input voltage The input power connections at U1 V1 and W1 are OK and tightened with the correct torque Appropriate input power fuses and disconnector are installed The motor connections at U2 V2 and W2 are OK and tightened with the correct torque OO OOOO D 0 OOF 00 Installation checklist 53 Check The motor cable inpu
300. ion using a two wire sensor X1A ERU 5 Al2 Process actual value measurement or reference i 6 GND 4 20 mA Rin 100 ohm 9 24V Auxiliary voltage output non isolated 10 GND 24 V DC max 200 mA Note The sensor is supplied through its current output Thus the output signal must be 4 20 mA Electrical installation 49 E Default UO connection diagram The default connection of the control signals depends on the application macro in use which is selected with parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO The default macro is the HVAC Default It provides a general purpose UO configuration with three constant speeds Parameter values are the default values given in section Parameters in the short parameter view on page 126 For information on other macros see chapter Application Macros on page 72 The default I O connections for the ABB standard macro are given in the figure below X1A L 1 ISCH Signal cable shield screen gt 12 an External reference 0 10 V or 0 20 mA mele kohm fo 3 GND Analog input circuit common A a 4 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC max 10 mA 5 Al2 PID feedback 0 10 V or 0 20 mA max 500 ohm 6 GND Analog input circuit common o7 Er 7 AO Output frequency value 0 20 mA t P 8 GN
301. ision starting on page 186 12 suprv3 over Energize relay when third supervised parameter 3207 exceeds the limit 3209 See Group 32 Supervision starting on page 186 13 suprv3 under Energize relay when third supervised parameter 3207 drops below the limit 3208 See Group 32 Supervision starting on page 186 14 AT SET POINT Energize relay when the output frequency is equal to the reference frequency 15 FAULT RST Energize relay when the drive is in a fault condition and will reset after the programmed auto reset delay See parameter 3103 delay time 16 FLT ALARM Energize relay when fault or alarm occurs 17 EXT CTRL Energize relay when external control is selected 18 REF 2 SEL Energize relay when EXT2 is selected 19 CONST FREQ Energize relay when a constant speed is selected 154 Actual signals and parameters Group 14 Relay Outputs Code Description Range Resolution Default S 20 REF Loss Energize relay when reference or active control place is lost 21 OVERCURRENT Energize relay when an overcurrent alarm or fault occurs 22 OVERVOLTAGE Energize relay when an overvoltage alarm or fault occurs 23 DRIVE TEMP Energize relay when a drive overtemperature alarm or fault occurs 24 UNDERVOLTAGE Energize relay when an undervoltage alarm or fault occurs 25 Ald LOSS Energize relay when A signal is lost 26 Al2 L
302. ital input enables external PID control De activating the digital input disables external PID control 2 6 DIZ DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for enabling external PID control See D above 7 DRIVE RON Defines the start command as the control for enabling external PID control Activating the start command drive is running enables external PID control 8 ON Defines the power on as the control for enabling external PID control Activating power to the drive enables external PID control 9 12 TIMER 1 4 Defines the Timer as the control for enabling external PID control Timer active enables external PID control See parameter Group 36 Timer Functions 1 Di INV Defines an inverted digital input DI as the control for enabling external PID control Activating the digital input disables external PID control De activating the digital input enables external PID control 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for enabling external PID control See DH INV above 4229 OFFSET 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 Defines the offset for the PID output When PID is activated output starts from this value When PID is deactivated output resets to this value Parameter is not active when 4230 TRIM MODE not 0 trim mode is not active 4230 TRIM MODE 0 2 1 0 Selects the type of trim if any Using the trim it is possible to combine a
303. ivating the digital input selects the reverse direction 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the override direction signal See DH INV above 1707 OVERRIDE REF Selects the source of the override reference 1 CONSTANT Selects a preset frequency or speed for the override The frequency value is defined by parameter 1702 OVERRIDE FREQ and the speed value by parameter 1703 OVERRIDE SPEED 2 PID The reference is taken from the PID output see group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 Note The following conditions must be met when using PID in the override mode PID1 set point parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL can be either A1 A2 or INTERNAL PID1 parameter set 1 must be active parameter 4027 pid 1 param set set 1 Override direction parameter 1706 override dir can be either 0 forward or 7 reverse E Group 18 Freq In amp Tran Out This group defines the frequency input and transistor output signal processing Group 18 FREQ IN amp TRAN OUT Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1801 FREQ INPUT MIN 0 16000 Hz 1 1 Hz 0 Hz Defines the minimum input value when DI5 is used as a frequency input See section Frequency input on page 100 1802 FREQ INPUT MAX 0 16000 Hz 1 1Hz 1000 Hz Defines the maximum input value when DI5 is used as a frequency input See section Frequency input on page 100 1803 FILTER FREQ IN 0 0 10 0 s
304. ividual bits of the control word are mapped to Coils 1 16 Relay outputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 e g RO1 Coil 33 Read Discrete 0x02 Read discrete inputs status For the ACS320 the individual Input Status bits of the status word are mapped to Inputs 1 16 or 1 32 depending on the active profile Terminal inputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Input 33 e g Dl1 Input 33 308 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Code m Function Hex Description Read Multiple 0x03 Read multiple holding registers For the ACS320 the entire Holding Registers parameter set is mapped as holding registers as well as command status and reference values Read Multiple 0x04 Read multiple input registers For the ACS320 the 2 analog Input Registers input channels are mapped as input registers 1 amp 2 Force Single Coil 0x05 Write a single discrete output For the ACS320 the individual bits of the control word are mapped to Coils 1 16 Relay outputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 e g RO1 Coil 33 Write Single 0x06 Write single holding register For the ACS320 the entire Holding Register parameter set is mapped as holding registers as well as command status and reference values Diagnostics 0x08 Perform Modbus diagnostics Subcodes for Query 0x00 Restart 0x01 amp Listen Only 0x04 are supported Force Multiple OxOF Write multip
305. l signals and parameters 213 Group 40 Process PID Set 1 Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4025 WAKE UP 0 0 1000 0 1 0 0 DEVIATION Defines the wake up deviation a deviation from the setpoint greater than this value for at least the time period 4026 WAKE UP DELAY re starts the PID controller Parameters 4006 and 4007 define the units and scale A E Parameter 4005 0 Wake up level Setpoint Parameter 4005 1 P 4025 Wake up level Setpoint Setpoint Wake up deviation P 4025 Wake up level can be above or below setpoint i See figures C Wake up level when P 4026 parameter 4005 1 D Wake up level when E parameter 4005 0 E Feedback is above wake up level and lasts longer than 4026 WAKE UP DELAY PID function wakes up F Feedback is below wake up level and lasts longer than 4026 WAKE UP DELAY PID function wakes up Wake up deviation C i P 4026 4026 WAKE UP DELAY 0 00 60 00 s 0 01 s 0 50 s Defines the wake up delay a deviation from the setpoint greater than 4025 WAKE UP DEVIATION for at least this time period re starts the PID controller See 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL above 214 Actual signals and parameters Group 40 Process PID Set 1 Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET 6 11 1 0 Defines how selections are made between PID
306. le discrete outputs For the ACS320 the Coils individual bits of the control word are mapped to Coils 1 16 Relay outputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 e g RO1 Coil 33 Write Multiple 0x10 Write multiple holding registers For the ACS320 the entire Holding Registers parameter set is mapped as holding registers as well as command status and reference values Read Write 0x17 This function combines functions 0x03 and 0x10 into a single Multiple Holding command Registers Mapping Summary The following table summarizes the mapping between the ACS320 parameters and 1 0 and Modbus reference space For details see Modbus Addressing below ACS320 Modbus Reference Supported Function Codes Control Bits Relay Outputs Coils 0xxxx 01 Read Coil Status 05 Force Single Coil e 15 Force Multiple Coils Status Bits Discrete Inputs Discrete Inputs 1xxxx 02 Read Input Status Analog Inputs Input Registers 3xxxxx 04 Read Input Registers Parameters Control Status Words References Holding Registers 4xxxx 03 Read 4X Registers 06 Preset Single 4X Register 16 Preset Multiple 4X Registers 23 Read Write 4X Registers Communication Profiles When communicating by Modbus the ACS320 supports multiple profiles for control and status information Parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE selects the profile used
307. les Air conditioning is active on weekdays from 8 00 to 15 30 8 a m to 3 30 p m and on Sundays from 12 00 to 15 00 12 to 3 p m By pressing the extension time switch the air conditioning is on for an extra hour Parameter Setting 3601 TIMERS ENABLE DI 3602 START TIME 1 08 00 00 3603 STOP TIME 1 15 30 00 3604 START DAY 1 MONDAY 3605 STOP DAY 1 FRIDAY 3606 START TIME 2 12 00 00 3607 STOP TIME 2 15 00 00 3608 START DAY 2 SUNDAY 3609 STOP DAY 2 SUNDAY 3623 BOOSTER TIME 01 00 00 B Settings Parameter Additional information Group 36 Timer Functions Timed functions settings 1001 1002 Timed start stop control 1102 Timed EXT1 EXT2 selection 1201 Timed constant speed 1 activation 1209 Timed speed selection 1401 Timed function status indicated through relay output RO 1 1402 1403 1410 Timed function status indicated through relay output RO 2 4 With option MREL 01 only 1805 Timed function status indicated through digital output DO 4027 Timed PID1 parameter set 1 2 selection 4228 Timed external PID2 activation 120 Program features User load curve The user can specify a load curve motor torque as a function of frequency for supervision The curve is defined by five points Supervision can be set for the torque dropping below the underload curve exceeding the overload curve or both A fault is generated if the torque has
308. liary motor stops if Two auxiliary motors are running ACH550 output frequency drops below the limit 8113 1 Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit 8113 1 Hz for at least the time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D 8114 LOW FREQ 3 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 25 0 Sets the frequency limit used to stop the third auxiliary motor See 8112 Low FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The third auxiliary motor stops if Three auxiliary motors are running ACS320 output frequency drops below the limit 8114 1 Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit 8114 1 Hz for at least the time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D Actual signals and parameters 243 Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution Default S 8115 AUX MOT START D 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 1s 5 0 s Sets the Start Delay for the auxiliary motors The output frequency must remain above the start frequency limit parameter 8109 8110 or 8111 for this time period before the auxiliary motor starts See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation 8116 AUX MOT STOP D 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 1s 3 0s Sets the Stop Delay for the auxiliary motors The output frequency must remain below the low frequency limit parameter 8112 8113 or 8114 for this time period before the auxiliary motor stops See 8112 Low FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation 244 Actual signals and parameters Group 81
309. limit 8119 P81197 3PFA AUTOCHNG LEVEL 3PFA 7 Stops the speed 4PFA regulated motor m Switches off the SHE contactor of the speed regulated motor 1PRA Increments the starting M P 8122 order counter to change the starting m P8118 ta P8118 order for the motors A Area above 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL autochange not Identifies the next allowed motor in line to be the B Autochange occurs Spese regulated 1PFA etc PID output associated with each motor Switches off the above motor s contactor if the motor was running Any other running motors are not interrupted Switches on the contactor of the new speed regulated motor The autochange switchgear connects this motor to the ACS320 power output Delays motor start for the time 8122 PFA START DELAy Starts the speed regulated motor Identifies the next constant speed motor in the rotation Switches the above motor on but only if the new speed regulated motor had been running as a constant speed motor This step keeps an equal number of motors running before and after autochange Continues with normal PFA operation 248 Actual signals and parameters Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution Default S Starting Order Counter Output The operation of the starting order counter frequency No aux 1 aux 2 aux The relay output parameter motors motor motors defi
310. lue Scaling The scaling of actual values can be protocol dependent In general for Actual Values scale the feedback integer using the parameter s resolution See Parameter Descriptions section for parameter resolutions For example Feedback Parameter i Integer Resolution Feedback Integer Parameter Resolution Scaled Value 1 0 1 mA 1 0 1 mA 2 0 1 mA 10 0 196 10 0 196 196 Where parameters are in percent the Parameter Descriptions section specifies what parameter corresponds to 100 In such cases to convert from percent to engineering units multiply by the value of the parameter that defines 10096 and divide by 10096 For example Feedback Parameter pi Feedback Integer Parameter Resolution Integer Resolution defines 100 Value of 100 Ref 100 Scaled Value 10 0 196 1800 rpm 10 0 1 1800 RPM 100 18 rpm 100 0 196 600 Hz 100 0 1 600 Hz 100 60 Hz 1 Assuming for the sake of this example that the Actual Value uses parameter 9908 MOT NOM SPEED as the 100 reference and that 9908 1800 rpm 2 Assuming for the sake of this example that the Actual Value uses parameter 9907 MOT NOM FREQ as the 100 reference and that 9907 6 00 Hz 272 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Although Actual Value scaling could differ from the above for the N2 and FLN protocols it currently does not To confirm see the following s
311. lues for the different macros Fault tracing page 328 tells how to reset faults and view fault history It lists all alarm and fault messages including the possible cause and corrective actions Maintenance and hardware diagnostics page 344 contains preventive maintenance instructions and LED indicator descriptions Technical data page 348 contains technical specifications of the drive eg ratings sizes and technical requirements as well as provisions for fulfilling the requirements for CE and other marks Dimension drawings page 363 shows dimension drawings of the drive Further information inside of the back cover tells how to make product and service inquiries get information on product training provide feedback on ABB Drives manuals and find documents on the Internet 20 Introduction to the manual Related documents See List of related manuals on page 2 Categorization by frame size The ACS320 is manufactured in frame sizes RO R4 Some instructions and other information which only concern certain frame sizes are marked with the symbol of the frame size RO R4 To identify the frame size of your drive see the table in section Ratings on page 349 Introduction to the manual 21 Quick installation and commissioning flowchart Task Identify the frame size of your drive RO R4 U Plan the installation select the cables etc Check the ambient conditions ratings and required cooling air fl
312. m 5305 efb ctrl profile 1 dcu profile 1002 ext2 commands 10 comm 5310 efb par 10 103 1601 run enable 7 comm 5311 efb par 11 104 1608 start enable 1 7 comm B Hand Control Start Up 89 This macro configures for drive control using only the control panel with no automated control Typically this is a temporary configuration used prior to control wiring X1A 1 ISCR Signal cable shield screen 2 Al External reference 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC ro 5 AIS PID feedback 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common lt n 7 AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA 8 AGND Analog output circuit common 9 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC r 110 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 11 DCOM Digital input common for all 412 DH Not Configured 113 DI2 Not Configured 3414 DIS Not Configured lt 15 DI4 Not Configured L_ __ 16 DI5 Not Configured XiBrrTRo cC Relay output 1 P 1401 18 RO1A N Default operation Started gt 17 connected to 19 19 RO1B 20 DOSRC Digital output max 100 mA P 1805 21 DOOUT Gen No fault Fault 1 2 20 connected to 22 22 DOGND Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9
313. m drives and select Document Library Manuals feedback form LV AC drives Document library on the Internet You can find manuals and other product documents in PDF format on the Internet Go to www abb com drives and select Document Library You can browse the library or enter selection criteria for example a document code in the search field A ED ED F AIPED 3AUA0000062599 Rev A EN EFFECTIVE 8 1 2009 ABB Oy AC Drives P O Box 184 Fl 00381 HELSINKI FINLAND Telephone 358 10 22 11 Fax 358 10 22 22681 Internet www abb com ABB Inc Automation Technologies Drives amp Motors 16250 West Glendale Drive New Berlin WI 53151 USA Telephone 262 785 3200 800 HELP 365 Fax 262 780 5135 ABB Beijing Drive Systems Co Ltd No 1 Block D A 10 Jiuxiangiao Beilu Chaoyang District Beijing P R China 100015 Telephone 86 10 5821 7788 Fax 86 10 5821 7618 Internet www abb com
314. measuring with a multimeter impedance at least 1 Mohm that there is no voltage present 2 Remove the hood if the drive has the NEMA 1 option 3 Lever the fan holder off the drive frame with eg a screwdriver and lift the hinged fan holder slightly upward from its front edge 4 Free the fan cable from the clip in the fan holder 5 Disconnect the fan cable Use long nose pliers if needed 346 Maintenance and hardware diagnostics 6 Remove the fan from the holder 7 Install the new fan in reverse order 8 Restore power Capacitors E Reforming the capacitors The capacitors must be reformed if the drive has been stored for a year See section Type designation label on page 25 for how to find out the manufacturing time from the serial number For information on reforming the capacitors refer to Guide for Capacitor Reforming in ACS50 ACS55 ACS150 ACS310 ACS320 ACS350 ACS550 and ACH550 3AFE68735190 English available on the Internet go to http www abb com and enter the code in the Search field Power connections iy WARNING Read and follow the instructions in chapter Safety on page 75 Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death or damage to the equipment 1 Stop the drive and disconnect it from the power line Wait for five minutes to let the drive DC capacitors discharge Ensure by measuring with a multimeter impedance at least 1 Mohm that ther
315. mended that the motor cable input power cable and control cables are installed on separate trays Avoid long parallel runs of motor cables with other cables to decrease electromagnetic interference caused by the rapid changes in the drive output voltage Where control cables must cross power cables make sure that they are arranged at an angle as near to 90 degrees as possible The cable trays must have good electrical bonding to each other and to the grounding electrodes Aluminium tray systems can be used to improve local equalizing of potential 38 Planning the electrical installation A diagram of the cable routing is shown below Motor cable Drive Power cable min 300 mm 12 in Motor cable Input power cable min 200 mm 8 in 90 min 500 mm 20 in Control cables B Control cable ducts 24V 230V 24V 230V Lead 24 V and 230 V control cables in Not allowed unless the 24 V cable is Separate ducts inside the cabinet insulated for 230 V or insulated with an insulation sleeving for 230 V Planning the electrical installation 39 Protecting the drive input power cable motor and motor cable in short circuit situations and against thermal overload E Protecting the drive and input power cable in short circuit situations Arrange the protection according to the following guidelines Circuit diagram Short circuit protection Distribution Input cable
316. mentation Conformance Statement Character Sets Supported Indicating support for multiple character sets does not imply that they can all be supported simultaneously ANSI X3 4 O IBM Microsoft DBCS O ISO 8859 1 O ISO 10646 UCS 2 O ISO 10646 UCS 4 O JIS C 6226 If this product is a communication gateway describe the types of non BACnet equipment network s that the gateway supports BACnet Object Definitions B Object Property Support Matrix The following table summarizes the Object Types Properties Supported Property Object Type Device Binary Input Binary Output Binary Value Analog Input Analog Output Analog Value Object Identifier vi v v v v Object Name v v v v v Object Type v v v v v System Status Vendor Name Vendor Identifier Model Name Firmware Revision Appl Software Revision Protocol Version Protocol Revision Services Supported Object Types Supported Object List Max APDU Length Segmentation Support APDU Timeout Number APDU Retries Max Master Max Info Frames Device Address Binding Database Revision IESESESESESESESESESESESESESESESESESESESESES Present Value Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 307 Object Type
317. meter control parameter group deceleration time parameter enable parameter suss low frequency parameters number of aux motors parameter reference step parameters start delay parameter start frequency parameters PFC pump fan control see PFA pump fan alternation PID Index 385 386 Index 0 actual signal parameter 207 100 actual signal parameter 207 actual input select parameters 210 actual value max parameters 211 actual value min parameters 211 adjustment procedure 205 comm value 1 data parameter 132 comm value 2 data parameter 132 correction source parameter 221 decimal point actual signal parameter 207 222 derivation filter parameter 206 derivation time parameter 206 error feedback inversion parameter 207 external trimming parameter group 219 222 228 external source activate parameter 220 feedback multiplier parameter 210 feedback select parameter 210 feedback data parameter 131 gain parameter
318. meter 6404 90 100 distribution Actual signals and parameters 239 B Group 81 PFA This group defines a Pump and Fan Alternation PFA mode of operation The major features of PFA are The ACS320 controls the motor of pump no 1 varying the motor speed to control the pump capacity This motor is the speed regulated motor Direct line connections power the motor of pump no 2 and pump no 3 etc The ACS320 switches pump no 2 and then pump no 3 etc on and off as needed These motors are auxiliary motors Use of the MREL 01 relay output module is required for control of pump no 2 and no 3 The ACS320 PID control uses two signals a process reference and an actual value feedback The PID controller adjusts the speed frequency of the first pump such that the actual value follows the process reference When demand defined by the process reference exceeds the first motor s capacity user defined as a frequency limit the PFA automatically starts an auxiliary pump The PFA also reduces the speed of the first pump to account for the auxiliary pump s addition to total output Then as before the PID controller adjusts the speed frequency of the first pump such that the actual value follows the process reference If demand continues to increase PFA adds additional auxiliary pumps using the same process When demand drops such that the first pump speed falls below a minimum limit user defined by a frequency limit th
319. motor changes Actual signals and parameters 247 Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution Default S 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL 0 0 100 0 0 1 50 0 Sets an upper limit as a percent of output capacity for the autochange logic When the output from the PID PFA control block exceeds this limit autochange is prevented For example use this parameter to deny autochange when the Pump Fan system is operating near maximum capacity Autochange Overview The purpose of the autochange operation is to equalize duty time between multiple motors used in a system At each autochange operation A different motor takes a turn connected to the ACS320 output the speed regulated motor The starting order of the other motors rotates The Autochange function requires External switchgear for changing the dive s output power connections Parameter 8120 INTERLOCKS value 0 Autochange is performed when The running time since the previous autochange reaches the time set by 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV The PFA input is below the level set by this parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Note The ACS320 always coasts to stop when autochange is performed In an autochange the Autochange function does all of the following see figure Initiates a change PID Output when the running time n 4PFA A since the last 100 d autochange reaches 8118 AUTOCHNG 2PFA INTERV and PFA input is below
320. n 0 0008 3 from the right of the entry 1 0031 3 1 See table for example using pi 3 14159 2 0314 3 14 3 3142 3 142 4008 0 VALUE 1000 0 1000 0 0 1 0 0 Defines together with the next Units P4006 parameter the scaling applied to the o PID controller s actual values PID1 scale P4007 H 209 parameters 0128 0130 and 0132 Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007 P4009 P 4008 i T e 0 100 1000 Internal scale 4009 100 VALUE 1000 0 1000 0 0 1 100 Defines together with the previous parameter the scaling applied to the PID controller s actual values Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007 208 Actual signals and parameters Group 40 Process PID Set 1 Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4010 SET POINT SEL 0 19 1 0 Y Defines the reference signal source for the PID controller Parameter has no significance when the PID regulator is by passed see 8121 REG BYPASS CTRL 0 KEYPAD Control panel provides reference 124A Analog input 1 provides reference 2 AI2 Analog input 2 provides reference 8 COMM Fieldbus provides reference 9 COMM All Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 10 COMM All Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the referenc
321. n 13 V O connections 8 Power OK and Fault LEDs See section 14 Switch S1 for selecting voltage or current LEDs on page 347 for analog inputs 15 Input power connection U1 V1 W1 and motor connection U2 V2 W2 Braking chopper connection is disabled 16 I O clamping plate 17 Clamping plate 18 Clamps 24 Operation principle and hardware description B Power connections and control interfaces The diagram gives an overview of connections I O connections are parameterable See Application Macros on page 72 for I O connections for the different macros and chapter Electrical installation on page 42 for installation in general Control panel eg RJ 45 JJ Modbus RTU Screen 10 SCR RS 232 Analog input 1 Zi Ai EX AO 97 Analog output 0 10 V L 30 GND Ke GND 8 E 0 20 mA Reference voltage 46 410V vl 10 V DC max 10 mA d Analog input 2 5 Al2 60 GND 90424V PROGRAMMABLE RELAY Aux voltage output 424 V DC max 200 MA 496 GND AND DIGITAL OUTPUTS 11 6Dcom POC RON Relay output Teen BOR 18 550 V AC 30V DC 6A PROGRAMMABLE 189 Dl2 uml DIGITAL INPUTS 144D13 DOSRO 20 Digital frequency output 150 DI4 Yr BOOUT 21 PNP transistor type DI5 can also be used 16b pis DOGNDj 30 V DC max 100 mA as a frequency input L sl 230SHIELD 240B J701 Cem Output relay EFB
322. n as defined below Protocol Reference Drive e Parameter Value Setting Modbus N2 FLN BACnet abb drv dcu profile 0122 Ro 1 3 Relay 1 3 40122 0122 Bl4 76 BIO STATUS status BI6 78 Bl2 0123 RO 4 Relay 4 status 40123 0123 BI7 79 BI3 STATUS E Analog Output Control Using the fieldbus for analog output control requires Drive parameter values set as defined below Fieldbus controller supplied reference word s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Protocol Reference Drive Parameter Value Setting Modbus abb dcu N2 FLN BACnet drv profile 1501 AO1 CONTENT 135 Analog Output SEL COMM VALUE 1 1 controlled by 0135 COMM VALUE 1 Greg 40135 AO14 46 AO0 0135 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 269 B PID Control Setpoint Source Use the following settings to select the fieldbus as the setpoint source for PID loops Protocol Reference i 1 Modbus Drive Parameter Value Settin 3 abb dcu N2 FLN BACnet drv profile 4010 SET POINT 8 COMM Setpoint is either 40003 AO2 61 AV17 SEL Set 1 VALUE 1 Input Reference 2 4110 ser Point 9 COMM Al1 Control SEL Set 2 AI1 requires parameter 4210 10 1106 value comm SC POINT COMM AI C PID setpoint i o
323. n defines the operation of the drive if the control panel selected as control location for the drive stops communicating Settings Parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR B External Fault External Faults 1 and 2 can be supervised by defining one digital input as a source for an external fault indication signal Settings Parameters 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 and 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 B Stall Protection The drive protects the motor in a stall situation It is possible to adjust the supervision limits frequency time and choose how the drive reacts to the motor stall condition alarm indication fault indication amp drive stop no reaction Settings Parameters 3010 3012 Program features 107 B Motor Thermal Protection The motor can be protected against overheating by activating the Motor Thermal Protection function The drive calculates the temperature of the motor on the basis of the following assumptions 1 The motor is in the ambient temperature of 30 C when power is applied to the drive 2 Motor temperature is calculated using either the user adjustable or automatically calculated motor thermal time constant and motor load curve see the figures below The load curve should be adjusted in case the ambient temperature exceeds 30 C Motor A load iva 9 100 L Output current relative to motor nom current 150 Break point Motor load curve P3007 100 1 127 2m P3008 50 M d Zero s
324. n of full magnetization and torque 4 TORQ BOOST Torque boost should be selected if a high break away torque is required The drive pre magnetizes the motor with DC current before the start The pre magnetizing time is defined by parameter 2703 DC MAGN TIME Torque boost is applied at start Torque boost is stopped when output frequency exceeds 20 Hz or when it is equal to the reference value See parameter 2110 TORQ BOOST CURR Note Starting to a rotating machine is not possible when TORQ BOOST is selected WARNING The drive will start after the set pre magnetizing time has passed although the motor magnetization is not completed Ensure always in applications where a full break away torque is essential that the constant magnetizing time is long enough to allow generation of full magnetization and torque 6 SCAN START Frequency scanning flying start starting to a rotating machine Based on frequency scanning interval 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 2007 MINIMUM FREQ to identify the frequency If frequency identification fails DC magnetization is used see selection DC MAGN 7 SCAN BOOST Combines scanning start starting to a rotating machine and torque boost See selections SCANSTART and TORQ BOOST If frequency identification fails torque boost is used 2102 STOP FUNCTION 1 2 1 1 Selects the motor stop method 1 COAST Selects cutting off the motor power as the stop method The motor coasts to stop 2 RAMP
325. nd any applicable provincial codes To fulfil this requirement use the UL classified fuses given in section Power cable sizes and fuses on page 357 Power cable selection See section Selecting the power cables on page 34 Power cable connections For the connection diagram and tightening torques see section Connecting the power cables on page 44 Overload protection The drive provides overload protection in accordance with the National Electrical Code US C Tick marking See the type designation label for the valid markings of your drive C Tick marking is required in Australia and New Zealand A C Tick mark is attached to the drive to verify compliance with the relevant standard IEC 61800 3 2004 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC product standard including specific test methods mandated by the Trans Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme The Trans Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme EMCS was introduced by the Australian Communication Authority ACA and the Radio Spectrum Management Group RSM of the New Zealand Ministry of Economic Development NZMED in November 2001 The aim of the scheme is to protect the radio frequency spectrum by introducing technical limits for emission from electrical electronic products For fulfilling the requirements of the standard see section Compliance with EN 61800 3 2004 on page 359 RoHS marking The RoHS mark is attached to the d
326. nd parameters Group 03 Actual Signals Code Description Range Resolution Default S 0305 FAULT WORD 1 1 0000 hex Read only copy of the Fault Word 1 When a fault is active the corresponding bit for the active fault is set in the Fault Words Each fault has a dedicated bit allocated within Fault Words See Fault Listing in section Diagnostics for a description of the faults The control panel displays the word in hex For example all zeros and a 1 in Bit O displays a 0001 All zeros and a 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000 Bit 0305 fault word 1 0306 fault word 2 0307 fault word 3 0 JOVERCURRENT UNDERLOAD EFB 1 DC OVERVOLT THERM FAIL EFB 2 2 DEVOVERTEMP OPEXLINK EFB 3 3 SHORT CIRC OPEX PWR Incompatible software type 4 Reserved CURR MEAS Reserved 5 DCUNDERVOLT SUPPLY PHASE Reserved 6 AH LOSS ENCODER ERROR Reserved 7 Al2LOSS OVERSPEED Reserved 8 MOTOVERTEMP _ Reserved Reserved 9 PANEL LOSS DRIVE ID Reserved 10 ID RUN FAIL CONFIG FILE System Error 11 MOTOR STALL SERIAL 1 ERR System Error 12 Reserved EFB CON FILE System Error 13 EXT FLT 1 FORCE TRIP System Error 14 EXT FLT 2 MOTOR PHASE Hardware Error 15 EARTH FAULT OUTPUT WIRING Param Setting Fault Actual signals and parameters 137 Group 03 Actual Signals Code Description Range Resolution Default S 0306 FAULT WORD 2 1 0000 hex A16 bi
327. ng is not feasible all parts excluding electrolytic capacitors and printed circuit boards can be landfilled The DC capacitors contain electrolyte which is classified as hazardous waste within the EU They must be removed and handled according to local regulations For further information on environmental aspects and more detailed recycling instructions please contact your local ABB distributor Applicable standards EC EN 61800 5 1 2003 EC EN 60204 1 2006 EC EN 61800 3 2004 UL 508C The drive complies with the following standards Electrical thermal and functional safety requirements for adjustable frequency a c power drives Safety of machinery Electrical equipment of machines Part 1 General requirements Provisions for compliance The final assembler of the machine is responsible for installing an emergency stop device a supply disconnecting device Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC requirements and specific test methods UL Standard for Safety Power Conversion Equipment third edition Technical data 359 CE marking The CE mark is attached to the drive to verify that the drive follows the provisions of the European Low Voltage and EMC Directives Directive 73 23 EEC as amended by 93 68 EEC and Directive 2004 108 EC B Compliance with the European EMC Directive The EMC Directive defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical equipmen
328. ng parameters is displayed Select ABORT if you want to stop the process Start Up 67 After the download stops the message Parameter download CZ successful is displayed and the ge control panel goes back to PAR BACKUP menu Select EXIT to return to the main menu Note Download Full Set writes all parameters to the drive including motor parameters Only use this function to restore a drive or to transfer parameters to systems that are identical to the original system Download Application Copies a partial parameter set from the Control Panel to a drive The partial set does not include internal motor parameters parameters 9905 9909 1605 1607 5201 nor any Group 51 and 53 parameters Use this option to transfer parameters to systems that use similar configurations the drive and motor sizes do not need to be the same To download application to drive follow these steps Select MENU to enter the menu Select PAR BACKUP with the UP DOWN buttons cA Sy Scroll to DOWNLOAD APPLICATION and select SEL T The text Downloading parameters partial is CZ displayed Select ABORT if you want to stop the process 68 Start Up The text Parameter download successful is displayed and the control panel returns to PAR BACKUP menu Select EXIT to return to the main menu Ca Download User Set
329. nge Resolution Default S 4001 GAIN 0 1 100 0 0 1 2 5 Defines the PID Controller s gain The setting range is 0 1 100 At0 1 the PID Controller output changes one tenth as much as the error value At 100 the PID Controller output changes one hundred times as much as the error value Use the proportional gain and integration time values to adjust the responsiveness of the system Alow value for proportional gain and a high value for integral time ensures stable operation but provides sluggish response If the proportional gain value is too large or the integral time too short the system can become unstable Procedure Initially set 4001 GAIN 0 1 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 20 seconds Start the system and see if it reaches the set point quickly while maintaining stable operation If not increase GAIN 4001 until the actual signal or drive speed oscillates constantly It may be necessary to start and stop the drive to induce this oscillation Reduce GAIN 4001 until the oscillation stops Set GAIN 4001 to 0 4 to 0 6 times the above value Decrease the INTEGRATION TIME 4002 until the feedback signal or drive speed oscillates constantly It may be necessary to start and stop the drive to induce this oscillation Increase INTEGRATION TIME 4002 until the oscillation stops Set INTEGRATION TIME 4002 to 1 15 to 1 5 times the above value If the feedback signal contains h
330. nical installation 29 Unpacking The drive 1 is delivered in a package that also contains the following items frame size R2 shown in the figure plastic bag 2 including clamping plate also used for I O cables in frame sizes R3 and R4 I O clamping plate for frame sizes RO R2 clamps and screws panel cover 3 mounting template integrated into the package 4 user s manual 5 possible options Checking the delivery Check that there are no signs of damage Notify the shipper immediately if damaged components are found Before attempting installation and operation check the information on the type designation label of the drive to verify that the drive is of the correct type See section Type designation label on page 25 30 Mechanical installation Installing The instructions in this manual cover drives with the IP20 degree of protection To comply with NEMA 1 use the MUL R1 MUL R3 or MUL R4 option kit which is delivered with multilingual installation instructions SAFE68642868 3AFE68643147 or 3AUA0000025916 respectively E Install the drive Install the drive with screws or on a DIN rail as appropriate Note Make sure that dust from drilling does not enter the drive during the installation With screws 1 Mark the hole locations using for example the mounting template cut out from the package The locations of the holes are also shown in the drawings in chapter Dimension drawings on p
331. nimum value refers to the minimum content value that will be converted to an analog output These parameters content and current min and max settings provide scale and offset adjustment for the output See figure 1503 AO1 CONTENT MAX Depends on 60 0 Hz selection Sets the maximum content value Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501 Maximum value refers to the maximum content value that will be converted to an analog output 1504 MINIMUM AO1 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 4 0 mA Sets the minimum output current 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 2 0 mA Sets the maximum output current 1506 FILTER AO1 0 10 s Dis 0 1s Defines the filter time constant for AO The filtered signal reaches 6396 of a step change within the time specified See figure in parameter 1303 158 Actual signals and parameters B Group 16 System Controls This group defines a variety of system level locks resets and enables Group 16 System Controls Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1601 RUN ENABLE 6 7 1 0 Y Selects the source of the run enable signal 0 NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external run enable signal 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI as the run enable signal This digital input must be activated for run enable If the voltage drops and de activates this digital input the drive will coast to stop and not start until the run enable signal resumes 2
332. nitions 1401 1403 and fax 1410 1412 establish the initial motor sequence The lowest parameter number with a value 31 PFA identifies the relay connected to 1PFA the first motor and so on Initially 1PFA speed Area regulated motor 2PFA 1st Autochange auxiliary motor etc is Allowed The first autochange shifts PID output the sequence to 2PFA speed regulated motor 3PFA P8119 100 1st auxiliary motor 1PFA last auxiliary motor The next autochange shifts the sequence again and so on f the autochange cannot start a needed motor because all inactive motors are interlocked the drive displays an alarm 2051 PFA INTERLOCK When ACS320 power supply is switched off the counter preserves the current Autochange rotation positions in permanent memory When power is restored the Autochange rotation starts at the position stored in memory Ifthe PFA relay configuration is changed or if the PFA enable value is changed the rotation is reset See the first bullet above 8120 INTERLOCKS 0 6 1 4 Defines operation of the Interlock function When the Interlock function is enabled An interlock is active when its command signal is absent An interlock is inactive when its command signal is present The ACH550 will not start if a start command occurs when the speed regulated motor s interlock is active the control panel displays an alarm 2015 PFA INTERLOCK Wire each Interlock circ
333. ns 365 Frame size R2 IP20 cabinet installation UL open esee esee 366 Frame size R2 NEMAT A iiis ic aio SIE RN a ARA de E RR RUN a alia desis RR n 367 Frame size R3 IP20 cabinet installation UL open sees 368 Frame size RI NEMA T Zum ras titer en eror na ed eee lees a a cen Dee 369 Frame size R4 IP20 cabinet installation UL open seeles eene 370 Frame size R4 NEMA T iiis ce vad awe um medo tens ERR Ge CAE ox ek ba ded 371 16 Index Further information Product and service inquiries 393 Product training 0 dee aid ted ee Ee tue et em Ee o Re on obse dd o bt en 393 14 Table of contents Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals Document library on the Internet Safely 15 Safety What this chapter contains The chapter contains safety instructions which you must follow when installing operating and servicing the drive If ignored physical injury or death may follow or damage may occur to the drive motor or driven equipment Read the safety instructions before you work on the drive VAN Use of warnings Warnings caution you about conditions which can result in serious injury or death and or damage to the equipment and advise on how to avoid the danger The following warning symbols are used in this manual Electricity warning warns of hazards from electricity which can cause physical injury and or damage to the equipment General warning w
334. nt 40 50 distribution 6423 AL1RANGE90TO 0 0 100 0 1 0 1 0 0 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current 40 50 distribution 6424 AL2RANGEOTO 10 0 0 100 0 1 0 1 0 0 Amplitude logger 2 selection with parameter 6404 0 10 distribution 238 Actual signals and parameters Group 64 Load Analyzer Code Description Range Resolution Default S 6425 AL2RANGE10T0O20 0 0 100 0 1 0 1 0 0 Amplitude logger 2 selection with parameter 6404 10 20 distribution 6426 AL2ZRANGE20T030 0 0 100 0 1 0 1 0 0 Amplitude logger 2 selection with parameter 6404 20 30 distribution 6427 ALZRANGE30TO40 0 0 100 0 1 0 1 0 0 Amplitude logger 2 selection with parameter 6404 30 40 distribution 6428 AL2RANGE40TO50 0 0 100 0 1 0 1 0 0 Amplitude logger 2 selection with parameter 6404 40 50 distribution 6429 ALZRANGE50TO60 0 0 100 0 1 0 1 0 0 Amplitude logger 2 selection with parameter 6404 50 60 distribution 6430 AL2RANGE60TO70 0 0 100 0 1 0 1 0 0 Amplitude logger 2 selection with parameter 6404 60 70 distribution 6431 AL2RANGE70TO80 0 0 100 0 1 0 1 0 0 Amplitude logger 2 selection with parameter 6404 70 80 distribution 6432 AL2ZRANGE80TO90 0 0 100 0 1 0 1 0 0 Amplitude logger 2 selection with parameter 6404 80 90 distribution 6433 AL2ZRANGE90TO 0 0 100 0 1 0 1 0 0 Amplitude logger 2 selection with para
335. nt location and units of measure are identical to the source signal See Group 01 parameter listing in Complete Parameter List for resolution which indicates the decimal point location and the units of measure 3405 OQUTPUT1 DSP UNIT 0 127 1 4 Selects the units used with the first display parameter 0 NOT SEL 12 mV 24 GPM 36 l s 48 gal m 60 ft wg 1 A 13 kW 25 PSI 37 l min 49 gal h 61 Ibsi 2 V 14 W 26 CFM 38 lh 50 ft s 62 ms 3 Hz 15 kWh 27 ft 39 m s 51 ft m 63 Mrev 4 16 F 28 MGD 40 m m 52 f h 64 d 5 s 17 bp 29 inHg 41 kg s 53 lb s 65 inWC 6 h 18 2 MWh 30 FPM 42 kg m 54 lb m 66 m min 7 rpm 19 m s 31 kb s 43 kg h 55 lb h 67 Nm 8 kh 20 m h 32 kHz 44 mbar 56 FPS 68 Km h 9 C 21 dm s 33 Ohm 45 Pa 57 ft s 10 lbft 22 bar 34 ppm 46 GPS 58 inH O 112mA 23 kPa 35 pps 47 gal s 59 in wg 117 2 9eref 119 dev 121 SP 123 lout 125 Fout 127 Vdc 118 act 120 LD 122 FBK 124 Vout 126 Tout 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN Depends on 1 selection Sets the minimum value displayed for the first display parameter 3407 OUTPUT1 MAX Depends on 1 selection Sets the maximum value displayed for the first display parameter 3408 SIGNAL 2 PARAM 100 199 1 104 Selects the second parameter by number displayed on the control panel See parameter 3401 Actual signals and parameters 191 Group 34 Panel Display Process Variables Code Description Range
336. ntrol requires Ext Trim parameter 1106 value pid1 out and parameter 4010 value comm B Communication Fault When using fieldbus control specify the drive s action if serial communication is lost Drive Parameter Value Description 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC O NOT SEL Set for appropriate drive response 1 FAULT 2 CONST SP7 3 LAST SPEED 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Set time delay before acting on a communication loss Feedback from the Drive EFB B Pre defined Feedback Inputs to the controller drive outputs have pre defined meanings established by the protocol This feedback does not require drive configuration The following table lists a sample of feedback data For a complete listing see input word point object listings in the technical data for the appropriate protocol starting on 274 Drive Parameter Protocol Reference Modbus N2 FLN BACnet 0102 SPEED 40102 Al3 5 AVO 0103 FREQ OUTPUT 40103 Al 2 AV 1 0104 CURRENT 40104 Al4 6 AV4 0105 TORQUE 40105 AIS H AV5 0106 POWER 40106 Al6 8 AV6 0107 DC BUS VOLT 40107 Al11 13 AV2 0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 40109 Al12 14 AV3 0115 KWH COUNTER 40115 AI8 10 AV8 270 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Drive Parameter Protocol Reference Modbus N2 FLN BACnet 0118 DI1 3 STATUS bit 1 DI3 40118 RUD BI11 70 71 72 BI6 BI7 BIS 0122 RO1 3
337. ntrolled eg start stop and EXT1 EXT2 control The drive offers four start and stop times START TIME 1 4 STOP TIME 1 4 four start and stop days START DAY 1 4 STOP DAY 1 4 four timed functions for collecting the selected time periods 1 4 together TIMED FUNC 1 4 booster time an additional booster time connected to timed functions A timed function can be connected to multiple time periods TIME PERIOD 1 3602 START TIME 1 3603 STOP TIME 1 3604 START DAY 1 3605 STOP DAY 1 TIME PERIOD 2 3606 START TIME 2 3607 STOP TIME 2 3608 START DAY 2 3609 STOP DAY 2 TIMED FUNC 1 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC TIME PERIOD 3 3610 START TIME 3 3611 STOP TIME 3 3612 START DAY 3 3613 STOP DAY 3 TIMED FUNC 2 3627 TIMED FUNC 2 SRC TIMED FUNC 3 3628 TIMED FUNC 3 SRC TIME PERIOD 4 3614 START TIME 4 3615 STOP TIME 4 3616 START DAY 4 3617 STOP DAY 4 TIMED FUNC 4 3629 TIMED FUNC 4 SRC BOOSTER 3622 BOOSTER SEL 3623 BOOSTER TIME Program features 119 A parameter which is triggered by a timed function can be connected to only one timed function at a time TIMED FUNC 1 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC 1001 EXT 1 COMMANDS 1002 EXT 2 COMMANDS 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SE TIMED FUNC 2 3627 TIMED FUNC 2 SRC 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 1209 TIME MODE SEL 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 4027 PID PARAM SET 4228 ACTIVATE E Examp
338. o A Dat 2618 S455 i E Zich 655 254 5555 55 SS S535 par 2616 f par 2614 p ec par2612L nu par 26101 I par 2603 I f Hz par 2611 par 2613 par 2615 par 2617 par 9907 Note The voltage and the frequency points of the U f curve must fulfill the following requirements 2610 lt 2612 lt 2614 lt 2616 lt 2618 and 2611 lt 2613 lt 2615 lt 2617 lt 9907 WARNING High voltage at low frequencies may result in poor performance or motor damage overheating B Settings Parameter Additional information 2605 Custom U f ratio activation 2610 2618 Custom U f ratio settings B Diagnostics Fault Additional information PAR CUSTOM U F Incorrect U f ratio 106 Program features IR compensation When IR compensation is activated the drive Motor voltage gives an extra voltage boost to the motor at low speeds IR compensation is useful in IR compensation applications that require high breakaway torque TE No compensation B Settings Parameter 2603 IR COMP VOLT f Hz Programmable protection functions B Al lt Min Al Min function defines the drive operation if an analog input signal falls below the set minimum limit Settings Parameters 3001 Al lt MIN FUNCTION 3021 Al1 FAULT LIMIT and 3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT B Panel Loss Panel Loss functio
339. ocal lock The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The Command Word is 0301 1 Di INV Defines an inverted digital input D11 as the control for setting the local lock De activating the digital input locks out local control Activating the digital input enable the HAND selection 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for setting the local lock See DH INV above 1607 PARAM SAVE 0 1 1 0 Saves all altered parameters to permanent memory Parameters altered through a fieldbus are not automatically saved to permanent memory To save you must use this parameter f 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 2 NOT SAVED parameters altered from the control panel are not saved To save you must use this parameter f 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 1 OPEN parameters altered from the control panel are stored immediately to permanent memory 0 DONE Value changes automatically when all parameters are saved 1 SAVE Saves altered parameters to permanent memory 162 Actual signals and parameters Group 16 System Controls Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1608 START ENABLE 1 6 7 1 4 Selects the source of the start enable 1 signal Note Start enable functionality differs from the run enable functionality 0 NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external start enable signal 1 Di Defines
340. ol Panel on page 347 Consult your local ABB Service representative for more details on the maintenance On the Internet go to http www abb com drives and select Drive Services Maintenance and Field Services Maintenance and hardware diagnostics 345 Cooling fan The drive s cooling fan has a life span of minimum 25 000 operating hours The actual life span depends on the drive usage and ambient temperature When the Assistant Control Panel is in use the Notice Handler Assistant informs when the definable value of the operating hour counter is reached see parameter 2901 COOLING FAN TRIG This information can also be passed to the relay output see parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 regardless of the used panel type Fan failure can be predicted by the increasing noise from the fan bearings If the drive is operated in a critical part of a process fan replacement is recommended once these symptoms start appearing Replacement fans are available from ABB Do not use other than ABB specified spare parts E Replacing the cooling fan frame sizes R1 R4 Only frame sizes R1 R4 include a fan frame size RO has natural cooling iy WARNING Read and follow the instructions in chapter Safety on page 75 Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death or damage to the equipment 1 Stop the drive and disconnect it from the power line Wait for five minutes to let the drive DC capacitors discharge Ensure by
341. ol source is active External 1 or External 2 BV4 HAND AUTO This object indicates HAND AUTO R ACT whether the drive is under Hand or Auto control BV5 ALARM ACT This object indicates the ALARM OK R drive s alarm status 298 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Instance Object Name Description Active Inactive Text Present Value Access Type BV6 MAINT REQ This object indicates the drive s maintenance status Refer to Group 29 in the drive s parameter descriptions MAINT OK R BV7 DRIVE READY This object indicates whether the drive is ready to accept a run command READY NOT READY BV8 AT SETPOINT This object indicates whether the drive is at the commanded setpoint YES NO BVO RUN ENA ACT This object indicates the Run Enable command status regardless of the control source ENABLE DISABLE R BV10 RUN STOP CMD This object commands a drive start Control requires either Parameter 1001 value COMM for control by EXT1 or Parameter 1002 value COMM for control by ExT2 RUN STOP BV11 FWD REV CMD This object commands a motor rotation direction change Control requires 1003 REQUEST and either Parameter 1001 value COMM for control by EXT or Parameter 1002 value COMM for control by EXT2 REV FWD BV12 RUN ENA CMD This object commands Run Enable Control requires parameter 1601 value COMM
342. oltage rating The format is XXXY where XXX The nominal current rating of the drive in amps If present an A indicates a decimal point in the rating for the current For example XXX 8A8 indicates a nominal current rating of 8 8 Amps Y The voltage rating of the drive where Y 2indicates a 208 240 Volt rating 4 indicates a 380 480 Volt rating 6indicates a 500 600 Volt rating 3305 PARAMETER TABLE Contains the parameter table version of the drive s firmware Actual signals and parameters 189 E Group 34 Panel Display Process Variables This group defines the content for control panel display middle area when the control panel is in the output mode Group 34 Panel Display Process Variables Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 100 199 1 103 Selects the first parameter by number P 3405 displayed on the control panel P 3404 Definitions in this group define display content when the control panel is in the control mode Any Group 01 parameter number can be selected Using the following parameters the display value can be scaled converted to convenient units and or D00001 displayed as a bar graph The figure identifies selections made by parameters in this group 100 not selected First parameter not displayed 101 199 Displays parameter 0101 0199 If parameter does not exist the display shows n a 3402
343. olution count in mega 0142 revolutions 19 N A 292 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus FLN Detailed Point Descriptions A mo Drive Point Description Parameter 20 OVRD TIME 1 of the 5 mandatory FLN points required for compatibility None with Siemens control systems It has no functionality in the drive application 21 FWD REV ACT Indicates the rotational direction of the motor regardless of control source 1 REV 0 FWD 22 FWD REV CMD Commanded by FLN to change the rotational direction of the drive Parameter 1001 must be set to COMM for FLN to control the direction of the motor by EXT1 Parameter 1002 must be set to COMM for FLN to control the direction of the motor by EXT2 23 RUN STOP ACT Indicates the drive s run status regardless of control source 1 RUN 0 STOP 24 RUN STOP Commanded by FLN to start the drive CMD Parameter 1001 must be set to COMM for FLN to control the run state of the drive by EXT1 Parameter 1002 must be set to COMM for FLN to have this control 25 EXT1 2 ACT Indicates whether External 1 or External 2 is the active control source 1 EXT2 0 EXT1 26 EXT1 2 CMD Commanded by FLN to select External 1 or External 2 as the active control source 1 EXT2 0 EXT1 Parameter 1102 must be set to COMM for FLN to have this control 27 DRIVE READY Indicates the drive is ready to accept a run comman
344. on Alarm listing 0 No The above alarms are suppressed 1 YES All of the above alarms are enabled 1611 PARAMETER VIEW 1 3 1 2 Selects the parameter view i e which parameters are shown Note This parameter is visible only when it is activated by the optional FlashDrop device FlashDrop allows fast customization of the parameter list e g selected parameters can be hidden For more information see MFDT 01 FlashDrop User s Manual SAFE68591074 English FlashDrop parameter values are activated by setting parameter 9902 to 31 LOAD FD SET 1 FLASHDROP FlashDrop parameter list is shown Does not include short parameter list Parameters that are hidden by the FlashDrop device are not visible 2 SHORT VIEW Shows only a subset of all signals and parameters 3 LONG VIEW Shows all signals and parameters 164 Actual signals and parameters E Group 17 Override This group defines the source for the override activation signal the override speed frequency and pass code and how the override is enabled and disabled When override DI is activated the drive stops and then accelerates to the preset speed or frequency When the DI is deactivated the drive stops and reboots If the start command run enable and start enables are active in the AUTO mode the drive starts automatically and continues normally after override mode In the HAND mode the drive returns to OFF mode When override is a
345. on NEEN docs dee eee eee doe area bees 186 Group 33 Information 21e RR ttm ende doe BER ER Y UR Ud awe 188 Group 34 Panel Display Process Variables 189 Group 35 Motor Temp Meas 00 0 c eee eect tenes 192 Group 36 Timer Functions 196 Group 37 Us r Load CUVE s occa ica one E RE GR UR ed bees Deane rede ele 201 Group 40 Proc ss PID S t 1 5 iced EEN oceania eh Rep PUE uon ae eed 203 Group 41 Process PID Sot2 ENNEN EELER RR Re eee ot tbuti ge 219 Group 42 External PID ENEE RENE ek eR e x eme ee 219 Table of contents 11 Group 44 Pump Protection llis eee eee 222 Group 45 Energy Savings sieslsseeee eee Ae a 228 Group 46 Pump Cleaming III 230 Group 52 Panel Communication 232 Group 53 EFB Protocol 2x ssi de dein dies oe Seda awe es DERE NER 234 Group 64 Load Analyzer 0 cee ett enna 235 Group 81 PFA unies de du ER bote doe SE E x e dad eat AE 239 Group 98 OPONSE ce xeu toes e he Ya e EEN Med ede nad eC Free ds 256 11 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus System oVerviBW oers osa rk lk qe eee eee RR iR SANG wee eee ta ede ker 257 Controllntelfaee ovans three d arbre mea era TUE inen npe ron Re 259 Planning dee aden eels Reema asta EE See KE tee cke 259 Mechanical and Electrical Installation EFER llli 260 Communication Set up EFB issssleseesseee e Serial Communication Selection Serial Communication Configuration Activate Drive Control Functions EFB Gon
346. on in the main circuit at nominal load and in the control circuit with minimum load I O and panel not in use and maximum load all digital inputs in the on state and the panel fieldbus and fan in use The total heat dissipation is the sum of the heat dissipation in the main and control circuits Type Heat dissipation Air flow ACS320 Main circuit Control circuit x E U Rated hu and Gu Min Max Ww BTU Hr W BTU Hr Ww BTU Hr m h ft2 min 03x 02A6 2 19 65 6 1 21 22 7 78 03x 03A9 2 31 106 6 1 21 22 7 78 S 03x 05A2 2 38 130 9 5 32 26 4 90 24 14 03x 07A4 2 60 205 9 5 32 26 4 90 24 14 03x 08A3 2 62 212 9 5 32 26 4 90 21 12 03x 10A8 2 83 283 10 5 36 27 5 94 21 12 03x 14A6 2 112 383 10 5 36 27 5 94 52 31 03x 19A4 2 152 519 10 5 36 27 5 94 52 31 03x 26A8 2 250 854 16 6 57 35 4 121 71 42 03x 34A1 2 270 922 33 4 114 57 8 197 96 57 03x 50A8 2 430 1469 33 4 114 57 8 197 96 57 S phase Uy 380 480 V 380 400 415 440 460 480V 03x 01A3 4 11 38 6 6 23 24 4 83 03x 02A1 4 16 55 6 6 23 24 4 83 S 03x 02A6 4 21 72 9 8 33 28 7 98 13 8 03x 03A6 4 31 106 9 8 33 28 7 98 13 8 03x 04A5 4 40 137 9 8 33 28 7 98 13 8 03x 06A2 4 61 208 9 8 33 28 7 98 19 11 03x 08A0 4 74 253 14 1 48 32 7 112 24 14 03x 09A7 4 94 321 14 1 48 32 7 112 24 14 03x 13A8 4 130 444 12 0 41 31 2 107 52 31 03x 17A2 4 173 591 12 0 41 31 2 107 52 31 03x 25A4 4 266 908 16 6 57 35
347. on message properly received and addressed to this drive Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 273 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS does not advance at all advances when an invalid message CRC is received e 5308 EFB UART ERRORS does not advance at all advances when character format errors are detected such as parity or framing errors e 5309 EFB status value varies depending on network traffic BAOnet protocol 5316 EFB PAR 16 MS TP token counter advances for each token passed to this drive Does not apply for other protocols Loss of Communication The AC320 behavior if communication is lost was configured in Communication Fault The parameters are 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME The Parameter Descriptions section in the ACH550 User s Manual describes these parameter No Master Station on Line If no master station is on line Neither the EFB OK MESSAGES nor the errors 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS and 5308 EFB UART ERRORS increase on any of the stations To correct Check that a network master is connected and properly programmed on the network Verify that the cable is connected and is not cut or short circuited Duplicate Stations If two or more stations have duplicate numbers Two or more drives cannot be addressed Everytime there is a read or write to one particular station the value for 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS or 5308 EFB UART ERRORS advances To correct Check all station numbers and edit
348. on parameter 0308 bit 5 has fallen below limit settings defined by parameter Check f trol signal rogrammable fault eck tor proper analog control signa e 3001 3021 Deer APE levels Check connections 2007 AI2LOSS Analog input AI2 signal Check fault function parameter 0308 bit 6 has fallen below limit settings defined by parameter Check for proper analog control signal programmable fault eck Tor prope g g function 3001 3021 2042 Al2 FAULT levels Check connections 2008 PANELLOSS Control panel selected Check panel connection 0308 bit 7 as active control Check fault function parameters programmable fault function 3002 location for drive has ceased communicating Check control panel connector Refit control panel in mounting platform If drive is in external control mode REM and is set to accept start stop direction commands or references via control panel Check Group 10 AcStart Stop Dir and Group 11 Reference Select settings Fault tracing 331 CODE ALARM CAUSE WHAT TO DO 2009 DEVICE Drive IGBT Check ambient conditions See also OVERTEMP temperatureis section Derating on page 350 0308 bit 8 E Alarm limit Check air flow and fan operation is 120 C Check motor power against unit power 2010 MOTOR TEMP Motor temperature is Check motor ratings load and cooling 0305 bit 9 too high or appears to Check start up data programmable fault
349. ong term monitoring of an internal status signal If the selected signal exceeds and remains above the supervision limit for a longer time than the set delay parameter 4420 PROF LIMIT ON DLY the internal status signal PROFILE HIGH is set to 1 The signal can be directed to a relay output see parameter Group 14 Relay Outputs NOT SEL 0 Not selected CONTROL DEV1 1 Signal 0126 PID 1 OUTPUT is monitored and compared to parameter 4419 PROFILE OUTP LIM Monitoring the deviation between the reference and the actual value gives an indication of the general condition of the pump piping and valves CONTROL DEV2 2 Signal 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT is monitored and compared to parameter 4419 PROFILE OUTP LIM Monitoring the deviation between the reference and the actual value gives an indication of the general condition of the pump piping and valves APPL OUTPUT 3 Signal 0116 APPL BLK OUTPUT is monitored and compared to parameter 4419 PROFILE OUTP LIM The signal constantly remaining at 10096 may indicate a leak in the output piping 4419 PROFILE OUTP LIM 500 0 500 0 1 0 1 100 0 Supervision limit for the Application Profile protection 4420 PROF LIMIT ON DLY 0 00 100 00 h 1 0 01h 0 00 h Delay time for the Application Profile protection Actual signals and parameters 227 Group 44 Pump Protection Code Description Range Resolution Default
350. onment Category C3 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class second environment unrestricted distribution B Category C2 The emission limits are complied with the following provisions 1 The optional EMC filter is selected according to the ABB documentation and installed as specified in the EMC filter manual 360 Technical data 2 The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual 3 The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual 4 Motor cable length maximum 30 m 100 ft with 4 kHz switching frequency WARNING In a domestic environment this product may cause radio inference in which case supplementary mitigation measures may be required B Category C3 The immunity performance of the drive complies with the demands of IEC EN 61800 3 second environment see page 359 for IEC EN 61800 3 definitions The emission limits are complied with the following provisions 1 The internal EMC filter is connected the metal screw at EMC is in place or the optional EMC filter is installed 2 The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual 3 The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual 4 With the internal EMC filter motor cable length 30 m 100 ft with 4 kHz switching frequency WARNING A drive of category C3 is not intended to be used on a low voltage public network which supplies domestic premises Radio
351. operating The number of days after power on if real time clock is not used or was not set 0403 FAULT TIME 2 Time hh mm ss 2s 0 The time at which the last fault occurred Either as Real time in format hh mm ss if real time clock is operating The time since power on less the whole days reported in 0402 in format hh mm ss if real time clock is not used or was not set 0404 SPEED AT FLT 1 rpm 0 The motor speed rpm at the time the last fault occurred 0405 FREQ AT FLT 0 1 Hz 0 0 The frequency Hz at the time the last fault occurred 0406 VOLTAGE AT FLT 0 1 V 0 0 The DC bus voltage V at the time the last fault occurred 0407 CURRENT AT FLT 0 1A 0 0 The motor current A at the time the last fault occurred 0408 TORQUE AT FLT 0 1 0 0 The motor torque at the time the last fault occurred 0409 STATUS AT FLT 1 0000 hex The drive status hex code word at the time the last fault occurred 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 Fault code text 1 0 Fault code of the second last fault Read only 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 Fault code text 1 0 Fault code of the third last fault Read only 0414 DI 1 5 AT FLT Status of digital inputs DI1 5 at the time the latest fault occurred binary Example 10000 DI is on DI2 DI5 are off 140 Actual signals and parameters BW Group 10 Start Stop Dir This group Defines external sources EXT1 and EXT2 for commands that enable start stop and dire
352. or Check input power supply operation eg due to low DC voltage 5032 Parameter error Contact your local ABB representative 5040 Parameter download error Selected parameter setis Perform upload function before download not in current parameter backup file 5041 Parameter backup file Contact your local ABB representative does not fit into memory 5042 Parameter download error Selected parameter setis Perform upload function before download not in current parameter backup file 5043 No start inhibit 5044 Parameter backup file Check that file is compatible with drive restoring error 5050 Parameter upload aborted Retry parameter upload 5051 File error Contact your local ABB representative 5052 Parameter upload has Retry parameter upload failed 5060 Parameter download Retry parameter download aborted 5062 Parameter download has Retry parameter download failed 5070 Panel backup memory Contact your local ABB representative write error 5071 Panel backup memory Contact your local ABB representative read error 5080 Operation is not allowed Switch to local control mode because drive is not in local control mode 5081 Operation is not allowed Check cause of fault and reset fault because of active fault 5083 Operation is not allowed Check parameter 7602 PARAMETER LOCK because parameter lock is setting on 5084 Operation is not allowed Wait until task is completed and retry because drive is performing t
353. or pump cleaning Group 46 Pump Cleaning Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4601 PUMP CLEAN TRIG NOT SEL Defines how Pump cleaning is triggered The pump cleaning sequence consists of forward and reverse steps Forward e Reverse 4603 1 d 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 pit ka M 4607 4605 4604 4606 4604 4605 4604 1 bh gt 1 1 1 4608 e WARNING Before enabling the Pump cleaning function ensure it is safe to perform the Pump cleaning sequence with the connected equipment Notes The Pump cleaning overrides parameter 7003 DIRECTION The Pump cleaning function observes the maximum forward and reverse frequencies parameters 2007 MINIMUM FREQ and 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ The Pump cleaning always uses acceleration time 2 parameter 2205 and deceleration time 2 parameter 2006 The drive must be started and its Run Enable signal must be present before the Pump cleaning sequence can start NOT SEL 0 No triggering source defined DH 1 Trigger on the rising edge of digital input DI DI2 2 See selection DI DI3 3 See selection DI DIA 4 See selection DI Actual signals and parameters 231 Group 46 Pump Cleaning Code Description Range Resolution Default S DI5 5 See selection DI DH SUP10VR 7 Enable on the rising edge of digital input DI1 trigger on SUPRV1 OVER paramete
354. ored through digital input DI1 DI2 2 See selection DI DI3 3 See selection DI DI4 4 See selection DI DI5 5 See selection DI 4407 INLET CTRL DLY 0 1 1800 0 s 1 0 1s 60 0s Sets the delay after which the action defined by parameter 4407 INLET PROT CTRL is taken on detection of low inlet pressure 4408 INLET FORCED REF 0 0 100 0 1 0 1 0 0 This reference is used after detection of low inlet pressure See parameter 4407 INLET PROT CTRL WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue operation using this reference 224 Actual signals and parameters Group 44 Pump Protection Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4409 OUTLET PROT NOT SEL CTRL Enables and selects the mode of the primary supervision of pump fan outlet pressure Note Outlet protection is active only when the active reference is PID NOT SEL 0 Primary outlet pressure supervision not used ALARM 1 Detection of high outlet pressure produces an alarm on the control panel display PROTECT 2 Detection of high outlet pressure produces an alarm on the control panel display The output of the PI controller is ramped down according to parameter 4417 PID OUT DEC TIME to the forced reference set by parameter 4416 OUTLET FORCED REF The drive will revert to the original reference if the pressure subsequently falls below the supervision level The following diagram describes the outlet pressure
355. oss Energize relay when Al2 signal is lost 27 MOTOR TEMP Energize relay when a motor overtemperature alarm or fault occurs 28 STALL Energize relay when a stall alarm or fault exists 30 PID SLEEP Energize relay when the PID sleep function is active 31 PFA Use relay to start stop motor in PFA control See Group 81 PFA Control Use this option only when PFA control is used Selection activated deactivated when drive is not running 32 AUTOCHANGE Energize relay when PFA autochange operation is performed Use this option only when PFA control is used 33 FLUX READY Energize relay when the motor is magnetized and able to supply nominal torque motor has reached nominal magnetizing 34 USER S2 Energize relay when User Parameter Set 2 is active 35 COMM Energize relay based on input from fieldbus communication Fieldbus writes binary code in parameter 0134 that can energizes relay 1 relay 4 according to the following Par 0134 Binary RO4 RO3 RO2 RO1 0 000000 0 0 0 0 1 000001 0 0 0 1 2 000010 0 0 1 0 3 000011 0 0 1 1 4 000100 0 1 0 0 5 62 s ui m Hs zs 63 111111 1 1 1 1 0 De energize relay 1 Energize relay 36 COMM 1 Energize relay based on input from fieldbus communication Fieldbus writes binary code in parameter 0134 that can energizes relay 1 relay 4 according to the following
356. ource for EST 95 Reference types and processing 96 SSUES RET A A E e A E E E E a E rn 96 Diagnostiese eo e SEXY GE a E a aaa rb CE RE PI e E E 96 Reference trimming 52 2 rem eRe a m RERO ERREUR ETE eee EES 97 ll CEET 97 Programmable analog inputs 97 nino MEAT CHE 98 Diagnosties s cuc oz e x ee cee ox Rode RI rend eos doe made d Yee e es 98 Programmable analog output 98 Settings cevieivie e es uk NEES E NEEN EE Rie nem dd pu don uk 98 DiaQnOStiCS TET 98 Programmable digital inputs 0 0 ccc ec eee eee e een ees 99 Settings imo es ows cetera hanidangs ae hae Ede edu ge debt dep E 99 BEL Fr datpebane ate Aosta 100 Programmable relay output 100 Seltinigs iniecta a wee ee c PAG aee ceno reete Pada dp fva pees 100 DiagiiostlcS 1 scia re Rx REEL dee esa aba bee sd EEUU ee RR a 100 Freg ency input sese hr on un EHR EEE TERE Recap YE E ERES 100 Sunc PEE 100 DiAQNOSHCS agase ee bes otio x Earl ar dh soe ab RR EE 101 Ne ele Tu LEE EEN 101 Settings 2 ico cios p E ERR Chet donee LX P qe de eee eae 101 DiagnostlCs ish ne ee Hr hene e uc ue NE RR RR E KORR ENER 101 Actual signals ix cs ca pce re REIR Ca bee RERBA RR RYE Cb aw Pa REG RARE RE 101 Settihigs c arnee r a h newt bende thane dekh ee Seem eher ERES 101 DIAQMOSHES LC 102 Power loss ride through 2425 Lusso ik MEN ER de NEE YA Eb ROCA daa edn es 102 Settings ite wd repr abad digit Eade geen du Rete erue 102 DG MagnetiZing spese dE ERRARE RES E
357. ow U Unpack and check the drive U If the drive will be connected to an IT ungrounded or corner grounded system check that the internal EMC filter is not connected Install the drive on a wall or in a cabinet i Route the cables U Check the insulation of the input cable and the motor and the motor cable U Connect the power cables U Connect the control cables U Check the installation U Commission the drive See Operation principle and hardware description Type designation key on page 26 Technical data Ratings on page 349 Planning the electrical installation on page 33 Technical data on page 348 Mechanical installation Unpacking on page Operation principle and hardware description Type designation key on page 26 Electrical installation Checking the compatibility with IT ungrounded and corner grounded TN systems on page 43 Mechanical installation on page 27 Planning the electrical installation Routing the cables on page 37 Electrical installation Checking the insulation of the assembly on page 42 Electrical installation Connecting the power cables on page 44 Electrical installation Connecting the control cables on page 46 Installation checklist on page 52 Start Up on page 54 22 Operation principle and hardware description Operation principle and hardware description What this
358. parameters 209 Group 40 Process PID Set 1 Code Description Range Resolution Default S Analog Input Reference Correction Parameter values 9 10 and 14 17 use the formula in the following table Value Setting Al reference is calculated as following C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B C value B value 5095 of reference value C B C value 50 of reference value B value C B C value 5096 of reference value B value Where C Main Reference value COMM for values 9 10 and A for values 14 17 B Correcting reference A for values 9 10 and AG for values 14 17 Example The figure shows the reference source curves for value settings 9 10 and 14 17 where C 22596 P4012 SETPOINT MIN 0 P 4013 SETPOINT MAX B varies along the horizontal axis 20 PID2OUT Defines PID controller 2 output parameter 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT as the reference source 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT 1000 0 1000 0 0 1 40 0 Sets a constant value used for the process reference Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007 4012 SETPOINT MIN 500 0 500 0 0 1 0 0 Sets the minimum value for the reference signal source See parameter 4010 4013 SETPOINT MAX 500 0 500 0 0 1 100 0 Sets the maximum value for the reference signal source See parameter 4010 210 Actual signals and parameters Group 40 Proc
359. peed load Motor thermal time constant P 3009 Settings Parameters 3005 3009 Note It is also possible to use the motor temperature measurement function See section Motor temperature measurement through the standard I O on page 116 E Earth Fault Protection The Earth Fault Protection detects earth faults in the motor or motor cable The protection is active only during start An earth fault in the input power line does not activate the protection Settings Parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT B Incorrect wiring Defines the operation when incorrect input power cable connection is detected 108 Program features Settings Parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT Preprogrammed faults B Overcurrent The overcurrent trip limit for the drive is 325 of the drive nominal current B DC overvoltage The DC overvoltage trip limit is 420 V for 200 V drives and 840 V for 400 V drives E DC undervoltage The DC undervoltage trip limit is adaptive See parameter 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL E Drive temperature The drive supervises the IGBT temperature There are two supervision limits Alarm limit and fault trip limit B Short circuit If a short circuit occurs the drive will not start and a fault indication is given B Internal fault If the drive detects an internal fault the drive is stopped and a fault indication is given B Supply phase loss If the drive detects supply phase loss excessive DC voltage ripple
360. principle gc ssaoz uere enc MN REES UBER ERG ee RA EU 22 Product oVervigw orici ced dr EE e RE Ee P ECA EE d paa PS 23 LAYOUT EES 23 Power connections and control interfaces liliis 24 Type designation Label 25 Type designation Ky sonic m Adae se eda nune REIR Gee Bee E 26 4 Mechanical installation What this chapter contains llle hne 27 Checking the installation site 27 Requirements for the installation site 27 Required tools 2 sess m Reha a eee Pa EMRE ER ERR ORE REI ee 28 Unpacking 3 3 5 votes termo a BS cea Pob ut ac BE dE de d Shes anat dud Yol eco d a b 29 Checking the delivery 29 Installing axe uere x mee Ea Cine OP Redon ao vedere Patedrdded V eb eR Reda 30 Install the drive oss eer mm mere ye Re re EER Ee RES 30 Fasten clamping plates iles hm hah 32 5 Planning the electrical installation Whatthis chapter contains 5 erre n orere m eee ree meae e cR t PUR RE RUE 33 6 Table of contentis Implementing the AC power line connection Selecting the supply disconnecting device disconnecting means Europea UNOM x ecce eco reote dece Fb kt uo NE eo C c ed P e eta North PAM WEE Other regions ee V vekeirblerzre eebeexer RIT beri eed ekep praeire Reid Checking the compatibility of the motor and drive Selecting the power cables General rules fs cera rar con he ue dudes ee RARE Pup e papam ere EE Alternative power cabletypes Motor cable shi
361. ps to the next available motor in the sequence An Autochange function when enabled and with the appropriate switchgear equalizes duty time between the pump motors Autochange periodically increments the position of each motor in the rotation the speed regulated motor becomes the last auxiliary motor the first auxiliary motor becomes the speed regulated motor etc When the speed regulated motor reaches the full output it is disconnected from the drive and switched to direct on line connection with a slight delay in between Auxiliary motor 2 is connected to drive output After a slight delay the motor speed is increased to fulfill the pumping capacity needed Auxiliary motors 3 and 4 are started according to the same routine 124 Program features The motor stopping routine always follows the normal PFC routine B Settings Parameter Additional information Group 14 Relay Outputs Selections of relay outputs for starting and stopping of motors Group 44 Pump Protection Pump protection pressure monitoring settings Group 81 PFA PFC control settings B Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0116 Application block output signal 0162 RO 1 status 0173 RO 2 4 status With option MREL 01 only Alarm AUTOCHANGE PFC Autochange function active PFC I LOCK PFC interlocks active INLET LOW INLET VERY LOW Pressure at pump fan inlet too low OUTLET HIG
362. put selection parameter 149 parameter geed AE EN 151 parameter group eeeeeeeeneeeee 118 148 stall frequency fault parameter 182 function fault parameter 182 GglOh iie redet hn 182 time fault parameter 182 standards GE marking EE 359 C Tick marking esee 361 EN 6180023 1 5 nhe eani 359 ICE EN 60204 1 esee 358 IEC EN 61800 3 sse 358 IEC EN 61800 5 1 sess 358 UL 508G eiiam 358 UL marking e 360 start aux motor PFA parameters 241 aux motor delay sereen 243 control EFB comme 265 DC magnetizing time parameter 171 delay PFA parameter 253 frequency PFA parameters 241 function parameter ssss 171 inhibit parameter ssssss 172 parameter group eee eee eee 171 torque boost current parameter 172 start delay parameter ssussss 172 Index 389 390 Index start mode AULOMATIC zx hs Maat Aelat heli 171 automatic torque boost 171 DC magnetizing sseseess 171 Wu EE tend 171 start stop parameter group 171 start stop dir parameter group 140
363. quirements cere 37 changed parameters mode 64 Clock Sets iine E 70 comm error fault parameter 180 COPIA SL iuc etie ode ett 55 display contrast s e 55 display decimal point form parameters 190 display max parameters 190 display min parameters 190 display process variables parameter group 189 display selection parameters 189 display units parameters 190 EE 54 i o settings mode sees 72 maintenance interval battery 344 maintenance procedure 347 lee EE 59 operating the drive sssseess 60 parameter editing ssesesssss 57 parameter lock parameter 158 parameters mode eee 61 pass code parameter sssse 158 reference control parameter 142 signal max parameters 189 signal min parameters 189 195 Soft keyS sn o cede 55 start up assistant ssssusse 56 start up assistant mode 62 status information sss 59 control panel Assistant battery maintenance procedure 347 fault logger mode ss 64 parameter backup mode
364. r 28 B P4 P3 Booster and Time Periods 4 and 3 29 B P4 P3 P1 Booster and Time Periods 4 3 and 1 selected in the timer 30 B P4 P3 P2 Booster and Time Periods 4 3 and 2 selected 31 B P4 P3 P2 P1 Booster and Time Periods 4 3 2 and 1 selected 3627 TIMER 2 SRC 0 31 1 0 See parameter 3626 3628 TIMER 3 SRC 0 31 1 0 See parameter 3626 3629 TIMER 4 SRC 0 31 1 0 See parameter 3626 Actual signals and parameters 201 B Group 37 User Load Curve This new group defines supervision of user adjustable load curves motor torque as a function of frequency The curve is defined by five points The function replaces deleted underload parameters 3013 3015 Group 37 User Load Curve Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3701 USER LOAD C 0 3 1 0 MODE Supervision mode for Motor torque the user adjustable load A i que curves This 1 i functionality replaces Overload area the former underload supervision in Group P3706 P3709 P371 30 FAULT P3715 P3718 FUNCTIONS 3714 P3717 0 NOT SEL Supervision is not active 1 UNDERLOAD Supervision for the P3705 Allowed operating area 2 OVERLOAD P3704 P3707 P3710 P3713 P37 torque dropping below the Underload area underload curve P3 08 gt T 16 Supervision for the torque exceeding Output frequency Hz the overload curve 3 BOT
365. r 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 See parameter Group 32 Supervision DI2 SUP1OVR 8 See selection DI1 SUP1OVR DI3 SUP1OVR 9 See selection DI1 SUP10OVR DI4 SUP1OVR 10 See selection DI1 SUP10OVR DI5 SUP1OVR 11 See selection DI1 SUP1OVR SUPRV1 OVER 12 Trigger on SUPRV1 OVER parameter 7407 RELAY OUTPUT 1 See parameter Group 32 Supervision DRIVE START 13 Trigger when the drive receives a start command TIMER TRIG 14 Pump cleaning sequence is started periodically at intervals defined by parameter 4607 TRIG TIME DI1 INV 1 Trigger on the falling edge of digital input DI1 DI2 INV 2 See selection DI1 INV DI3 INV 3 See selection DI INV DI4 INV 4 See selection DI INV DI5 INV 5 See selection D11 INV DI5 INV 6 See selection D11 INV DI1 INV S10 7 Enable on the falling edge of digital input DI1 trigger on SUPRV1 OVER parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 See parameter Group 32 Supervision DI2 INV S10 8 See selection DI1 INV S10 DI3 INV S10 9 See selection DI1 INV S10 232 Actual signals and parameters Group 46 Pump Cleaning Code Description Range Resolution Default S DI4 INV S10 10 See selection DI1 INV S10 DI5 INV S10 11 See selection DI1 INV S10 4602 FWD STEP 0 0 100 096 1 2 0 196 0 0 Defines the forward step frequency for the pump cleaning sequence in percent of the nominal motor frequency parameter 990
366. r ACT2 scaled so Min ACT2 2 x nominal power MaxACT2 2 x nominal power 6 COMM ACT 1 Uses value of signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 for ACT2 7 COMM ACT 2 Uses value of signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 for ACT2 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 Sets the minimum value for ACT1 Used with analog input min max settings e g 1301 MINIMUM Al1 1302 MAXIMUM AI Scales analog inputs used as actual values See figure A Normal B Inversion ACT1 MINIMUM gt ACT1 MAXIMUM ACT1 96 B P 4018 ACT1 96 P 4019 P 4018 FORMES 1 gt T a Analog input signal Analog input signal 4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 Sets the maximum value for ACT1 See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 Sets the minimum value for ACT2 e See 4018 ACT MINIMUM 4021 ACT2 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 Sets the maximum value for ACT2 See 4018 ACT MINIMUM 212 Actual signals and parameters Group 40 Process PID Set 1 Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4022 SLEEP SELECTION 6 7 0 Defines the control for the PID sleep function 0 NOT SEL Disables the PID sleep control function 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI as the control for the PID sleep function Activating the digital input activates the sleep function De activating the digital input restores
367. r actual values Three signals can be shown simultaneously on the assistant control panel display one signal on the basic panel display It is also possible to read the values through the serial communication link or through the analog outputs B Settings Parameter Additional information 1501 Selection of an actual signal to AO 1801 Selection of an actual signal to frequency output Group 32 Supervision Actual signal supervision 102 Program features Parameter Additional information Group 34 Panel Display Process Selection of an actual signals to be displayed on the Variables control panel B Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information Group 01 Operating Data Lists of actual signals Group 04 Fault History Power loss ride through If the incoming supply voltage is cut off the drive will continue to operate by utilizing the kinetic energy of the rotating motor The drive will be fully operational as long as the motor rotates and generates energy to the drive The drive can continue the operation after the break if the main contactor remained closed ME s one N m Hz Vdc Uod 160 80 520 120 60 390 80 40 260 f 40 20 130 Iu 0 0 o s 1 6 4 8 8 11 2 14 4 Upc Intermediate circuit voltage of the drive Lu Output frequen
368. r applications where a built in timer starts and stops the motor When the variable speed pump reaches a maximum speed limit auxiliary pumps start as needed When using direct speed reference in AUTO mode or process PID see General Considerations on page 73 Momentarily activating digital input 3 DI3 provides a boost function which operates the motor See group 36 Timer Functions for more information on setting up timers X1A 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen 2 JAN External reference 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC QD 5 AI2 PID feedback 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common T 7 AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA i748 AGND Analog output circuit common 9 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 10 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 11 DCOM Digital input common for all 412 DIH Start Stop Activate to start drive I 4113 DI2 Run permissive Deactivate to stop drive P 1601 3414 DIS Timer Override Activate to start drive t 15 DI4 Safety interlock1 Deactivate to stop drive P 1608 1_ __ 16 DI5 Safety interlock2 Deactivate to stop drive P 1609 X1BrizTROiC Relay output 1 P 1401 18 RO1A x Default operation Started gt 17 connected to 19 19 RO1
369. r speed Must equal the value on the motor rating plate 9909 MOTOR NOM 0 15 1 5 Pu 0 1 Hp 0 2HP Vv POWER US Defines the nominal motor power Must equal the value on the motor rating plate 130 Actual signals and parameters B Group 01 Operating Data This group contains drive operating data including actual signals The drive sets the values for actual signals based on measurements or calculations You cannot set these values Group 01 Operating Data Code Description Range Resolution Default S 0101 SPEED amp DIR 30000 30000 1 rpm The calculated speed of the motor rpm amp motor direction 0102 SPEED 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm The calculated speed of the motor rpm 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 0 0 500 0 Hz 1Hz The frequency Hz applied to the motor Also shown by default in OUTPUT display 0104 CURRENT 0 0 1 5 lou 0 1A ee current as measured by the ACH550 Also shown by default in OUTPUT isplay 0105 TORQUE 200 200 0 1 Output torque Calculated value of torque on motor shaft in 96 of motor nominal torque 0106 POWER 1 5 1 5 PN 0 1 kW The measured motor power in kW 0107 DC BUS VOLTAGE 0 V 2 5 Vau 1V The DC bus voltage in VDC as measured by the ACH550 0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 0 V 2 0 Vau 1V The voltage applied to the motor 0110 DRIVE TEMP 0 C 150 C 1 C The temperature of the drive power transistors in Centegrade 0111 EXTER
370. rameter value appears below the highlighted parameter Note To view the default parameter value press the UPIDOWN buttons simultaneously Note The most typical and necessary parameters to change are parameter groups 99 Start up data 10 Start Stop Dir 11 Reference Select 20 Limits 21 Start Stop 22 Accel Decel 30 Fault Functions and 98 amp 53 Groups for Comms Note To restore the default factory settings select the application macro HVAC default Start Up 59 Modes The HVAC control panel has several different modes for configuring operating and diagnosing the drive The modes are Standard display mode Shows drive status information and operates the drive Parameters mode Edits parameter values individually Start up assistant mode Guides the start up and configuration Changed parameters mode Shows changed parameters Fault logger mode Shows the drive fault history Drive parameter backup mode Stores or uploads the parameters Clock set mode Sets the time and date for the drive UO settings mode Checks and edits the I O settings Alarm mode Reporting mode triggered by drive alarms B Standard Display Mode Use the standard display mode to read information on the drive s status and to operate the drive To reach the standard display mode press EXIT until the LCD display shows status information as described below Status Information Top Th
371. rate MAC ID and Device Object Instance parameters Setthe MAC ID using drive parameter 5302 Default 5302 127 Setthe Device Object Instance ID using drive parameters 5311 and 5317 Default Both 5311 and 5317 0 which causes the MAC ID to double as the Device Object Instance For Device Object Instance values not linked to the MAC ID set ID values using 5311 and 5317 For IDs in the range 1 to 65 535 Parameter 5311sets the ID directly 5317 must be 0 For example the following values set the ID to 49 134 5311 49134 and 5317 0 For IDs gt 65 335 The ID equals 5311 s value plus 10 000 times 5317 s value For example the following values set the ID to 71 234 5311 1234 and 5317 7 304 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Max Info Frames Property Configure the Device Object Max Info Frames property using drive parameter 5312 Default 5312 1 Max Master Property Configure the Device Object Max Master property using drive parameter 5313 Default 5313 127 MS TP Token Counter Parameter 5316 stores the count of MS TP tokens passed to the associated node E Statement This statement is part of this Standard and is required for its use BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement Date TBD Vendor Name ABB Inc Product Name Low Voltage AC Motor Drive Product Model Number ACS320 Applications Software Version TBD Firmware Revision TBD B
372. rator input to 0 See DI1 INV above E Group 25 Critical Speeds This group defines up to three critical speeds or ranges of speeds that are to be avoided due for example to mechanical resonance problems at certain speeds Group 25 Critical Speeds Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2501 CRIT SPEED SEL 0 1 1 0 Sets the critical speeds function on or off The critical soeed function avoids specific speed ranges 0 OFF Disables the critical speeds function ECH EE 1 ON Enables the critical speeds 46 function Example To avoid speeds at which 23 a fan system vibrates badly J Determine problem speed ranges 18 Assume they are found to be 18 23 Hz and 46 52 Hz Set 2501 CRIT SPEED SEL 1 m Set 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 18 Hz fil fiH fal f2H Set 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI 23 Hz 18 23 46 52 Set 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 LO 46 Hz Set 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI 52 Hz foutput A 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 1 The value must be less than or equal to 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI Units are rpm unless 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR SPEED then units are Hz 176 Actual signals and parameters Group 25 Critical Speeds Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 1
373. reference Value in percent of the maximum speed 228 Actual signals and parameters Group 44 Pump Protection Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4424 ACT CHANGE 0 1 6000 0 s 120 1s 0 0s DELAY Defines the time that is waited after the feedback value is compared with the old feedback value If parameter 4423 REQ ACT CHANGE is measured in the feedback value the speed reference stays as it is If REQ ACT CHANGE is not seen in the feedback value the value of parameter 4422 PIPEFILL STEP is added to the speed reference 4425 PID ENABLE DEV 0 0 100 0 1 0 1 0 1 Defines the level when Precharge is disabled and PID is enabled When the level is reached PID is enabled PID is executed as parameterized If reference ramp times are set they are used Value in percent of the maximum feedback 4426 PIPEFILL TIMEOUT 1 60000 s 1 1s NOT SEL Defines the maximum time Precharge is allowed to operate If this time elapses PID is preset and PID is allowed to run as it is parameterized with or without reference ramps 0 NOT SEL 1 60000 s Max Precharge operating time E Group 45 Energy Savings This group defines the set up for calculation and optimization of energy savings Group 45 Energy Savings Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4501 ENERGY OFF OPTIMIZER Enables or disables the energy optimizer which optimizes the flux so that t
374. requency input 0 16000 Hz can be used as external reference signal source The update time for the frequency input is 50 ms Update time is shorter when information is transferred to the application program 50 ms gt 2 ms B Settings Parameter Additional information Group 18 FREQ IN amp TRAN OUT Frequency input minimum and maximum values and filtering 1103 1106 External reference REF1 2 through frequency input 4010 4110 4210 Frequency input as PID reference source Program features 101 B Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0161 Frequency input value Transistor output The drive has one programmable transistor output The output can be used either as digital output or frequency output 0 16000 Hz The update time for the transistor frequency output is 2 ms B Settings Parameter Additional information Group 18 FREQ IN amp TRAN OUT Transistor output settings E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0163 Transistor output status 0164 Transistor output frequency Actual signals Several actual signals are available Drive output frequency current voltage and power Motor speed and torque Intermediate circuit DC voltage Active control location LOCAL EXT1 or EXT2 Reference values Drive temperature Operating time counter h kWh counter Digital I O and analog I O status PID controlle
375. request is pending 18 DIRLOCK 1 Direction lock is ON Direction change is locked out 0 Direction lock is OFF 19 LOCALLOCK 1 Local mode lock is ON Local mode is locked out 0 Local mode lock is OFF 20 CTL_MODE 1 Drive is in vector control mode 0 Drive is in scalar control mode 21 25 Reserved 26 REQ_CTL 1 Copy the control word 0 no op 27 REQ_REF1 1 Reference 1 requested in this channel 0 Reference 1 is not requested in this channel 28 REQ_REF2 1 Reference 2 requested in this channel 0 Reference 2 is not requested in this channel 29 REQ_REF2EXT 1 External PID reference 2 requested in this channel 0 External PID reference 2 is not requested in this channel 30 ACK STARTINH 1 A start inhibit from this channel is granted 0 A start inhibit from this channel is not granted 31 ACK OFF ILCK 1 Start inhibit due to OFF button 0 Normal operation E State Diagram ABB Drives Profile To illustrate the operation of the state diagram the following example ABB DRV LIM implementation of the ABB Drives profile uses the control word to start the drive First the requirements for using the CONTROL WORD must be met See above When the power is first connected the state of the drive is not ready to switch on See dotted lined path in the state diagram below Use the CONTROL WORD to step through the state machine states until the OPERATING state is reached meaning that the drive is running and follows th
376. ring function See parameter 4409 OUTLET PROT CTRL Supervision level 4414 DISTATUS OUTLET NOT SEL Selects the digital input for connection of a pressure switch at the pump fan outlet The normal state is 1 active If the selected input switches to 0 inactive the action defined by parameter 4409 OUTLET PROT CTRL is taken after a delay set by parameter 4475 OUTLET CTRL DLY expires NOT SEL 0 No digital input selected DH 1 Pump fan outlet pressure monitored through digital input DI DI2 2 See selection DI DI3 3 See selection DI DIA 4 See selection DI DI5 5 See selection DI 4415 OUTLET CTRL DLY 0 1 1800 0 s 1 0 1s 60 0s Sets the delay after which the action defined by parameter 4409 OUTLET PROT CTRL is taken on detection of high outlet pressure 4416 OUTLET FORCED 0 00 100 00 1 0 01 0 0 REF This reference is used after detection of high outlet pressure See parameter 4409 OUTLET PROT CTRL WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue operation using this reference 4417 PID OUT DEC TIME 0 0 3800 0 s 1 0 1s 60 0s PI controller ramp down time See selection PROTECT for parameters 4407 INLET PROT CTRL and 4409 OUTLET PROT CTRL 226 Actual signals and parameters Group 44 Pump Protection Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4418 APPL PROFILE CTL NOT SEL Parameters 4418 APPL PROFILE CTL to 4420 PROF LIMIT ON DLY provide the Application Profile protection feature based on l
377. ription page 22 describes the operation principle layout power connections and control interfaces type designation label and type designation information in short Mechanical installation page 27 tells how to check the installation site unpack check the delivery and install the drive mechanically Planning the electrical installation page 33 tells how to check the compatibility of the motor and the drive and select cables protections and cable routing Electrical installation page 42 tells how to check the insulation of the assembly and the compatibility with IT ungrounded and corner grounded TN systems as well as connect power cables control cables and embedded fieldbus Installation checklist page 52 contains a checklist for checking the mechanical and electrical installation of the drive Start Up page 54 tells how to start up the drive as well as how to start stop change the direction of the motor rotation and adjust the motor speed through the I O interface Application Macros page 72 gives a brief description of each application macro together with a wiring diagram showing the default control connections It also explains how to save a user macro and how to recall it Program features page 90 describes program features with lists of related user settings actual signals and fault and alarm messages Actual signals and parameters page 125 describes actual signals and parameters It also lists the default va
378. rive that has the desired set definitions e Par lock The remedy is to unlock the parameter set parameter 1602 Incompat drive model The remedy is to perform backups only between drives of the same type and the same model Too many differences The remedy is to manually define a new set or upload the set from a drive that more closely resembles the target drive 70 Start Up Note If upload or download of parameters is aborted the partial parameter set is not implemented B Clock Set Mode The clock set mode is used for setting the time and date for the internal clock of the ACS320 In order to use the timer functions of the ACS320 the internal clock has to be set first Date is used to determine weekdays and is visible in Fault logs To set the clock follow these steps Select MENU to enter the main menu NI Scroll to Clock Set with the UP DOWN buttons and select ENTER to enter the Clock Set 2 mode Scroll to Clock Visibility with the UP DOWN buttons and select SEL to change the visibility of the 3 clock Scroll to Show Clock with the UP DOWN buttons and select SEL to make the clock visible Scroll to Set Time with the UP DOWN buttons and select SEL Change the hours and minutes with the UP DOWN buttons and select OK to save the values 6 The active value is displayed in inverted color 4 eR epa epa eta es Start Up 71 Scroll
379. rive to verify that drive follows the provisions of the European RoHS Directive RoHS the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment 362 Technical data Liability limits The manufacturer is not responsible for Any costs resulting from a failure if the installation commissioning repair alteration or ambient conditions of the drive do not fulfil the requirements specified in the documentation delivered with the unit and other relevant documentation Units subjected to misuse negligence or accident Units comprised of materials provided or designs stipulated by the purchaser In no event shall the manufacturer its suppliers or subcontractors be liable for special indirect incidental or consequential damages losses or penalties Patent protection in the USA This product is protected by one or more of the following US patents 4 920 306 5 654 624 6 175 256 6 313 599 6 552 510 6 859 374 6 972 976 7 034 510 7 084 604 7 215 099 7 274 573 7 372 696 D512 026 D548 183S Other patents pending 5 301 085 5 799 805 6 184 740 6 316 896 6 597 148 6 922 883 6 977 449 7 036 223 7 098 623 7 221 152 7 279 802 7 388 765 D512 696 5 463 302 5 940 286 6 195 274 6 335 607 6 600 290 6 940 253 6 984 958 7 045 987 7 102 325 7 227 325 7 280 938 D503 931 D521 466 5 521 483 5 942 874 6 229 356 6 370 049 6 741 059 6 934 169 6 985 371 7 057 908 7 10
380. rlActive 9902 is PID CTRL modulating The inverter IGBT control is operating Program features 115 E Example The time scheme below visualizes the operation of the sleep function GEING Sleep boost time 4030 4 9 1 1 1 1 Sleep boost step 4031 i Time Selected process actual value 4026 JN Wake up level deviation 4025 Wake up delay Time i Output frequency Control panel tsa Sleep delay 4024 PID SES E SLEEP A gt 1 Slepleve A 4023 Time Stop Start Sleep function for a PID controlled pressure boost pump when parameter 4022 is set to INTERNAL The water consumption falls at night As a consequence the PID process controller decreases the motor speed However due to natural losses in the pipes and the low efficiency of the centrifugal pump at low speeds the motor does not stop but keeps rotating The sleep function detects the slow rotation and stops the unnecessary pumping after the sleep delay has passed The drive shifts into sleep mode still monitoring the pressure The pumping restarts when the pressure falls under the allowed minimum level and the wake up delay has passed 116 Program features B Settings Parameter Additional information 9902 PID control activation 4022 4026 4030 4031 Sleep function settings 4122 4126 4130 4131 B
381. rminal Block X1C c T or d ei D SeeNote2 2 m 5 ON ON Y a z z o O o tn lt SS 23 24 25 26 PREFERRED WIRING 4 Conductor with Shield Xx X X SF x NOTES See Note 2 Shield 1 Use 4 Conductor Cable 2 twisted pair Tie 3rd amp 4th wire 2nd pair to AGND X1 C26 See Note 3 Ground NG e I iG 2 Tie shield wires together at Drive Ko nn Do Not terminate at SCR Shield 4 3 Terminate shield ONLY at Ground terminal Seed erence in the Building Automation Controller 4 Terminate AGN wire at Reference terminal TET in the Building Automation Controller Building Automation 5 Set switch J701 to OFF BUS termination is an active network Controller Pull Up amp Pull Down BIAS resistors are on board the ACS320 Drive Alternate Wiring Diagram SA ACS320 EIA 485 CS Terminal Block X1C c o D See Note 2 o E gt e ON UN Y a z z o Qo E E Ka m 23 24 25 26 ALTERNATE WIRING 2 Conductor with Shield mH N Ka 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 NOTES 1 2 Conductor Cable Tie Shield Wires to AGND X1C 26 Do Not terminate at SCR Shield KR a 2 Set switch J701 to OFF BUS termination is an active network
382. rs cnet ente 235 Parity parameter ecenin 234 PID control setpoint source activate 269 Elei le WE 259 profiles ineat Ree 308 protocol id parameter 234 protocol parameter group 234 235 reference scaling ABB drives profile 324 relay output control activate 267 Seb up cue ete ES eS 262 start stop control activate 265 state diagram seeeeeeee 323 station id parameter 234 Index 375 376 Index status word eeeeeeeeeeeenn 318 status parameter sssessss 235 termination ecce 260 UART errors count parameter 235 comm FBA comm fault response sss 183 config file TAU CODE a sioe imp ERIS 338 connections ER Bert edd d e d e 51 260 constant speed see speed constant construction code seeee 26 contamination levels environment limit ssseesssss 357 shipping limit iere e 357 contrast control panel sueussss 55 control connection specifications 356 location data parameter 130 control cable requirements eeeeeeenneennenen 36 control panel backup drive parameters 65 cable re
383. rs on the falling edge of DI1 DIZ INV 2 See selection DI1 INV DI3 INV 3 See selection DI1 INV DI4 INV 4 See selection DI1 INV DI5 INV 5 See selection DI1 INV 6404 AL2 SIGNAL X X 103 Defines the signal logged for amplitude logger 2 Parameter index in Group 01 Operating Data Eg 102 0102 SPEED 6405 AL2 SIGNAL BASE z Defines the base value from which the percentage distribution is calculated Representation and default value depends on the signal selected with parameter 6404 AL2 SIGNAL 6406 PEAK VALUE Detected peak value of the signal selected with parameter 6401 PVL SIGNAL 6407 PEAK TIME 1 0 65535 d 1 1d Od Date of the peak value detection Day on which the peak value was detected Format Date if the real time clock is operating The number of days elapsed after the power on if the real time clock is not used or was not set Actual signals and parameters 237 Group 64 Load Analyzer Code Description Range Resolution Default S 6408 PEAK TIME 2 00 00 00 00 00 00 23 59 58 Time of the peak value detection 6409 CURRENT AT PEAK 0 0 6553 5 A 1 0 1A 0 0A Current at the moment of the peak value 6410 UDC AT PEAK 0 65535 V 1 1V 0v DC voltage at the moment of the peak value 6411 FREQ AT PEAK 0 0 6553 5 Hz 1 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz Output frequency at the moment of the peak value 6412 TIME OF RESET 1 0 65535 d 1 1
384. rved Reserved Reserved 00032 00033 relay output 1 Relay Output 1 Relay Output 1 Relay Output 1 00034 relay output 2 Relay Output 2 Relay Output 2 Relay Output 2 00035 relay output 3 Relay Output 3 Relay Output 3 Relay Output 3 00036 relay output 4 Relay Output 4 Relay Output 4 Relay Output 4 2 Active low For the Oxxxx registers Status is always readable Forcing is allowed by user configuration of the drive for fieldbus control Additional relay outputs are added sequentially The ACS320 supports the following Modbus function codes for coils Function Code Description 01 Read coil status 05 Force single coil 15 OxOF Hex Force multiple coils 1xxxx Mapping Modbus Discrete Inputs The drive maps the following information to the 1xxxx Modbus set called Modbus Discrete Inputs Bit wise map of the STATUS WORD selected using parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE The first 32 inputs are reserved for this purpose Discrete hardware inputs numbered sequentially beginning with input 33 The following table summarizes the 1xxxx reference set Modbus Internal Location ABB DRV DCU PROFILE Ref All Profiles 5305 0 or 2 5305 1 10001 STATUS WORD Bit 0 RDY_ON READY 10002 STATUS WORD Bit 1 RDY_RUN ENABLED 10003 STATUS WORD Bit 2 RDY REF STARTED 10004 STATUS WORD Bit 3 TRIPPED RUNNING 10005 STATU
385. s None W parameter value a value that was read or is to be written See BV15 and BV16 AV27 EXT PID STPT This object sets the External PID Percent C controller setpoint The corresponding drive parameter is 4211 Control requires parameter 4210 PID SETPOINT SEL value 19 INTERNAL Note For Present Value Access Types R Read only W Writeable C Commandable Commandable values support priority arrays amp relinquish defaults E BACnet Quick Start Sequence The following steps summarize the process for enabling and configuring BACnet on the ACS320 1 Enable BACnet protocol Set drive parameter 9802 COMM PROTOCOL SEL BACNET 5 Note If you cannot see the desired selection on the panel your drive does not have that protocol software in the application memory To confirm this selection read drive parameter 5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID It should read x5xx where x is any value Place the BACnet channel in reset Set drive parameter 5302 EFB STATION ID 0 This setting holds the BACnet communication channel in reset while remaining settings are completed Define the MS TP baud rate Set drive parameter 5303 EFB BAUD RATE appropriate value Define the Device Object Instance ID To define a specific device object instance value use drive parameters 5311 and 5317 object instance values must be unique and in the range 1 to 4 194 303 To use the drive s
386. s analog outputs can be Any parameter of the Operating Data group Group 01 Limited to programmable minimum and maximum values of output current e Scaled and or inverted by defining the minimum and maximum values of the source parameter or content Defining an maximum value parameter 1503 or 1509 that is less than the content minimum value parameter 1502 or 1508 results in an inverted output Filtered Group 15 Analog Outputs Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL 99 199 1 103 Defines the content for analog output AO1 99 EXCITE PTC Provides a current source for sensor type PTC Output P 1505 A O me 1 6 mA See Group 35 P 1511 100 EXCITE PT100 Provides a current source for sensor type Pt100 Output 9 1 mA See Group 35 101 145 Output corresponds to a P 1504 parameter in the Operating Data P 1510 AO CONTENT gt group Group 01 102 parameter 0102 146 199 Not assigned P 1505 P 1511 P 1504 P 1510 Parameter defined by value value P 1502 1508 AO MA P 1503 1509 AO CONTENT P 1502 1508 P 1503 1509 Actual signals and parameters 157 Group 15 Analog Outputs Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN Depends on 0 0 Hz selection Sets the minimum content value Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501 Mi
387. s and parameters Group 10 AcStart Stop Dir Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1003 DIRECTION 1 3 1 1 Y Defines the control of motor rotation direction 1 FORWARD Rotation is fixed in the forward direction 2 REVERSE Rotation is fixed in the reverse direction 3 REQUEST Rotation direction can be changed on command B Group 11 Reference Select This group defines How the drive selects between command sources Characteristics and sources for REF1 and REF2 iPanel REF1 ZEIT T edenes E P1101 Panel REF2 Proe REF1 PANEL 1 PID1 OUT 0 17 JP1107 REF2 Hand Auto Selection REF 2 19 P1108 GE go HAND Panel BEE Me PTT AUTO D P1103 5404 Al P1105 H EXT 1 l EXT2 4 EXT2 iPanel Ref 3 E 1 P1106 a12 P1106 Dl4 oh 0 17 P1107 O AH peed P1108 i i EXT2 l19 Group 11 Reference Select Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1101 KEYPAD REF SEL 1 2 1 1 Selects the reference controlled in local control mode 1 REF1 Hz rpm Reference type depends on parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE Speed reference rpm if 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED Frequency reference Hz if 9904 3 SCALAR FREQ 2 REF2 Actual signal
388. s and parameters 143 Group 11 Reference Select Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL 6 12 1 0 v Defines the source for selecting between the two external control locations EXT1 or EXT2 Thus defines the source for Start Stop Direction commands and reference signals 0 ExT1 Selects external control location 1 EXT1 See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS for EXT1 s Start Stop Dir definitions See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT for EXT1 s reference definitions 1 DI1 Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of Di DI1 activated EXT2 DI1 de activated EXT1 2 6 DI2 DI6 Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the selected digital input See DI1 above 7 EXT2 Selects external control location 2 EXT2 See parameter 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS for EXT2 s Start Stop Dir definitions See parameter 1106 REF2 SELECT for EXT2 s reference definitions 8 COMM Assigns control of the drive via external control location EXT1 or EXT2 based on the fieldbus control word Bit5 of the Command Word 1 parameter 0301 defines the active external control location EXT1 or EXT2 See Fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 9 TIMER 1 Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the Timer Timer activated EXT2 Timer de activated ExT1 See Group 36 Timer Functions 10 12 TIMER 2 4 Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 b
389. s typical wiring using this macro When using direct speed reference in AUTO mode or process PID see General Considerations on page 73 S 1 ISCR Signal cable shield screen 2 AM External reference 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC 5 Al2 PID feedback 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common nd 7 AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA V 748 AGND Analog output circuit common p 49 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC r 10 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 11 DCOM Digital input common for all I 4112 DI1 Start Stop Activate to start drive 13 DI2 Not configured I 4114 DI3 Constant Preset speed 1 P 1202 LL 415 Dl4 Safety interlock Deactivate to stop drive P 1608 16 DI5 Not configured X1BG77ROIG Relay output 1 P 1401 18 RO1A x Default operation Ready gt 17 connected to 19 19 RO1B 20 DOSRC Digital output max 100 mA P 1805 21 DOOUT pt No fault Fault 1 gt 20 connected to 22 22 DOGND Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value None Default macro B Supply Fan Start Up 77 This macro configures for supply fan applications where the supply fan brings fresh air in according to signals r
390. se a tightening torque of 0 4 N m 3 5 in Ib Twist the grounding conductors of each pair in the analog signal cable together and connect the bundle to the SCR terminal terminal 1 Secure all cables outside the drive mechanically Slide the terminal cover back in place Electrical installation 51 Connecting the embedded fieldbus Embedded fieldbus can be connected to the drive with RS 485 or RS 232 B Connection diagram RS 485 The figure below shows the fieldbus connection X1C J701 SCR B A GND_A SCR T 423 SCR ___ Fieldbus cable shield screen l 24 B Positive 2 25 A Negative Sis 525 GND A Fieldbus common E22292229 TEKEE EEE EK Terminate the RS 485 bus with a 120 ohm resistor at the end of the network by setting the jumper J701 shunts as in the figure below Fieldbus controller Jumper shunts connect the 120 ohm p eer umm termination mu l l l resistor Fieldbus RS 232 Plug a communication cable into the control panel connection X2 The cable must be shorter than 3 meters Fieldbus controller 52 Installation checklist Installation checklist Checking the installation Check the mechanical and electrical installat
391. speeds Use IR Compensation for example in applications that require a high breakaway torque Actual signals and parameters 177 Group 26 Motor Control Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2604 IR COMP FREQ 0 100 1 80 Sets the frequency at which IR compensation is 0 V in of motor frequency 2605 U f RATIO 1 2 1 2 Selects the form for the U f voltage to frequency ratio below field weakening point 1 LINEAR Preferred for constant torque applications 2 SQUARED Preferred for centrifugal pump and fan applications Square is more silent for most operating frequencies 2606 SWITCHING FREQ 1 4 8 12 16 kHz 4 kHz Sets the switching frequency for the drive Also see parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL and section Switching frequency derating on page 350 Higher switching frequencies mean less noise The 1 4 and 8 kHz switching frequencies are available for all frame sizes R1 R6 The 12 kHz switching frequency is available only if parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR FREQ NOTE Selecting 12 kHz switching frequency automatically limits parameter 9906 to 0 80 of drive nameplate FLA 2607 SW FREQ CTRL 0 1 1 The switching frequency may be reduced if the ACH550 internal temperature rises above a limit See Figure This function allows the highest possible switching frequency to be used based on operating conditions Higher switching frequency resul
392. stant depending on the state of Timers 1 amp 2 See parameter 1209 1 DI1 INV Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input D11 Inverse operation Digital input de activated Constant Speed 1 activated 2 5 DI2 INV DI5 INV Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input See above 7 DI1 2 INv Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI and DI2 Inverse operation uses two digital inputs as defined below 0 DI de activated 1 DI activated DIT DIS Function 1 1 No constant speed 0 1 Constant speed 1 1202 1 0 Constant speed 2 1203 0 O Constant speed 3 1204 8 DI2 3 INv Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using Di2 and DI3 See above DI1 2 INV for code 9 DI3 4 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI3 and D14 See above DI1 2 INV for code 10 DM 5 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI4 and DI5 See above DI1 2 INV for code 12 2 2 3 INV Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using DI1 DI2 and DI Inverse operation uses three digital inputs as defined below 0 DI de activated 1 DI activated DIT DI2 DIS Function 1 1 1 No constant speed 0 1 1 Constant speed 1 1202 1 0 1 Constant speed 2 1203 0 0 1 Constant speed 3 1204 1 1 0 Constant speed 4 1205 0 1 D Constant speed 5 12
393. stribution loggers are updated on 0 2 s 200 ms time level Three different values can be logged 1 The measured current is logged continuously The distribution as a percentage of the maximum current is shown in ten classes 2 One signal in group 1 can be logged for the peak maximum value The peak value of the signal peak time time when the peak value was detected as well the frequency current and DC voltage at the peak time are shown 3 One signal in group 1 can be logged for amplitude distribution The base value 100 value can be set by the user Logger 1 cannot be reset Loggers 2 and 3 can be reset by a user defined method They are also reset if either of the signals or the peak value filter time is changed B Settings Parameter Additional information Group 64 Load Analyzer parameters 6401 6405 Load analyzer settings B Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information Group 64 Load Analyzer parameters 6406 6433 Load analyzer results Program features 123 PFC Control Requires use of MREL 01 option purchased Separately B PFC control Pump and Fan Control PFC control switches auxiliary pumps on and off as required by capacity changes Autochange function alternates between pumps to keep the duty times of the pumps equal Interlocks function enables the drive to detect if any of the pumps are unavailable eg switched off for maintenance in which case t
394. sts entering the first task Language Select automatically The user may activate the tasks either one after the other as the Start up Assistant suggests or independently The user may also adjust the drive parameters in the conventional way without using the assistant at all Program features 91 W List of the tasks and the relevant drive parameters Depending on the selection made in the Application task parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO the Start up Assistant decides which consequent tasks it suggests Name Description Set parameters Language Select Selecting the language 9901 Motor Set up Setting the motor data 9905 9909 Application Selecting the application macro 9902 parameters associated to the macro Option Modules Activating the option modules Group 35 Motor Temp Meas Group 52 Panel Communication 9802 Speed Control EXT1 Selecting the source for the speed output frequency reference If Al1 is used Setting analog input Al1 limits scale inversion 1103 1301 1303 3001 Setting the reference limits 1104 1105 Setting the frequency limits 2007 2008 Setting the acceleration and deceleration 2202 2203 times Speed Control EXT2 Selecting the source for the speed output 1106 frequency reference If Al1 is used Setting analog input Al1 limits scale inversion Setting the reference limits 1301 1303 3001 1107 1108 PID Control Selecting the
395. t data word For the possible causes and remedies and fieldbus equivalents see chapter Fault tracing on page 328 Bit 0 Reserved 1 THERM FAIL 2 3 Reserved CURR MEAS SUPPLY PHASE Reserved OVERSPEED Reserved 9 DRIVE ID 10 CONFIG FILE 11 SERIAL 1 ERR 12 EFB CON FILE 13 FORCE TRIP 14 MOTOR PHASE 15 OUTP WIRING j N OD o A 0307 FAULT WORD 3 1 0000 hex A16 bit data word For the possible causes and remedies and fieldbus equivalents see chapter Fault tracing on page 328 Bit eo EFB 1 EFB2 EFB 3 INCOMPATIBLE SW USER LOAD CURVE UNKNOWN EXTENSION INLET VERY LOW OUTLET VERY HIGH INLET LOW OUTLET HIGH 10 14 System error o CO NI OD oy BY Ww N 15 Parameter setting fault 138 Actual signals and parameters Group 03 Actual Signals Code Description Range Resolution Default S 0308 ALARM WORD 1 1 0000 hex Read only copy of the ALARM WORD 1 Wee fault is active the corresponding bit for the active fault is set in the Fault Each fault has a dedicated bit allocated within Fault Words Fre idea set until the whole alarm word is reset Reset by writing zero to the The control panel displays the word in hex For example all zeros and a 1 in Bit 0 diaplays a 0001 All zeros and
396. t frequency 3 E 15 0 Hz SPEED 3 U 18 0 Hz Defines the minimum value that corresponds to minimum mA V signal for analog input Al1 Selects a drive status indicated through relay output RO 1 Selects the parameter view ie which parameters are shown on the control panel Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency FAULT 1 SHORT VIEW cm c SE oo ze Actual signals and parameters 127 Parameters in the short parameter view No Name Value Description Default 2102 STOP Selects the motor stop function COAST FUNCTION 2202 ACCELER Defines the acceleration time 1 5 0s TIME 1 2203 DECELER Defines the deceleration time 1 5 0s TIME 1 9901 LANGUAGE Selects the display language ENGLISH 9902 APPLIC Selects the application macro ABB MACRO STANDA RD 9905 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor voltage 230 V VOLT 200 V units 400 V 400 V E units 460 V 400 V U units 9906 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor current lon CURR 9907 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor frequency E 50 0 Hz FREQ U 60 0 Hz 9908 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor speed Type SPEED dependent 9909 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor power PN POWER 128 Actual signals and parameters Parameter Descriptions Parameter data is specific to ACS320 firmware version 4 01C E Group 99 Start up Data This group defines special Start up data required to
397. t of range 0022 SUPPLY PHASE Intermediate circuit DC Check input power line fuses 3130 voltage is oscillating Check for input power supply 0306 bit 5 due to missing input imbalance biona iise asear Check fault function parameters Trip occurs when DC voltage ripple exceeds 14 of nominal DC voltage 0024 OVERSPEED Motor is turning faster Check minimum maximum frequency 7310 than highest allowed settings i speed due to Check adequacy of motor brakin EES incorrectly set torque Mum 1 minimum maximum speed Operating range limits are set by parameters 2007 MINIMUM FREQ and 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 0026 DRIVE ID Internal drive ID fault Contact your local ABB 5400 representative 0306 bit 9 0027 CONFIG FILE Internal configuration Contact your local ABB 630F file error representative 0306 bit 10 0028 SERIAL 1 ERR Fieldbus Check status of fieldbus 7510 communication break communication See chapter Fieldbus 0306 bit 11 control with embedded fieldbus on programmable fault function 3018 3019 page 257 Check fault function parameter settings Check connections Check if master can communicate 0029 EFB CON FILE Configuration file Contact your local ABB 6306 reading error representative 0306 bit 12 0030 FORCE TRIP Trip command See appropriate communication FF90 received from fieldbus module manual 0306 bit 13 Fault tracing 339 CODE FA
398. t power cable and control cables are routed separately Use wire ties to permanently affix control communications wiring to the clamps provided to maintain a minimum 1 4 spacing from power wiring The external control I O connections are OK The input power voltage cannot be applied to the output of the drive with a bypass connection Terminal cover and for NEMA 1 hood and connection box are in place 54 Start Up Start Up HVAC Control Panel Features The ACS320 HVAC control panel ACS CP B features Status LED Green when normal if flashing or red see Diagnostics UP ES Se FF HAND x HELP always available OFF HAND Language selection for the display X0201 Drive connection that can be made or detached at any time Start up assistant to facilitate drive commissioning Copy function for moving parameters to other ACS320 drives Backup function for saving parameter sets Context sensitive help Real time clock Start Up 55 B General Display Features Soft Key Functions The soft key functions are defined by text displayed just above each key Display Contrast To adjust display contrast simultaneously press KS and A or N v 7 88 appropriate Macros Note Selecting the appropriate macro should be part of the original system design since the control wiring installed depends on the macro used 1 Review the macro descriptions in
399. t used within the European Union The EMC product standard EN 61800 3 2004 covers requirements stated for drives See section Compliance with EN 61800 3 2004 on page 359 Compliance with EN 61800 3 2004 E Definitions EMC stands for Electromagnetic Compatibility It is the ability of electrical electronic equipment to operate without problems within an electromagnetic environment Likewise the equipment must not disturb or interfere with any other product or system within its locality First environment includes establishments connected to a low voltage network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes Second environment includes establishments connected to a network not directly supplying domestic premises Drive of category C2 drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V and intended to be installed and commissioned only by a professional when used in the first environment Note A professional is a person or organization having necessary skills in installing and or commissioning power drive systems including their EMC aspects Category C2 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class first environment restricted distribution EMC standard IEC EN 61800 3 does not any more restrict the distribution of the drive but the using installation and commissioning are defined Drive of category C3 drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V intended for use in the second environment and not intended for use in the first envir
400. ta bits No parity two stop bits 2 8E1 8 data bits Even parity one stop bit 3 801 8 data bits Odd parity one stop bit 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE 0 2 1 0 Selects the communication 1 ACH550 profile used by the EFB protocol 0 ABB DRV LIM Operation of Control Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACH400 1 DCU PROFILE Operation of Control Status Words conforms to 32 bit DCU Profile 2 ABB DRV FULL Operation of Control Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACH600 800 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES 0 65535 1 0 Contains a count of valid messages received by the drive During normal operation this counter is increasing constantly 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS 0 65535 1 0 Contains a count of the messages with a CRC error received by the drive For high counts check Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors CRC calculations for possible errors Actual signals and parameters 235 Group 53 EFB Protocol Code Description Range Resolution Default S 5308 EFB UART ERRORS 0 65535 1 0 Contains a count of the messages with a character error received by the drive 5309 EFB STATUS 0 7 1 0 Contains the status of the EFB protocol 0 IDLE EFB protocol is configured but not receiving any messages 1 EXEC INIT EFB protocol is initializing 2 TIME OUT A timeout has occurred in the communication between
401. terminal box Electrical installation 45 B Connection procedure 1 Fasten the grounding conductor PE of the input power cable under the grounding clamp Connect the phase conductors to the U1 V1 and W1 terminals Use a tightening torque of 0 8 N m 7 in Ib for frame sizes RO R2 1 7 N m 15 in Ib for R3 and 2 5 N m 22 in Ib for R4 2 Strip the motor cable and twist the shield to form as short a pigtail as possible Fasten the twisted shield under the grounding clamp Connect the phase conductors to the U2 V2 and W2 terminals Use a tightening torque of 0 8 N m 7 in Ib for frame sizes RO R2 1 7 N m 15 in Ib for R3 and 2 5 N m 22 in Ib for R4 3 Secure the cables outside the drive mechanically 46 Electrical installation Connecting the control cables B 1 O terminals The figure below shows the I O terminals Tightening torque is 0 4 N m 3 5 in Ib J701 X1C X1A X1B 1 SCR 17 ROCOM 2 AM 18 RONC 3 GND 19 RONO 4 10V 20 DOSRC 5 AIS 21 DOOUT 6 GND 22 DOGND 7 AO 8 GND X1C 9 24V 23 SCR 10 GND 24 B 11 DCOM 25 A 12 DI1 26 GND A J701 Connects 120 ohm termination resistor See page 13 DI2 51 14 DI3 S1 Selects voltage or current as the signal types for 15 DI4 analog inputs Al1 and Al2 16 DI5 digital or frequency input Voltage and current selection for analog inputs Switch S1 selects voltage 0 2 1
402. the ABB Drives profile are available ABB DRV FULL This implementation standardizes the control interface with ACS600 and ACS800 drives ABB DRV LIM This implementation standardizes the control interface with ACH400 drives This implementation does not support two control word bits supported by ABB DRV FULL Except as noted the following ABB Drives Profile descriptions apply to both implementations DCU Profile The DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits and is the internal interface between the main drive application and the embedded fieldbus environment Control Word The CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The fieldbus master station sends the CONTROL WORD to the drive The drive switches between states according to the bit coded instructions in the CONTROL WORD Using the CONTROL WORD ABB Drives profile version requires that The drive is in remote REM control The serial communication channel is defined as the source for controlling commands set using parameters 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS and 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL The serial communication channel used is configured to use an ABB control profile For example to use the control profile ABB DRV FULL requires both parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL 1 STD MODBUS and parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE 2 ABB DRV FULL 316 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus
403. the flow the adjustments below correct the reference to more closely match the output pressure When the first auxiliary pump operates increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 When both auxiliary pumps operate increase the reference with parameter 8103 reference step 1 parameter 8104 reference step 2 When three auxiliary pumps operate increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 parameter 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 parameter 8105 REFERENCE STEP 3 8104 REFERENCE STEP 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 2 Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference Applies only when at least two auxiliary constant speed motors are running See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP1 8105 REFERENCE STEP 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 3 Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference Applies only when at least three auxiliary constant speed motors are running See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP1 Actual signals and parameters 241 Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution Default S 8109 START FREQ 1 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 60 0 Sets the frequency limit used to start the first auxiliary motor The first auxiliary motor starts if No auxiliary motors are f Hz P 8115 m Je running ACS320 output frequency fmax exceeds the limit 8109 1 Hz P 8109 1 Output frequency stays P 8109 above a relaxed limit 8109 1 Hz for at least
404. the latest fault occurred The Assistant Control Panel provides additional information about the fault history See section Fault Logger Mode on page 64 for more information 330 Fault tracing Alarm messages generated by the drive CODE ALARM CAUSE WHAT TO DO 2001 OVERCURRENT Output current limit Check motor load 0308 bit 0 controller is active Check acceleration time 2202 and programmable fault function 1610 2205 Check motor and motor cable including phasing Check ambient conditions Load capacity decreases if installation site ambient temperature exceeds 40 C See section Derating on page 350 2002 OVERVOLTAGE DC overvoltage Check deceleration time 2203 and 0308 bit 1 controller is active 2206 programmable fault Check input power line for static or function 1610 transient overvoltage 2003 UNDERVOLTAGE DC undervoltage Check input power supply 0308 bit 2 controller is active programmable fault function 1670 2004 DIR LOCK Change of direction is Check parameter 1003 DIRECTION 0308 bit 3 not allowed settings 2005 IO COMM Fieldbus Check status of fieldbus 0308 bit 4 communication break communication See chapter Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus on programmable fault ade 257 function 3018 3019 page ade Check fault function parameter settings Check connections Check if master can communicate 2006 Ali LOSS Analog input Al1 signal Check fault functi
405. the manual What this chapter contains The chapter describes applicability target audience and purpose of this manual It describes the contents of this manual and refers to a list of related manuals for more information The chapter also contains a flowchart of steps for checking the delivery installing and commissioning the drive The flowchart refers to chapters sections in this manual Applicability The manual is applicable to the ACS320 drive firmware version 4 00E or later See parameter 3301 FW VERSION on page 188 Target audience The reader is expected to know the fundamentals of electricity wiring electrical components and electrical schematic symbols The manual is written for readers worldwide Both SI and imperial units are shown Special US instructions for installations in the United States are given Purpose of the manual This manual provides information needed for planning the installation installing commissioning using and servicing the drive Introduction to the manual 19 Contents of this manual The manual consists of the following chapters Safety page 15 gives safety instructions you must follow when installing commissioning operating and servicing the drive Introduction to the manual this chapter page 18 describes applicability target audience purpose and contents of this manual It also contains a quick installation and commissioning flowchart Operation principle and hardware desc
406. the network master and the EFB protocol 3 CONFIG ERROR EFB protocol has a configuration error 4 OFF LINE EFB protocol is receiving messages that are NOT addressed to this drive 5 ON LINE EFB protocol is receiving messages that are addressed to this drive 6 RESET EFB protocol is performing a hardware reset 7 LISTEN ONLY EFB protocol is in listen only mode 5310to EFB PAR 10 to EFB 0 65535 1 Protocol 5320 PAR 20 dep E Group 64 Load Analyzer This group defines the settings for the load analyzing function for peak value and amplitude See section Load analyzer on page 122 Group 64 Load Analyzer Code Description Range Resolution Default S 6401 PVL SIGNAL X X 103 Defines the signal logged for peak value Parameter index in Group 01 Operating Data Eg 102 0102 SPEED 6402 PVL FILTER TIME 0 0 120 0 s 120 1s 0 1s Defines the filter time for peak value logging Filter time 236 Actual signals and parameters Group 64 Load Analyzer Code Description Range Resolution Default S 6403 LOGGERS RESET NOT SEL Defines the source for the reset of loggers NOT SEL 0 No reset selected DH 1 Reset loggers on the rising edge of DI1 DI2 2 See selection DI DI3 3 See selection DI DIA 4 See selection DI DI5 5 See selection DI RESET 7 Reset loggers Parameter is set to NOT SEL DH INV 1 Reset logge
407. tion Default S 4039 INT SETPNT SEL NOT SEL Selects the source for the selection of the internal setpoint used as the process PID controller reference when parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL value is set to INTERNAL Example 4010 SET POINT SEL INTERNAL 4039 INT SETPNT SEL DI2 Digital input DI2 1 gt 4012 INTERNAL SETPNT2 is used as the reference NOT SEL 0 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT is used as the reference DH 1 0 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT is used 1 4036 INTERNAL SETPNT2 is used DI2 2 See selection DI DI3 3 See selection DI DIA 4 See selection DI DI5 5 See selection DI DI1 2 7 Selects with digital inputs DI1 and DI2 which internal setpoint is used as the reference 1 DI active 0 DI inactive DH DI2 Internal setpoint selected 0 0 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT 1 0 4036 INTERNAL SETPNT2 0 1 1 1 4037 INTERNAL SETPNT3 4038 INTERNAL SETPNT4 DI2 3 8 See selection DI1 2 DI3 4 9 See selection DI1 2 DI4 5 10 See selection D11 2 TIMED FUNC 1 15 0 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT is used 1 4036 INTERNAL SETPNT2 is used TIMED FUNC 2 16 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC 3 17 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 Actual signals and parameters 219 Group 40 Process PID Set 1 Code Description Range Resolution Default S TIMED FUNC 4 18 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED FUN1 amp 2 19 Selects with TIMED FUNC 1 an
408. top 22 Accel Decel and 30 Fault Functions Note To restore the default factory settings select the application macro HVAC default E Start Up Assistant Mode To start the Start Up Assistant follow these steps Select MENU to enter the main menu T Select ASSISTANTS with the Up Down buttons and select CA ENTER 2 Sy XE d Scroll to COMMISSION DRIVE with the Up Down buttons and select SEL 0 Start Up 63 Change the values suggested by the assistant to your preferences cC A and then press SAVE after every 4 change NEED Eu The Start Up Assistant will guide you through the start up The Start Up Assistant guides you through the basic programming of a new drive You should familiarize yourself with basic control panel operation and follow the steps outlined above At the first start the drive automatically suggests entering the first task Language Select The assistant also checks the values entered to prevent entries that are out of range The Start Up Assistant is divided into tasks You may activate the tasks one after the other as the Start Up Assistant suggests or independently Note If you want to set the parameters independently use the Parameters mode The order of tasks presented by the Start up Assistant depends on your entries The following task list is typical Task name Description Spin the motor Promp
409. trolling the Drive sisi n Re Re edad es See dE velar eked hehe Start Stop Direction Control Input Reference Geet Miscellaneous Drive Control Relay Output Control A nes ce eee ee eee eee eed eta vedere ee Analog Output Control e cedo EINEN Eau qal deranged EX PID Control Setpoint Source Communication Fault Feedback from the Drive EFB 0 00 c cece eee Pre defined Feedback iso rh he rh ENN KEE NN EN e M ilbox Reag Wtile acri pr hr R ERR PRU du pags eA a ska ease ae Actual Value Scaling rric sprras perenes f rotpdtidia nudna eee eee Diagnostics EFB dex act eR IR a a aede E eec E Yol ere oe nd Fault Queue for Drive Diagnostics Serial Communication Diagnostics Diagnostic Situations eer pea nem deve dense Ege es rep anb RU Ed N2 Protocol Technical Det 20 0 4 aussi Rl pETREREG DEA RR Y Roh e OVOIVIGW ege UP und ee DIR do pugne epe RU CIR dy t N2 Analog Input Objects N2 Binary Input Objects sisi eee eee Eier 3p ERR xp RERO dd a Xem eie e m N2 Analog Output Objects sssssesseeeee IH eee N2 Binary Output Objects DDE Fil fot er DEER FUN Protocol Technical Datz OVENI W essaie ver pO Re n ORE Decree Nes qum ed conan eee ER RU Repons EE Scaling Drive Feedback Values OO DIG AIS NOTTE DTE Point Database vic e a EEN vee dete eee ea gba hk wea wed wed ERR E e RA Detailed Point Descriptions BACnet Protocol Technical Data Binary Input Object Instance Summary issssl
410. ts for control panel display language selection Prompts for motor data e Guides user through rotation check Commission drive Prompts for motor data Application Prompts for application macro selection References 1 amp 2 Prompts for the source of speed references 1 and 2 Prompts for reference limits Prompts for frequency or speed limits Start Stop Control Prompts for the source for start and stop commands Prompts for start and stop mode definition Prompts for acceleration and deceleration times Protections Prompts for current and torque limits Prompts for the use of Run enable and Start enable signals Prompts for the use of emergency stop Prompts for Fault function selection Prompts for Auto reset functions selection Constant Speeds Prompts for the use of constant speeds Prompts for constant speed values 64 Start Up Task name Description PID Control Prompts for PID settings Prompts for the source of process reference Prompts for reference limits Prompts for source limits and units for the process actual value Defines the use of Sleep function Low Noise Setup Prompts for switching frequency Prompts for definition of Flux optimization Prompts for the use of Critical speeds Panel Display Prompts for display variable and unit settings Timed Functions Prompts for the use of Timed f
411. ts in lower acoustic noise 0 orrF The function is disabled 1 2 oN The switching frequency is limited according to the figure Lon SW f Limit R1 R6 Drives Lia R7 R8 Drives 12 kHz 8kHzt 4 7 ACH550 i Temperature 4kHz 2 Lun ds P 4 kHz ACHSSO i Temperature i 1kHzi 80 C 90 C 100 C 90 C 100 C 2608 ISLIP COMP RATIO 0 200 1 0 Sets gain for slip compensation in A squirrel cage motor slips under load Increasing the frequency as the motor torque increases compensates for the slip Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE SCALAR SPEED 0 No slip compensation 1 200 Increasing slip compensation 100 means full slip compensation 2609 NOISE SMOOTHING 0 1 1 0 This parameter introduces a random component to the switching frequency Noise smoothing distributes the acoustic motor noise over a range of frequencies instead of a single tonal frequency resulting in lower peak noise intensity The random component has an average of OHz and is added to the switching frequency set by parameter 2606 SWITCHING FREQ This parameter has no effect if parameter 2606 12kHz 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE 178 Actual signals and parameters Group 26 Motor Control Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2610 USER DEFINED U1 0 120 of Uy V 1 1V 19 of Un Defines the first voltage point of the custom U f curve at the frequency defined by par
412. tting 1810 FO CONTENT MAX X X Defines the maximum frequency output FO signal value Signal is selected with parameter 7808 FO CONTENT SEL See parameter 1809 FO CONTENT MIN Setting range depends on parameter 1808 FO CONTENT SEL setting 1811 MINIMUM FO 10 16000 Hz 1 1 Hz 10 Hz Defines the minimum value for frequency output FO See parameter 1809 FO CONTENT MIN 1812 MAXIMUM FO 10 16000 Hz 1 1 Hz 1000 Hz Defines the maximum value for frequency output FO See parameter 1809 FO CONTENT MIN Actual signals and parameters 169 Group 18 FREQ IN amp TRAN OUT Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1813 FILTER FO 0 0 10 0 s 120 1s 0 1s Defines the filter time constant for frequency output FO ie the time within 63 of a step change is reached 1814 DI1 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 1 0 1s 0 0s Defines the delay from the signal change to the change of the digital input DI to the ON state 1815 Dn OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 120 1s 0 0s Defines the delay from the signal change to the change of the digital input DI to the OFF state 1816 DI2 ON DELAY 0 0s See parameter 1814 DI1 ON DELAY 1817 DI2 OFF DELAY 0 0s See parameter 7875 DI1 OFF DELAY 1818 DI3 ON DELAY 0 0s See parameter 7874 DI1 ON DELAY 1819 DI3 OFF DELAY 0 0s See parameter 7875 DI1 OFF DELAY 1820 DI4 ON DELAY 0 0s See parameter 7874 DI1 ON DELAY 1821 DI4 OFF DELAY 0 0s See param
413. tting possible Groups 01 04 contain actual signals Def Parameter default value Parameter A user adjustable operation instruction of the drive Groups 10 99 contain parameters Note Parameter selections are shown on the Basic Control Panel as integer values Eg parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS selection COMM is shown as value 10 which is equal to the fieldbus equivalent FbEq FbEq Fieldbus equivalent The scaling between the value and the integer used in serial communication 126 Actual signals and parameters Fieldbus equivalent Example If 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ see page 770 is set from an external control system an integer value of 1 corresponds to 0 1 Hz All the read and sent values are limited to 16 bits 32768 32767 Actual signals in the short parameter view Actual signals in the short parameter view Description No Name Value 0401 LAST FAULT Code of the latest fault Parameters in the short parameter view Parameters in the short parameter view No Name Value 1105 REF1 MAX Description Defines the maximum value for external reference REF1 Default 1301 MINIMUM AI 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1611 PARAMETER VIEW 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 1202 CONST Defines constant drive output frequency 1 E 5 0 Hz SPEED 1 U 6 0 Hz 1203 CONST Defines constant drive output frequency 2 E 10 0 Hz SPEED 2 U 12 0 Hz 1204 CONST Defines constant drive outpu
414. ty arrays amp relinquish defaults Analog Value Object Instance Summary The following table summarizes the Analog Value Objects supported Instance Object Name Description Units Present Value Access Type AVO OUTPUT SPEED This object indicates the calculated motor speed in RPM The corresponding drive parameter is 0102 RPM R AV1 OUTPUT FREQ This object indicates the output frequency applied to the motor in Hz The corresponding drive parameter is 0103 Hertz AV2 DC BUS VOLT This object indicates the drive s DC bus voltage level The corresponding drive parameter is 0107 Volts AV3 OUTPUT VOLT This object indicates the AC output voltage applied to the motor The corresponding drive parameter is 0109 Volts AV4 CURRENT This object indicates the measured output current The corresponding drive parameter is 0104 Amps AVS TORQUE This object indicates the calculated motor output torque as a percentage of nominal torque The corresponding drive parameter is 0105 Percent AV6 POWER This object indicates the measured output power in kW The corresponding drive parameter is 0106 Kilowatts AV7 DRIVE TEMP This object indicates the measured heatsink temperature in C The corresponding drive parameter is 0110 C AV8 KWH R This object indicates in kW hours the drive s accumulated energy
415. ues 3 5 A lolly i lo Output current t I Nominal motor current 3 0 60s fo Output frequency fgnk Break point frequency 251 90s A Trip time 1 5 lane 300 s pec ue E 600 s 1 0 pue me eee s e 0 5 4 fo fank 0 r p 0 02 04 06 08 10 12 3010 STALL FUNCTION 0 2 1 35 Hz This parameter defines the operation of the Stall function This protection is active Torque 4 if the drive operates in the stall region see figure for the time defined by 3012 STALL TIME The User Limit is defined in Stall regi Group 20 by 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 2018 a region MAX TORQUE 2 or the limit on the COMM s input 95 0 NOT SEL Stall protection is not used User 1 FAULT When the drive operates in Limit i the stall region for the time set by 3012 STALL TIME i The drive coasts to stop e A fault indication is displayed f 2 WARNING When the drive operates in 3011 the stall region for the time set by 3012 STALL TIME STALL FREQ HI A warning indication is displayed The warning disappears when the drive is out of the stall region for half the time Set by parameter 3012 STALL TIME 3011 STALL FREQUENCY 0 5 50 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 20 0 Hz This parameter sets the frequency value for the Stall function Refer to Figure 3012 STALL TIME 10 400 s 1s 20s This parameter sets the time value for the Stall function Actual signals and parameters 183 Group 30 Fault Functions Code Description Range
416. uiring steady or 2 slow acceleration deceleration S curve Ideal for conveyors carrying fragile loads or other applications where a smooth transition is required when changing the speed B Settings Parameter Group 22 Accel Decel 104 Program features Critical Speeds A Critical Speeds function is available for applications where it is necessary to avoid certain motor speeds drive output frequencies or speed bands output frequency bands because of eg mechanical resonance problems The user can define three critical frequencies or frequency bands B Settings Parameter Group 25 Critical Speeds Constant speeds It is possible to define seven positive constant speeds Constant speeds are selected with digital inputs Constant speed activation overrides the external speed reference Constant speed selections are ignored if PID reference is being followed or drive is in local control mode This function operates on a 2 ms time level B Settings Parameter Group 12 Constant Speeds Constant speed 7 1208 CONST SPEED 7 is also used for fault functions See parameter group Group 30 Fault Functions Program features 105 Custom U f ratio The user can define a U f curve output voltage as a function of frequency This custom ratio is used only in special applications where linear and squared U f ratio are not sufficient eg when motor break away torque needs to be boosted Voltage V Custom U f rati
417. uit as follows Wire a contact of the motor s On Off switch to the Interlock circuit the drive s PFA logic can then recognize that the motor is switched off and start the next available motor Wire a contact of the motor thermal relay or other protective device in the motor circuit to the Interlock input the drive s PFA logic can then recognize that a motor fault is activated and stop the motor 0 NOT SEL Disables the Interlock function All digital inputs are available for other purposes Requires 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 The Autochange function must be disabled if Interlock function is disabled 1 DI1 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with D11 to the interlock signal for each PFA relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on The number of PFA relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFA Actual signals and parameters 249 Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution Default S The Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No PFA Autochange Disabled Autochange Enabled Relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 Speed Reg Motor Not allowed DI2 DI5 Free 1 DI Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFA Relay DI2 First PFA Relay DI2 DI5 Free DI3 DI5 Free 2 DI Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFA Relay DI2 First PFA Relay DI2 Second PFA Relay DI3
418. ult is full reverse operation Instead use the following set up so that loss of the analog input triggers a fault stopping the drive Set parameter 1301 MINIMUM AU 1304 MINIMUM AI2 at 20 2 V or 4 mA Set parameter 3021 AU FAULT LIMIT to a value 5 or higher Set parameter 3001 AI MIN FUNCTION to 1 FAULT 4 AIZ JOYST Defines analog input 2 A12 configured for joystick operation as the reference source See above Al1 JOYST description 5 DI3U 4D R Defines digital inputs as the speed reference source motor potentiometer control Digital input DI3 increases the speed the U stands for up Digital input D14 decreases the speed the D stands for down A Stop command resets the reference to zero the R stands for reset Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 controls the reference signal s rate of change 6 DI3U 4D Same as above DI3U 4D R except A Stop command does not reset the reference to zero The reference is stored When the drive restarts the motor ramps up at the selected acceleration rate to the stored reference 7 DIBU 6D Same as above DI3U 4D except that DI5 and DI6 are the digital inputs used 8 COMM Defines the fieldbus as the reference source EXT REF 1 MAX EXT REF 1 MIN EXT REF 1 MIN Actual signals and parameters 145 Group 11 Reference Select Code Description Range Resolution Default S
419. unctions Output Prompts for the signals indicated through the relay outputs Prompts for signals indicated through the analog outputs AO1 and AO2 Sets the minimum maximum scaling and inversion values E Changed Parameters Mode To view and edit a listing of all parameters that have been changed from macro default values follow these steps Select MENU to enter the menu u 1 Select CHANGED PAR with the UP DOWN buttons and select CA ENTER 2 bh u A list of changed parameters is displayed Select EXIT to exit the A 3 parameters mode E Fault Logger Mode Use the Fault Logger Mode to see drive fault history fault state details and help for the faults 1 Select FAULT LOGGER in the Main Menu 2 Press ENTER to see the latest faults up to 10 faults maximum 3 Press DETAIL to see details for the selected fault Details are available for the three latest faults Start Up 65 4 Press DIAG to see the help description for the fault See Diagnostics section Note If a power off occurs only the three latest faults will remain with details only in the first fault E Drive Parameter Backup Mode Use the parameter backup mode to export parameters from one drive to another The parameters are uploaded from a drive to the control panel and downloaded from the control panel to another drive Two options are available Par Backup Mode The Assistant
420. uoc CY qua Ug programmable fault LIMIT i function 3001 3021 Check connections 0008 AI2LOSS Analog input AI2 signal Check fault function parameter 8110 has fallen below limit settings 0305 bit 7 defined by parameter Check for proper analog control signal programmable fault function 3001 3022 3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT levels Check connections Fault tracing 337 CODE FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO 0009 MOT OVERTEMP Motor temperature is Check motor ratings load and cooling 4310 too mga or appears to Check start up data 0305 bit 8 be too high due to Check fault function parameters programmable fault function 0305 3009 3504 excessive load insufficient motor power inadequate cooling or incorrect start up data Measured motor temperature has exceeded fault limit set by parameter 3504 FAULT LIMIT Check value of fault limit Check that actual number of sensors corresponds to value set by parameter 3501 SENSOR TYPE Let motor cool down Ensure proper motor cooling Check cooling fan clean cooling surfaces etc 0010 PANEL LOSS Control panel selected Check panel connection 5300 as active control Check fault function parameters 0305 bit 9 oravan for drive has Check control panel connector programmable fault communicatina Refit control panel in mounting function 3002 DM platform If drive is in external control mode REM and is
421. us register 40005 5311 EFB PAR 11 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40006 5312 EFB PAR 12 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40007 5313 EFB PAR 13 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40008 5314 EFB PAR 14 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40009 5315 EFB PAR 15 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40010 5316 EFB PAR 16 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40011 5317 EFB PAR 17 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40012 5318 Reserved 5319 EFB PAR 19 Holds a copy in hex of the CONTROL WORD Modbus register 40001 5320 EFB PAR 20 Holds a copy in hex of the STATUS WORD Modbus register 40004 314 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Except where restricted by the drive all parameters are available for both reading and writing The parameter writes are verified for the correct value and for a valid register addresses Note Parameter writes through standard Modbus are always volatile i e modified values are not automatically stored to permanent memory Use parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE to save all altered values The AC320 supports the following Modbus function codes for 4xxxx registers Function Code Description 03 Read holding 4xxxx registers 06 Preset single 4xxxx register 16 0x10 Hex Preset multiple 4xxxx registers 23 0x17 He
422. us without drop out lines Bus interface isolated from the drive 1 2 76 8 kbit s Serial asynchronous half duplex Modbus Approximately 95 to 98 at nominal power level depending on the drive size and options Degrees of protection IP20 cabinet installation UL open Standard enclosure The drive must be installed in a cabinet to fulfil the requirements for shielding from contact IP20 NEMA 1 Achieved with an option kit including a hood and a connection box Ambient conditions Technical data 357 Environmental limits for the drive are given below The drive is to be used in a heated indoor controlled environment Operation installed for stationary use Storage in the protective package Transportation in the protective package Installation site altitude 0 to 2000 m 6600 ft above sea level above 1000 m 3300 ft see section Derating on page 3 Air temperature 10 to 50 C 14 to 122 F No frost allowed See section Derating on page 350 40 to 70 C 40 to 158 F 40 to 70 C 40 to 158 F Relative humidity 0 to 95 Max 95 Max 95 No condensation allowed Maximum allowed relative humidity is 60 in the presence of corrosive gases Contamination levels IEC 60721 3 3 IEC 60721 3 2 IEC 60721 3 1 No conductive dust allowed According to IEC 60721 3 3 chemical gases Class 3C2 solid particles Class
423. used for the frequency input must be shielded Planning the electrical installation 37 Use a double shielded twisted pair cable Figure a for example JAMAK by Draka NK Cables for analog signals Employ one individually shielded pair for each signal Do not use common return for different analog signals A double shielded cable is the best alternative for low voltage digital signals but a single shielded or unshielded twisted multipair cable Figure b is also usable However for frequency input always use a shielded cable Double shielded twisted Single shielded twisted multipair cable multipair cable Run analog and digital signals in separate cables Relay controlled signals providing their voltage does not exceed 48 V can be run in the same cables as digital input signals It is recommended that the relay controlled signals are run as twisted pairs Never mix 24 V DC and 115 230 V AC signals in the same cable E Relay cable The cable type with braided metallic screen for example OLFLEX by LAPPKABEL has been tested and approved by ABB B Control panel cable In remote use the cable connecting the control panel to the drive must not exceed 3 m 10 ft The cable type tested and approved by ABB is used in control panel option kits Routing the cables Route the motor cable away from other cable routes Motor cables of several drives can be run in parallel installed next to each other It is recom
424. ustment for the reference See figure at parameter 1104 Example To set the minimum analog input value to 4 mA Configure the analog input for 0 20 mA current signal Calculate the minimum 4 mA as a percent of full range 20 mA 4 mA 20 mA 100 20 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 0 0 100 0 0 1 20 0 Defines the maximum value of the analog input Define value as a percent of the full analog signal range The maximum analog input signal corresponds to 1105 REF1 MAX or 1108 REF2 MAX See figure at parameter 1104 1303 FILTER Al1 0 0 10 0 s 0 1s Dis Defines the filter time constant for analog 95 A input 1 A1 The filtered signal reaches 63 of a step change within the time specified 100 T Unfiltered signal 63 T7777 Filtered signal t Time constant 1304 MINIMUM AI2 0 0 100 0 0 1 20 0 Defines the minimum value of the analog input See MINIMUM AUT above 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 0 0 100 0 0 1 100 0 Defines the maximum value of the analog input e See MAXIMUM Al1 above 1306 FILTER Al2 0 0 10 0 s 0 1s 0 1s Defines the filter time constant for analog input 2 A12 e See FILTER AU above Actual signals and parameters 153 E Group 14 Relay Outputs This group defines the condition that activates each of the relay outputs Group 14 Relay Outputs Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1401 RELAY OUT
425. utomatic resets apu exceeds this limit within the trial Trial time time the drive prevents additional e Time automatic resets and remains x NN gt stopped Starting then requires a successful x Automatic reset reset performed from the control panel or from a source selected by 1604 FAULT RESET SEL Example Three faults have occurred in the trial time The last is reset only if the value for 3101 NR OF TRIALS is 3 or more 3102 TRIAL TIME 1 0 600 0 s Dis 30 0 s Sets the time period used for counting and limiting the number of resets See 3101 NR OF TRIALS 3103 DELAY TIME 0 0 120 0 s 0 1s 0 5s Sets the delay time between a fault detection and attempted drive restart f DELAY TIME zero the drive resets immediately 3104 AR OVERCURRENT 0 1 1 0 Sets the automatic reset for the overcurrent function on or off 0 DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault OVERCURRENT after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation 3105 AR OVERVOLTAGE 0 1 1 1 Sets the automatic reset for the overvoltage function on or off 0 DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault DC OVERVOLT after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation 3106 AR 0 1 1 1 UNDERVOLTAGE Sets the automatic reset for the undervoltage function on or off 0 DISABLE
426. voltage F4 settings 0307 bit 15 Setting 1017 PAR SETUP 1 It is not allowed to use Disable frequency output or frequency 6320 frequency input signal input 0307 bit 15 and frequency output e change transistor output to digital signal simultaneously mode value of parameter 1804 TO MODE DIGITAL or change frequency input selection to other value in parameters Group 11 Reference Select Group 40 Process PID Set 1 Group 41 Process PID Set 2 and Group 42 External PID 1026 PAR USER LOAD C Incorrect user load Check parameter settings Following 6320 0307 bit 15 curve parameter setting must apply 3704 LOAD FREQ 1 3707 LOAD FREQ 2 3710 LOAD FREQ 3 3713 LOAD FREQ 4 3716 LOAD FREQ 5 3705 LOAD TORQ LOW 1 3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1 3708 LOAD TORQ LOW 2 3709 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2 3711 LOAD TORQ LOW 3 3712 LOAD TORQ HIGH 3 3714 LOAD TORQ LOW 4 lt 3715 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4 e S717 LOAD TORQ LOW 5 lt 3718 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5 I IA IA JA Fault tracing 343 Embedded fieldbus faults Embedded fieldbus faults can be traced by monitoring group Group 53 EFB Protocol parameters See also fault alarm SERIAL 1 ERR B No master device If there is no master device on line parameter 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES and 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS values remain unchanged What to do Check that the network master is connected and properly configured Check the cable connection B Same device a
427. x Read write 4xxxx registers Actual Values The contents of the register addresses 40005 40012 are ACTUAL VALUES and are Specified using parameters 5310 5317 Read only values containing information on the operation of the drive 16 bit words containing a sign bit and a 15 bit integer When negative values written as the two s complement of the corresponding positive value Scaled as described earlier in Actual Value Scaling Exception Codes Exception codes are serial communication responses from the drive The ACS320 supports the standard Modbus exception codes defined below Exception Code Name Meaning 01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION Unsupported Command 02 ILLEGAL DATA The data address received in the query is not allowable It is ADDRESS not a defined parameter group 03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE A value contained in the query data field is not an allowable value for the AC320 because it is one of the following Outside min or max limits Parameter is read only Message is too long Parameter write not allowed when start is active Parameter write not allowed when factory macro is selected Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 315 ABB Control Profiles Technical Data B Overview ABB Drives Profile The ABB Drives profile provides a standard profile that can be used on multiple protocols including Modbus and the protocols available on the FBA module Two implementations of
428. x 667 B Point Database The following table lists the point database for FLN ACS320 Application 2734 FLN Point Database Point Subpoint Name Default Units Slope Intercept On Text Off Text Type SI Units 01 LAO CTLR 99 1 0 ADDRESS 02 LAO APPLICATION 2734 1 03 ILAI FREQ OUTPUT 0 Hz 0 1 0 S 04 LAI PCT OUTPUT 0 PCT 0 1 0 05 LAI SPEED 0 RPM 1 0 06 LAI CURRENT 0 A 0 1 288 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus FLN Point Database eel Subpoint Name Default Units Slope Intercept On Text Off Text Type SI Units 07 LAl TORQUE 0 PCT 0 1 200 08 ILAI POWER 0 HP 0 134 0 S 0 KW 0 1 0 09 ILAI DRIVE TEMP 77 F 0 18 32 25 C 0 1 0 10 ILAI DRIVE KWH 0 KWH 1 11 LA DRIVE MWH 0 MWH 1 12 ILAI RUN TIME 0 HRS 1 KR 13 LAl DC BUS VOLT 0 V 1 14 ILAI OUTPUT VOLT 0 V 1 15 ILAI PRC PID FBCK 10 PCT 0 1 S 16 ILAI PRC PID DEV jO PCT 0 1 S 17 ILAI MOTOR TEMP 77 25 F C 1 8 1 1320 18 ILAI MREV 0 MREV 1 0 COUNTER 20 LAO OVRD TIME 1 hrs 1 0 e 21 ILDI FWD REV FWD 1 0 REV FWD 22 LDO CMD FWD REV FWD 1 0 REV FWD 23 LDI STOP RUN STOP 1 0 RUN STOP 24 LDO CMD STP STRT STOP 1 0 RUN STOP 25 ILDI EXT1 2
429. y output activation condition parameters 153 off delay parameters 155 on delay parameters 155 parameter group eee eee e eres 153 Index 387 388 Index relays specifications essssees 356 remove COVED iiini a i peoi 50 reports FLN fieldbus sssessss 282 reset automatic analog input less than min parameter 185 delay time parameter 184 external fault parameter 185 number of trials parameter 184 overcurrent parameter 184 parameter group trial time parameter sssse 184 undervoltage parameter 184 resonance avoiding select parameter suuussss 175 revolution counter data parameter 132 RoHS marking eese 361 RS232 baud rate parameter 233 panel parameter group 232 parity parameter sssssssss 233 station id parameter 232 RS232 counts buffer overruns parameter 233 CRC errors parameter 233 frame errors parameter 233 234 ok messages parameter

ACS310 User`s Manual - HSL Automation Home Page

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents